V Series IPS Technical Overview - Public Support Login - Unisys

Title 

o New Release • Revision o Update o New Mail Code 

V Series Item Processing System (IPS) Technical Overview (3981 6061–201) 

This Product Information Announcement announces a revision of the V Series Item Processing System (IPS) Technical 

Overview, dated October, 1997. This revision incorporates information related to the ICPS Windows NT–based 

Power Encode application and the Common Image Export application. 

To order a Product Information Library CD-ROM or paper copies of this document 

• United States customers, call Unisys Direct at 1-800-448-1424. 

• Customers outside the United States, contact your Unisys sales office. 

• Unisys personnel, use the Electronic Literature Ordering (ELO) system. 

Product Information 

Announcement 

Comments about documentation can be sent through e-mail to bcomserv@unisys.com. 

Announcement only: Announcement and attachments: System: V Series IPS 

VC Release: ICPS Power Encode 4.0 

Date: October 1997 

Part number: 3981 6061–201

V Series 

Item Processing System 

(IPS) 

Technical Overview 

Release ICPS Power Encode 4.0 October 1997 

Printed in US America 

Priced Item 3981 6061–201

V Series 

Item Processing System 

(IPS) 

Technical Overview 

Copyright © 1997 Unisys Corporation. 

All rights reserved. 

Unisys is a registered trademark of Unisys Corporation. 

Release ICPS Power Encode 4.0 October 1997 

Printed in US America 

Priced Item 3981 6061–201

The names, places, and/or events used in this publication are not intended to correspond to any 

individual, group, or association existing, living, or otherwise. Any similarity or likeness of the names, 

places, and/or events with the names of any individual, living or otherwise, or that of any group or 

association is purely coincidental and unintentional. 

NO WARRANTIES OF ANY NATURE ARE EXTENDED BY THIS DOCUMENT. Any product or related 

information described herein is only furnished pursuant and subject to the terms and conditions of a 

duly executed agreement to purchase or lease equipment or to license software. The only warranties 

made by Unisys, if any, with respect to the products described in this document are set forth in such 

agreement. Unisys cannot accept any financial or other responsibility that may be the result of your 

use of the information in this document or software material, including direct, special, or consequential 

damages. 

You should be very careful to ensure that the use of this information and/or software material complies 

with the laws, rules, and regulations of the jurisdictions with respect to which it is used. 

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. Revisions may be issued to 

advise of such changes and/or additions. 

RESTRICTED – Use, reproduction, or disclosure is restricted by DFARS 252.227–7013 and 252.211– 

7015/FAR 52.227–14 & 52.227-19 for commercial computer software. 

Correspondence regarding this publication should be forwarded to Unisys Corporation by addressing 

remarks to ISG Product Information, Unisys Corporation, 41100 Plymouth Road, Plymouth, MI 48170– 

1892 U.S.A. 

Comments about documentation can also be sent through e-mail to bcomserv@unisys.com. 

Unisys is a registered trademark of Unisys Corporation. 

All other terms mentioned in this document that are known to be trademarks or service marks have 

been appropriately capitalized. Unisys Corporation cannot attest to the accuracy of this information. 

Use of a term in this document should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or 

service mark.

Contents 

Section 1. Flow of Work and Item Processing Concepts 

General Processing Concepts ............................................... 1–2 

MICR Code Line ................................................... 1–4 

Conventional Check Processing ............................ 1–4 

Check Processing with Imaging ............................. 1–5 

IPS Work Flow ........................................................................ 1–6 

IPS Conventional Environment ............................... 1–6 

IPS Daily Processing Tasks ................................... 1–7 

Creating Sort Patterns .......................................... 1–8 

Performing Encode and Proof ............................... 1–8 

Setting Up Work ................................................... 1–8 

Sorting Documents .............................................. 1–9 

Performing Repass .............................................. 1–9 

Reentering Rejects ............................................... 1–9 

Balancing ............................................................ 1–10 

Printing Transit Reports ........................................ 1–11 

Extracting Data .................................................... 1–11 

Backing Up Data .................................................. 1–12 

Available IPS Prime Pass Work Flow Options .......... 1–12 

IPS Work Flow with ICPS ........................................................ 1–13 

IPS Imaging Environment ...................................... 1–13 

IPS Imaging Daily Processing Tasks ...................... 1–13 



Sorting Documents and Capturing Images ............. 1–15 

Modifying Code-Line Data ..................................... 1–15 

Reentering Rejects ............................................... 1–16 

Balancing ............................................................ 1–16 

Performing Repass and Encoding .......................... 1–16 

Printing Transit Reports ........................................ 1–17 

Extracting Data .................................................... 1–17 

Printing End-of-Day Reports ................................... 1–17 

Available ICPS Prime Pass Work Flow Options ........ 1–17 

3981 6061–201 v

Contents 

IPS Work Flow with IXPS ........................................................ 1–18 

IPS Imaging Environment ...................................... 1–18 

Image Export Daily Processing Tasks .................... 1–19 



Sorting Documents and Capturing Images .............. 1–21 

Modifying Code-Line Data ...................................... 1–21 

Producing IXPS Missing and Free Reports .............. 1–22 

Extracting Code-Line Data and Document Images ... 1–22 

Exporting Prime Pass Data .................................... 1–22 

Common Image Export .......................................................... 1–23 

MICR Code Line ...................................................................... 1–23 

Control Levels ........................................................................ 1–26 

Batch .................................................................. 1–26 

Block ................................................................. 1–26 

Job ..................................................................... 1–26 

Control Tickets ....................................................................... 1–27 

Encoding Control Tickets ...................................... 1–28 

Account Separator Ticket ...................................... 1–28 

Batch Ticket ........................................................ 1–29 

Block Ticket ......................................................... 1–30 

Bundle Cut Ticket ................................................. 1–31 

End-of-Job Ticket .................................................. 1–32 

End-of-Pass Ticket ................................................ 1–32 

Incoming Cash Letter Credit Document .................. 1–33 

Pocket Separator Ticket ....................................... 1–34 

Locator Ticket ...................................................... 1–35 

Subbatch Ticket ................................................... 1–36 

Tracer Ticket ....................................................... 1–36 

Pockets ................................................................................. 1–37 

Book Repass ....................................................... 1–37 

Exception ............................................................ 1–37 

Kill ...................................................................... 1–37 

Nonexception ....................................................... 1–37 

Power Encode Outsort .......................................... 1–37 

Reject ................................................................. 1–38 

Repass ................................................................ 1–38 

Waterfall .............................................................. 1–38 

Zero Kill ............................................................... 1–38 

Jobs ................................................................................. 1–39 

Prime Pass .......................................................... 1–39 

Conventional Repass Job ...................................... 1–39 

Stacked Repass ................................................... 1–40 

Imaging Repass Job ............................................. 1–40 

Code-Line Matching ............................................................... 1–41 

vi 3981 6061–201

Contents 

Document Identification Number (DIN) .................................. 1–42 

Microfilm Retrieval Index (MRI) Number ............................... 1–43 

Microfilm Reel Labels ............................................................ 1–44 

Store Microfilm Events Without Selective 

Microfilming .................................................... 1–44 

Store Microfilm Events with Selective Microfilming .. 1–44 

Neither Store Microfilm Events nor Selective 

Microfilming .................................................... 1–45 

Selective Microfilming Without Store Microfilm 

Events ............................................................ 1–45 

Section 2. System Structure 

IPS Base Structure ................................................................ 2–2 

Initialization Function ............................................ 2–4 

Management Function ........................................ 2–4 

Input Function ...................................................... 2–4 

Sort Pattern Function ........................................... 2–5 

Terminal Reject Reentry Function ........................... 2–6 

Corrections Function ............................................ 2–6 

Report Function ................................................... 2–6 

Extraction Function .............................................. 2–6 

Recovery Function ................................................ 2–7 

Debug Function .................................................... 2–7 

Imaging Interface Function .................................... 2–7 

Availability and Pricing Module ............................................. 2–8 


Cash Letter Control Module ................................................... 2–9 

Extraction Function .............................................. 2–9 

PC Application ..................................................... 2–9 

Features .............................................................. 2–9 

Cycle Sort Module ................................................................. 2–10 




Remote Site Module .............................................................. 2–11 

Management Function .......................................... 2–11 


Sort Pattern Generator Module ............................................. 2–12 



Recovery Function ................................................ 2–12 


3981 6061–201 vii

Contents 

Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules ................................. 2–13 

Initialization Function ............................................. 2–13 


Report Function .................................................... 2–14 

Statistics Module .................................................................... 2–15 

Extraction Function ............................................... 2–15 

PC Application ..................................................... 2–15 

Tape Input/Output Module ..................................................... 2–16 


Management Function ........................................... 2–16 

Section 3. IPS Programs 

Section 4. IPS Files 

IPS Program Names and Mnemonics .................................... 3–2 

IPS Program Descriptions ...................................................... 3–6 

Files Updated and Accessed by IPS Programs ...................... 3–31 

Temporary Work and External Files by IPS Program ............ 3–35 

IPC Codes ............................................................................... 3–42 

IPS COBOL74 Libraries by Program ...................................... 3–44 

IPS Programs by COBOL74 Libraries .................................... 3–49 

Description of COBOL74 Libraries ......................................... 3–57 

IPS ICM Descriptions .............................................................. 3–64 

ICMs Used with IPS ................................................................. 3–67 

ICMs That Update and Access IPS Files ................................ 3–68 

COBOL74 Libraries and Working Storage Data Items Used 

by IPS ICMs ........................................................... 3–69 

IPS File Names and Mnemonics ............................................. 4–2 

Programs That Update and Access Each IPS File ................. 4–7 

IPS COBOL74 Libraries by File .............................................. 4–13 

IPS Files by COBOL74 Library ............................................... 4–17 

viii 3981 6061–201

Contents 

IPS Files Used to Run Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Module 

Jobs ....................................................................... 4–22 

Cycle Sort Module Files Used to Run Statement and Bulk 

Fine Sort Module Jobs .......................................... 4–23 

Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Module Files .......................... 4–24 

Section 5. Availability and Pricing Module Overview 

Availability .............................................................................. 5–2 

Endpoints, Sendpoints, and Exception RT Numbers ............. 5–3 

Endpoints ............................................................ 5–3 

Sendpoints .......................................................... 5–3 

Exception RT Numbers ......................................... 5–4 

Impact of Exception RT Numbers on Availability ...... 5–4 

Market Segments .................................................................. 5–6 

Defining Market Segments .................................... 5–6 

Account Number Subfield ..................................... 5–6 

Holidays and Other Closed Days ........................................... 5–8 

Categories of Holidays and Closed Days ................ 5–8 

Defining Holidays for Current and Future Years ....... 5–8 

How IPS Uses Holiday and Closed Day Information . 5–8 

Defining Holiday and Closed Day Information for 

Both Customer and Bank Availability and Pricing . 5–9 

How the Availability and Pricing Module Works .................... 5–10 

Types of Availability and Pricing Information ........... 5–10 

Required Data ...................................................... 5–10 

Factors Affecting Availability and Pricing ................ 5–11 

Function of the Availability and Pricing Module ........ 5–12 

How IPS Uses Availability and Pricing Module Data .. 5–13 

How Banks Use Availability and Pricing Module 

Data ............................................................... 5–13 

Bank Schedule Data .............................................................. 5–14 

Bank File ............................................................. 5–14 

Bank Schedule ..................................................... 5–14 

Variables for Each Endpoint .................................. 5–15 

Example of the Effect of Bank Schedule Variables ... 5–16 

Interface Between Bank Schedule and IPS .............. 5–17 

Customer Schedule Data ....................................................... 5–18 

Cnnt Files and Annt Files ....................................... 5–18 

Customer Schedules ............................................ 5–19 

Organization of the Customer Schedules ............... 5–19 

Variables for Each RT Number in a Customer 

Schedule ......................................................... 5–20 

3981 6061–201 ix

Contents 

Examples of the Effect of Customer Schedule 

Variables ......................................................... 5–21 

Multiple CnntPM Files ............................................ 5–23 

Interface Between Customer Schedule Data and 

IPS .................................................................. 5–23 

Bank and Customer Schedule Deadlines ............................... 5–25 

Defining Bank Schedule Deadlines ......................... 5–25 

Defining Customer Schedule Deadlines .................. 5–26 

Parts of the Deadline Fields ................................... 5–27 

Determining the Calendar Day Indicator .................. 5–28 

Relationship Between Deadlines and Calendar 

Days ............................................................... 5–30 

Bank Schedule Charges ......................................................... 5–32 

Definition and Format of Item Charges ................... 5–32 

Number of Charges Per Endpoint .......................... 5–32 

Regular Charges and Premium Charges ................. 5–32 

Requirements for Specifying Regular and Premium 

Charges .......................................................... 5–32 

Customer Schedule Charges ................................................. 5–33 

Definition and Format of Item Charges ................... 5–33 

Number of Charges per RT Number ....................... 5–33 

Dollar Cutoff Amount ............................................ 5–33 

Relationship of Charges to First and Second 

Deadlines ........................................................ 5–33 

Differences Between Customer and Bank Availability and 

Pricing ................................................................... 5–34 

Section 6. REX Program Overview 

REX Program Overview .......................................................... 6–2 

Data Selection Process .......................................................... 6–4 

x 3981 6061–201

Section 7. Imaging Interface 

Contents 

Imaging Overview .................................................................. 7–2 

Definition of System Differences ........................................... 7–3 

IPS Database ....................................................... 7–3 

ICMs: How the Systems Communicate .................. 7–3 

System Error Conditions ....................................... 7–3 

ICPS Program Names and Mnemonics ................................. 7–4 

IXPS Program Names and Mnemonics ................................. 7–6 

ICPS Programs That Update and Access IPS Files ................ 7–7 

IXPS Programs That Update and Access IPS Files ................ 7–9 

ICMs Used with ICPS .............................................................. 7–10 

ICMs Used with IXPS .............................................................. 7–11 

3981 6061–201 xi

Contents 

xii 3981 6061–201

About This Overview 

Purpose 

Scope 

Audience 

The V Series Item Processing System Technical Overview describes the processing 

concepts and functions of the Item Processing System (IPS), its modules, and its interface 

to the Image Check Processing System (ICPS) and the Image Export Processing System 

(IXPS). It also contains the IPS glossary and bibliography. 

This overview describes the system work flow for IPS, its modules, and imaging 

applications, and it presents the structure of the entire system. It provides a list of each 

system function and its respective programs and describes all IPS programs and files. It 

also provides overviews of the Availability and Pricing Module, the Real-Time Extraction 

Service (REX) Program, and the IPS interface to imaging applications. 

Use this overview with the current release of the following Unisys IPS products: 

• Item Processing System, style identification: VS 345–IPS 

• Availability and Pricing Module, style identification: VS 345–APM 

• Cycle Sort Module, style identification: VS 345–CYC 

• DP 500 Item Entry System, style identification: DP 500–IES 

• Remote Site Module, style identification: VS 345–REM 

• Sort Pattern Generator Module, style identification: VS 345–SPG 

• Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules, style identification: VS 345–FIN 

• Statistics Module, style identification: PC 345–STA 

• Tape Input/Output Module, style identification: VS 345–TAP 

This overview is for programmers, systems analysts, the Unisys Application Support 

Center, and customer staff members who need to understand the IPS work flow, system 

structure, programs, and files. This overview is also intended for anyone who needs 

information about the following: 

• Availability and Pricing Module 

• REX Program 

• IPS interface to imaging applications 

3981 6061–201 xiii


Prerequisites 

Before using this overview, read the V Series Item Processing System Library Overview 

and Master Index to gain an understanding of how the IPS library is organized and used. 

How to Use This Overview 

Organization 

You should read Section 1 to learn the IPS work flow and processing concepts. Then refer 

to the specific section for the information you need. 

Work Flow and Item Processing Concepts 

This section contains general processing concepts and overviews of the IPS work flow and 

the work flow with ICPS and IXPS. It also contains descriptions of the MICR code line, 

control tickets, control levels, pockets, job types, document identification numbers 

(DINs), Microfilm Retrieval Index (MRI) numbers, and microfilm reel labels. 

System Structure 

This section contains descriptions of IPS and its modules and provides the functions of 

each. Each function lists the programs pertaining to that function. 

IPS Programs 

This section provides a table for IPS programs that includes mnemonics, naming 

conventions, and classifications for each. It contains program descriptions and a table 

that lists the files updated and accessed by each program. This section also contains 

tables of temporary work and external files, interprogram communication (IPC) codes, 

IPS COBOL74 libraries, IPS COBOL74 library descriptions, and IPS independently 

compiled modules (ICMs). 

IPS Files 

This section contains a table of IPS file names and mnemonics, and it lists the programs 

that update and access each file. It lists COBOL74 libraries used by IPS files. It also lists 

IPS files used to run the Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules and the Cycle Sort Module, 

and it lists the programs that update, access, and initialize each file. 

Availability and Pricing Module 

This section provides an overview of the concepts involved in establishing availability and 

pricing schedules for a bank and its customers. 

REX Program 

This section describes the REX Program, including the transfer of data within the program 

and the data flow within IPS. 

xiv 3981 6061–201

Results 


Imaging Interface 

This section provides a brief overview of ICPS and IXPS. It discusses the interface 

between IPS and ICPS and IPS and IXPS. It also includes information about imaging 

programs and the ICMs used for the interface. 

After reading this overview, you will have general knowledge of all programs and files in 

IPS and will have an overall understanding of how they relate to the IPS work flow. 

Related Product Information 

The following publications provide related information about the capabilities and 

functions of IPS. 

When ordering the printed version of a document, you need to supply its 11-digit part 

number. The 11-digit part number consists of the 8-digit base number (for example, 

8600 0429), a hyphen, and a 3-digit suffix (for example, 010) that identifies the current 

version of the document. 

The information in this portion of the preface and the Bibliography at the back of the 

document show only the 8-digit base numbers. 

DP 500 Item Entry System Installation and Operations Guide (3981 5071) 

This installation and operations guide describes the features, installation procedures, and 

operating instructions for the DP 500 Item Entry System that is an alternative low-speed 

prime pass and reject reentry system for use with IPS. 

InfoImage High Speed Imaging Applications Capabilities Overview (3138 7871) 

This capabilities overview describes the features of IPS, the Image Check Processing 

System (ICPS), and the Image Export Processing System (IXPS). 

IPS Reports Computer-Based Reference (4351 4272) 

IPS Reports Computer-Based Reference is an online Windows application that displays 

images of all IPS reports on a PC screen and describes the contents and uses of each. 

Fields on reports are documented through a hypertext capability that displays the 

description of a given field in a pop-up window on the user's request. In addition, the 

application provides a variety of display options, online help, and a glossary of terms 

specific to IPS reports. It is delivered on a diskette and is packaged with the Reports 

Installation Reference Card. This application replaces the V Series Item Processing 

System Reports Reference Manual. (This reference is current through the 827 release.) 

Learning Patterns 

Learning Patterns is the computer-based training program for the PC programs, Patterns 

and Inquiry. It provides training for all operating tasks involved in the creating, 

generating, testing, and updating of sort patterns. (This training program is current 

through the 827 release.) 

3981 6061–201 xv


Patterns Computer-Based Reference (4351 3613) 

Patterns Computer-Based Reference is the online reference for the Sort Pattern Generator 

Module. It provides online display of reference information that supports Patterns tasks. 

It is packaged with the Installation Quick-Reference Guide. (This reference is current 


PW2 Item Processing System Sort Pattern Generator Module Installation Quick- 

Reference Guide (4351 3613) 

This installation quick-reference guide explains how to install the Sort Pattern Generator 

Module software on your PC. It also provides operating instructions for PC-based 

functions that are performed outside the menu-driven Patterns Program. It is delivered on 

a diskette and is packaged with the Patterns Computer-Based Reference. This quickreference 

guide replaces the PW2 Item Processing System Sort Pattern Generator Module 

Installation Guide. (This guide is current through the 827 release.) 

V Series Item Processing System Base Operating Guide (3981 6632) 

This guide contains instructions for performing all tasks for the daily operation of IPS 

Base product. 

V Series Item Processing System Base Parameters Operating Guide (3981 6616) 

This guide contains instructions for performing all tasks for setting the parameters 

required to run the IPS Base product. 

V Series Item Processing System CAR Location Parameters Reference Card 

(3981 6301) 

This quick-reference card contains instructions for setting up courtesy amount read (CAR) 

location parameters and for using the CAR location gauge. (This reference card is current 


V Series Item Processing System Commands Reference Card (3981 6137) 

This quick-reference card contains a listing of IPS operating commands organized by 

function. (This reference card is current through the 827 release.) 

V Series Item Processing System Installation Guide (3981 6087) 

This guide presents step-by-step procedures for installing IPS and its modules. 

V Series Item Processing System IXPS Parameters Reference Card (3981 6434) 

This quick-reference card describes the IXPS parameters and their interaction for setting 

up IXPS to be used with IPS. (This reference card is current through the 827 release.) 

V Series Item Processing System Library Overview and Master Index (3981 6079) 

This overview describes the IPS product information library and contains the master index 

for the library. (This overview is current through the 827 release.) 

xvi 3981 6061–201


V Series Item Processing System Message Reference Manual (3981 6103) 

This reference manual presents the error messages and notices displayed by IPS programs 

and modules. The messages are listed in alphabetical order by program. The index 

contains the messages for the entire system listed in alphabetical order. 

V Series Item Processing System Modules Operating Guide (3981 6640) 

This guide contains instructions for performing all tasks for the daily operation of any of 

the IPS modules that run on the V Series. 

V Series Item Processing System Module Parameters Operating Guide 

(3981 6624) 

This guide contains instructions for performing all tasks for setting the parameters 

required to run the IPS modules that run on the V Series. 

V Series Item Processing System Reports Computer-Based Reference Installation 

Reference Card (4351 4272) 

This installation reference card accompanies and describes how to install the IPS Reports 

Computer-Based Reference. (This reference card is current through the 827 release.) 

Notation Conventions 

When delimiters are used to enclose information within commands, they mean the 

following: 

< > Information between angle brackets is variable. 

[ ] Information between square brackets is optional. 

[ , ] You can enter one of the enclosed options. 

( , ) You must enter one of the enclosed options. 

The following abbreviations are used in this guide: 

Abbreviation Meaning 

bat Three-digit batch number 

bb Two-digit book number (If the book number is one digit, do not enter a 

leading zero.) 

bbbb Four-digit block number 

bbbb bbbb Range of block numbers 

bun Three-digit bundle number 

cc Two-digit copy number (If the copy number is one digit, enter a leading 

zero.) 

3981 6061–201 xvii


Abbreviation Meaning 

cn Two-digit cycle number (If the cycle number is one digit, do not enter a 

leading zero.) 

cccc Four-digit cash letter number 

dd Two-digit device (document processor) number 

eeeeeeee Eight-digit endpoint or sendpoint number 

ff Two-digit file number 

fff Three-digit family ID 

gggggg One- to six-character group name 

hhmm Hours and minutes in military time format 

kkkk Four-digit key block number 

mmddyy Date in month, day, year format 

nn Two-digit port number 

p One-digit processor or printer number 

pb Printer backup. (A printer backup file number is one to five digits.) 

pgm Three-character program mnemonic 

pp Two-digit pocket or desktop printer number 

ps One-digit printer number and one-digit site number 

queue Three-character queue mnemonic 

queue ID Four-digit number assigned to a queue entry 

s One-digit site number 

sortspec Sort specification name 

ssssssss Eight-digit sort pattern number 

ssssssss kkkk Job number, consists of an eight-digit sort pattern number and a four-digit 

key block number 

t One-digit test system number 

tape ID One- to six-character tape name 

UA Unsigned alphabetic data 

UN Unsigned numeric data 

ww Two-digit work type number 

x One-digit export type 

xx Two-digit export ID 

yy Year 

xviii 3981 6061–201

Section 1 

Flow of Work and Item Processing 

Concepts 

General Processing Concepts ........................................... 1–2 

IPS Work Flow .................................................................... 1–6 

IPS Work Flow with ICPS.................................................. 1–13 

IPS Work Flow with IXPS .................................................. 1–18 

Common Image Export.................................................... 1–23 

MICR Code Line ............................................................... 1–23 

Control Levels .................................................................. 1–26 

Control Tickets................................................................. 1–27 

Pockets ............................................................................ 1–37 

Jobs.................................................................................. 1–39 

Code-Line Matching......................................................... 1–41 

Document Identification Number (DIN)............................ 1–42 

Microfilm Retrieval Index (MRI) Number ......................... 1–43 

Microfilm Reel Labels ...................................................... 1–44 

3981 6061–201 1-1

General Processing Concepts 

The flow of checks from institution to institution around the country is a vital part of our 

national economy. Checks that are drawn on one bank but deposited in another must be 

routed back to the original bank so funds are withdrawn from the appropriate accounts. 

This movement of checks from bank to bank is accomplished through item processing 

software. As the items, both checks and deposit tickets, are brought into the institution 

through teller stations, couriers, or automatic teller machines (ATMs), they must be 

separated according to their type. Items drawn on the bank doing the processing, called 

on-us items, must be separated from the items to be sent on to another institution, called 

transit items. The following graphic shows how checks move through an institution: 

1–2 3981 6061–201

Flow of Work and Item Processing Concepts 

3981 6061–201 1–3


This process involves not only moving items, but transferring funds as well. When a 

transaction is deposited, the institution must verify that the amount of the deposit equals 

the amount of the checks included. Balances must be kept as the checks are processed, 

and all of this must be done as quickly as possible. 

MICR Code Line 

In order to handle the large volume of checks processed each year, the American Bankers 

Association (ABA) set up a standard method for identifying each check. They set up 

standards for printing information on checks so sorting machines can process them 

automatically. 

Each institution prints information on the bottom of each item in a standard font and ink 

in the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) code line. The sets of digits within the 

MICR code line represent the pertinent information needed for processing the item. This 

includes the routing and transit (RT) number assigned to the bank issuing the check, the 

check number, and the account number on which the the issuing bank draws this item. 

Conventional Check Processing 

Conventional check processing breaks down into the following steps: 

• Proof operators encode the amount on each check in MICR ink and verify for each 

deposit that the amount of the checks (debits) equals the amount of the deposit 

tickets (credits). 

• Operators set up the items in groups for sorting on a document processor, a highspeed 

machine that distributes checks into pockets with similar MICR code lines. 

• Operators send the sets of items through a document processor. As each item passes 

through the document processor, the system does the following: 

− Captures the code-line information encoded on the bottom of the check 

− Uses the code-line information to select the appropriate pocket for that item 

• Reject reentry operators reprocess items that are not sorted correctly and update the 

database. 

• Correction operators reconcile the errors if the debit and credit amounts do not 

balance after sorting. 

• Operators set aside the on-us items to be processed by the institution, and the on-us 

information is extracted from the database and sent to update customer accounts. 

• Operators group the items in bundles and print reports to accompany them. They 

then ship the bundles of items to the institution that originated them, either directly or 

indirectly through another institution or through the Federal Reserve Bank System. 

1–4 3981 6061–201

Check Processing with Imaging 


Check processing with imaging breaks down into the following steps: 

• Operators set up the items in groups for sorting on a document processor. Usually 

items without encoded amounts are processed using imaging. 

• Operators send the sets of items through a document processor. As each item passes 

through the document processor, the system does the following: 

− Captures the code-line information encoded on the bottom of the check 

− Captures a digitized image of the check 

− Uses the code-line information to select the appropriate pocket for that item 

• Amount entry operators view the image of each check on their workstation and type 

the dollar amount shown on the check. Data correction operators view images of 

checks with MICR characters that the document processor could not read. They 

correct the code-line data and type the dollar amount if neccessary. 

• Reject reentry operators reprocess items that are not sorted correctly and update the 

database. 

• Balancing operators view images from transactions where the debit and credit 

amounts do not balance. They correct the errors to make the transactions balance. 

• Operators send the physical checks through the power encoder, which encodes the 

amount and any missing fields on the item. The system sorts the checks into pockets 

on the power encoder. 

• Operators handle the on-us and transit items in the same way as in conventional check 

processing. 

3981 6061–201 1–5


IPS Work Flow 

IPS plays a central part in moving checks through your institution, in tracking the checks, 

and in routing them to their destinations. The destination can be another department 

within your institution or it can be another institution. 

To understand IPS you need to know how items, also called work, move through an 

institution and the processes that occur at each step. The following pages describe the 

work flow in IPS. 

IPS Conventional Environment 

The system setup for your institution defines the IPS environment: the software 

parameters, hardware, and personnel required to perform the steps of item processing. 

• Software parameters allow you to define the IPS setup and provide instructions for 

item processing. For example, the parameters define the number and types of 

document processors used, the level of access for each operator, and the types of 

work processed. These parameters are usually defined during installation. 

• IPS uses the following types of hardware: 

− Document processors 

− V Series host processors 

− Data communications equipment 

− Terminals 

− Printers 

− Personal computers 

− Tape drives 

• Personnel oversee the system, operate the equipment, and move the items through the 

different processing areas. 

1–6 3981 6061–201

IPS Daily Processing Tasks 


Items enter the base IPS environment through tellers, automated teller machines (ATMs), 

or through couriers from other institutions. The following figure illustrates how work 

flows through an institution, and the text explains the steps in detail: 

3981 6061–201 1–7


Creating Sort Patterns 

Before work is run through a document processor, parameters need to be defined so the 

system knows what kinds of documents to expect and how to sort them. These 

parameters are defined in sort patterns, which are rules that provide sorting instructions 

to the document processor. 

These complex sets of rules rely on the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) fields 

that are encoded on items. Each MICR field provides information that the sort pattern 

needs to select the appropriate destination for each item. 

Sort patterns are created, generated, and updated through the Sort Pattern Generator 

Module. This module runs on a PC and allows you to create new sort patterns, generate 

them into a format that can be downloaded to the document processor, and update them 

as necessary. 

Performing Encode and Proof 

Every check that enters your institution has an amount written on it. To process these 

items using IPS, the amount must be encoded on the item in MICR ink. Usually the work 

you receive from other institutions is already encoded. 

The proof department in each institution is responsible for encoding the deposits that 

come into the institution and verifying that they are in proof (that the debits in the deposit 

equal the credits). Proof operators use encoding machines to enter the missing amounts 

and incomplete information in the MICR code line. 

Setting Up Work 

Items are divided into smaller groups by inserting control tickets at specified locations 

before they are sorted on a document processor. The system collects totals and other 

information for each group of work on several different levels of detail. The control 

tickets indicate the boundaries of these units of work to the system. 

The three basic units of work are the batch, block, and job. A job is a group of similar 

items set up together to be sorted on the document processor. A job is made up of any 

number of blocks, and blocks are broken up into smaller units called batches. A batch 

consists of about 300 items. 

The items are put in trays and taken to the document processor for sorting. 

1–8 3981 6061–201

Sorting Documents 


IPS processes items on high-speed document processors to capture the encoded MICR 

data. The document processor receives sorting instructions from the system. The sorting 

decisions for each item are then made by the document processing software. 

The document processor performs the following steps on each document: 

• Reads the MICR code line of each item as it passes through the track and endorses the 

item using either a stamp or spray endorser. The endorsement provides important 

information such as the document identification number (DIN) and the processing 

date. 

• Microfilms each item. This image is captured along with the DIN. The microfilm tape 

can be used later in research. 

• Sorts each item to the selected pocket. The pocket decision is based on the sort 

pattern. Items with the same destination are sorted to the same pocket. 

• Validates item data. 

• Accumulates debit and credit amount totals for each control level. 

Performing Repass 

Some work requires multiple passes on the document processor to sort it into small 

enough groups. For example, a job may have items that must be sent to 40 different 

transit destinations. The work must then be sorted into 40 distinct groups. If your 

document processor has only 24 pockets, the job requires another pass, called a repass. 

IPS allows one prime pass and two repasses for each job. 

Reentering Rejects 

During a document processor pass, items may be rejected by the document processor. 

The system sends the following types of items to the pocket reserved for rejects: 

• Items that the document processor could not read 

• Items that the sort pattern rejects for reasons designated by the user; for example, the 

account number failed check digit verification 

• All control tickets, except pocket separator tickets that were sorted to repass pockets 

and bundle cut tickets that were sorted to transit pockets 

Rejected items are reentered into the system through a reject reentry or repass reject 

reentry job. These jobs are made up of blocks of work from the reject pocket of one or 

more jobs. Reject reentry can begin on a block as soon as its block ticket is processed on 

the prime pass job. 

3981 6061–201 1–9


Balancing 

Reject reentry jobs can be run in one of three ways: 

• Terminal reject reentry is a menu-driven method that displays data from prime pass 

rejected items on the screen and allows you to correct fields. 

• The DP 500 Item Entry System is a separately packaged application that performs 

reject reentry and repass reject reentry on a low-speed DP 500 document processor. 

The system reads the items as they pass through the document processor. If the 

DP 500 document processor reads the character that was previously unreadable, the 

item is sorted to the appropriate pocket. An operator corrects any characters or fields 

on items that the DP 500 document processor did not read. 

• Windows NT-based reject reentry is a separately packaged application that runs on an 

NT workstation and enables you to initiate reject reenty jobs for prime pass items and 

correct rejected items. This is followed by a power encode step to repair the physical 

items. 

The DP 500 Item Entry System also performs reject reentry on repass jobs. During a 

DP 500 Item Entry System job, items can be encoded or placed in carrier envelopes if 

necessary. 

Once the job is processed on the document processor, it will require balancing if the totals 

captured by IPS do not equal the totals for the deposits. The Corrections (COR) Program 

displays out-of-balance items and totals directly on the corrections terminal for 

adjustment. Operators can also use printed master lists to determine when those totals do 

not match. The master lists show which items or totals must be corrected in the database. 

Although you can balance a block of items as soon as the block ticket for the block is 

processed through the prime pass on a document processor, you normally wait until reject 

items for the block are reentered through terminal reject reentry or the DP 500 Item Entry 

System. 

Note: If you run reject reentry on a block, you must run it prior to performing 

corrections. You can use the Corrections (COR) Program to insert a batch 

ticket before you run reject reentry, if necessary. If you do, then you still need 

to perform corrections after reject reentry. 

You use the Corrections (COR) Program to balance the work by identifying incorrect 

items and correcting the database. The COR Program allows you to 

• Display totals for prime blocks or repass jobs that are out of balance 

• Display items that are the possible causes of the out-of-balance conditions 

• Correct the database by altering, inserting, or deleting items 

A block or job is reconciled when the IPS totals match the corresponding cash letter total 

for inclearings or encoder list totals for proof work. 

1–10 3981 6061–201

Printing Transit Reports 


Once transit items have finished processing, they are ready to be shipped in bundles to the 

appropriate destination. The system produces two reports that accompany outgoing 

bundles: 

• A Detail List gives the following information for each bundle: 

− Items in the bundle 

− Count and amount totals for the bundle 

Detail Lists can be printed manually or you can specify in the sort pattern that they be 

printed automatically. You can also print Detail Lists for reject reentry jobs. 

• A Cash Letter Recap lists the count and amount totals for all bundles sent to a specific 

endpoint. You can manually request Cash Letter Recaps for the following: 

− One or all pockets of a job 

− An individual endpoint 

− A set of endpoints called a group 

− A set of jobs called a job group 

Extracting Data 

The data generated by IPS is often used by other departments or applications in your 

institution, such as demand deposit accounting (DDA). After required processing is 

complete, you extract the requested data from the database to magnetic tape or disk pack 

or for downloading to a PC. 

On-Us Extraction 

You can extract on-us information after the job is reconciled and all corrections are made 

to the database. It is possible to modify the format of the on-us extraction tape to suit the 

specific needs of each site. 

If you are using the Availability and Pricing Module, availability and pricing data is also 

calculated during on-us extraction. This information is intended for use by the DDA 

department in assigning availability of funds and item charges for customer accounts. 

Cash Letter Extraction 

A cash letter extraction sends cash letter information to disk pack for subsequent 

downloading to a PC. You can perform a cash letter extraction only after the cash letters 

to be included have been created. 

3981 6061–201 1–11


Settlement Data Extraction 

Settlement data is extracted from the IPS database and transferred to the PC. The 

operator can view settlement totals for a specific business date and locate discrepancies. 

Totals within each settlement formula can be displayed and adjusted at specified levels of 

control. 

Backing Up Data 

IPS automatically stores data on either a magnetic tape or disk pack backup file during 

processing to permit complete rebuilding of the database. This provides the following 

benefits: 

• Jobs interrupted on a document processor can be restarted at the item level, so items 

captured in the database before the interruption do not need to be reprocessed. 

• Individual jobs from a previous day can be rebuilt as needed, allowing your institution 

to reprint lost reports. 

• Work can be moved from one document processor to another of the same type in case 

of failure. 

Available IPS Prime Pass Work Flow Options 

The following are the only supported options for the IPS work flow. If you run a block of 

work in an order that is not listed below, IPS may not maintain totals properly. 

Work Flow Option 1 

• Prime pass 

• Reject reentry 

• Corrections 



• Insert batch ticket using the COR Program 


• Corrections 



• Corrections (with no reject reentry) 

1–12 3981 6061–201

IPS Work Flow with ICPS 


The Image Check Processing System (ICPS) changes the flow of work through an 

institution and reduces the handling of physical documents to reduce processing time. 

ICPS allows you to process items and transactions that have not been encoded or proved; 

you complete proof and encoding during item processing. 

Using IPS with ICPS allows processing of both proof work and preencoded work: 

• Proof work is made up of mixed encoded and unencoded items. It requires proof and 

encoding. 

• Preencoded work comes from correspondent banks or other sources. It does not 

require proof or encoding. You can optionally capture images for preencoded work 

and use the data correction activity to reduce the number of rejected items, thus 

reducing float. 

IPS Imaging Environment 

As in the conventional IPS environment, the IPS imaging environment is the specific 

system setup for your institution when using ICPS. The IPS imaging environment consists 

of the following components: 

• The conventional IPS environment. 

• The Image Item Processing System (IIPS) platform and ICPS. 

• The IR 9210 CAR Module (optional). 

• The IPS software parameters that allow the two systems to interact. 

The components of the IPS imaging environment also include software parameters, 

hardware, and personnel: 

• Software parameters for IPS are set differently when used with ICPS. ICPS and 

courtesy amount read (CAR) also have software parameters that must be set. 

• Additional hardware is required to run IPS with ICPS. 

• Additional hardware is required to run the CAR module with IPS or ICPS. 

• Personnel perform different duties when operating in an imaging environment. They 

use workstations to view images of the items instead of handling the documents 

themselves. 

IPS Imaging Daily Processing Tasks 

Documents enter the imaging environment through the same means as in conventional 

processing. Different tasks however, are performed on the documents, and the tasks are 

performed in a different order. The following figure illustrates how work flows through an 

institution in an imaging environment, and the text explains the steps in detail: 

3981 6061–201 1–13


1–14 3981 6061–201



Creating sort patterns is the same in an imaging environment as in a conventional 

environment. The sort pattern must contain a parameter specifying that the document 

processor should also capture images. 


Operators set up work in the same way in an imaging environment as in a conventional 

environment. Unlike the conventional environment, however, the staging process for the 

imaging environment requires that the operator remove any staples and clips from the 

documents. 

Sorting Documents and Capturing Images 

Documents are sorted in an imaging environment in much the same way as in a 

conventional environment. With ICPS, however, an image module is added to a DP 1800 

document processor to capture a digital image of the item as it passes through the track. 

If the DP 1800 document processor is equipped with a CAR module, it also locates and 

reads the courtesy amount on both handwritten and machine-printed documents. 

The document processor performs the following steps on each document: 

• Reads the MICR code line and endorses each item. 

• Captures a digitized image of each item. That image is also cross-referenced with the 

document identification number (DIN) for the item in the database. 

• If the DP 1800 document processor is equipped with a CAR module, the image module 

sends to the CAR module the portion of the item that contains the courtesy amount. 

• Microfilms each item in an imaging environment if requested. 

• Sorts each item to the selected pocket. 

The system also validates the item data and accumulates amount totals. 

Modifying Code-Line Data 

Once a block of items has completed prime pass, its images are available to the ICPS 

Image Data Entry Workstations. Operators can modify the data associated with each 

image, and that data is corrected in the database. 

Amount Entry 

Blocks of unencoded work go to the amount entry activity. Operators view the image of 

each item and enter the amount and transaction code on the screen. 

Data Correction 

The items from a block that have unreadable characters in a nonrequired field go to the 

data correction activity. Operators view the images and correct the code-line data. 

Operators can also enter the amount and transaction code for an unencoded item. 

3981 6061–201 1–15


Reentering Rejects 

Balancing 

The IPS imaging environment does not change the reject reentry function. Terminal reject 

reentry, DP 500 Item Entry System reject reentry, and NT workstation reject reentry are 

valid. If the ICPS data correction activity is used, however, fewer items are rejected, 

because the sort pattern allows unreadable characters in some of the MICR fields. 

If any of the MICR fields required by the sort pattern are not readable, the item is sent to 

the reject pocket for reject reentry. However, if the MICR fields necessary to select a 

pocket are readable, the item is sorted to the appropriate pocket, and the unreadable 

characters in the other fields may be corrected by the data correction activity. 

Thus, using the data correction activity prevents items from being rejected for unreadable 

digits in nonrequired fields, reducing the number of items rejected. The other reasons that 

items might be rejected, such as damage or check digit verification failure, are also 

possible in an imaging environment. 

After all the items of a block have completed amount entry, data correction, and reject 

reentry, the block is made available to the balancing activity. Operators view images from 

transactions that are out of balance and attempt to balance the transactions. The ICPS 

Image Balancing Workstation is equipped with several functions to help in balancing. In 

addition to the ability to manipulate the image of the item, the balancing workstation also 

has a balancing expert system. It highlights suspect items in each out-of-balance 

transaction so the operator can examine them first and work more quickly. 

Note: If you run reject reentry on a block, you must run it prior to performing 

corrections. 

Once the operator balances all the transactions for a block, the corrected data is updated 

in the IPS database. After all blocks are balanced, Detail Lists can be printed. 

Priority Transit Shipment 

In high-priority situations, some items can be shipped without balancing using Priority 

Transit Shipment. When the supervisor chooses this function, the out-of-balance 

transactions for the block are sent back to the balancing activity to be rekeyed. If the 

transaction is still not balanced, the system compares the results to the previously entered 

amounts. If the amount entries match, the block can be encoded and shipped. 

Performing Repass and Encoding 

After a block has completed amount entry, data correction, reject reentry, and balancing, 

it needs to be encoded with the updated information. The imaging environment uses a 

special document processor called the power encoder for this function. 

The system downloads the updated item data from the database to the power encoder. 

The power encoder encodes any missing fields on each item. The item is sorted to a 

repass or kill pocket. 

1–16 3981 6061–201


Some work requires more than one pass to sort it into distinct groups. The first repass for 

proof work must be performed on the power encoder so unencoded items can be encoded. 

Preencoded work can be repassed on any type of document processor. The second repass 

for both work types can be done on either type of document processor. 

Printing Transit Reports 

Printing transit reports in an IPS imaging environment works the same as in a 

conventional environment. For more information, refer to “IPS Work Flow” in this 

section. 

Extracting Data 

Extracting data in an IPS imaging environment works the same as in a conventional 

environment. For more information, refer to “IPS Work Flow” in this section. 

Printing End-of-Day Reports 

The same reports printed at the end of the day in a conventional environment can be 

printed in an imaging environment. For more information, refer to “IPS Work Flow” in this 

section. 

Available ICPS Prime Pass Work Flow Options 

The following are the only supported options for the ICPS work flow. If you run a block of 

work in an order that is not listed below, IPS may not maintain totals properly. 

Work Flow Option 1 (Unencoded) 


• Amount entry * 

• Data corrections (optional) * 

• Reject reentry * 

• Image Balancing 

• Power Encode 

Work Flow Option 2 (Pre-encoded) 


• Reject reentry * 

• Data corrections (optional) * 

• Image Balancing 

___________________ 

* Concurrent Operations 

3981 6061–201 1–17


IPS Work Flow with IXPS 

The Image Export Processing System (IXPS) provides a means to capture code-line data 

and document images for subsequent export to image statement printing applications or 

image storage and retrieval applications. IPS is fully integrated with IXPS so that all 

programs can be run on the same test system. 

IPS with IXPS uses a work flow that includes a capture pass on the DP 1800 document 

processor with optional input from a user-supplied demand deposit accounting (DDA) 

tape for statement cycle processing. IPS with IXPS also provides output to an image print 

application on the statement printing mainframe or tape output of document images for 

other customer applications. 

IXPS uses the Image Check Processing System (ICPS). For more information on the ICPS 

environment, refer to “IPS Work Flow with ICPS” in this section. 

IPS Imaging Environment 

As with ICPS, the imaging environment is the specific system setup for your institution 

when using IXPS. The IXPS imaging environment consists of the components of the 

conventional IPS and ICPS environments, the components of the Image Item Processing 

System (IIPS) platform, the components of the statement printing mainframe, and 

additional IPS software parameters that allow the systems to interact. The components of 

the IXPS imaging environment also include software parameters, hardware, and 

personnel: 

• Software parameters for IXPS are set much the same as for ICPS. 

• Hardware and software specific to ISE or ICE are required to run IXPS. 

• Personnel perform different duties when operating in an imaging environment. They 

use workstations to view images of the items instead of handling the documents 

themselves. 

1–18 3981 6061–201

Image Export Daily Processing Tasks 


Items enter the image export environment through the same means as in conventional 

processing. However, IXPS jobs have a specific work type (07), and different tasks are 

performed in a different order on these items. 

IXPS offers two processing options for image export: 

• Image Statement Export (ISE), export type 1 

• Image Customer Export (ICE), export type 2 

ISE exports code-line data and document images to the Cincinnati Bell Information 

Systems (CBIS) ImageBanc application running on the DDA host processor to produce 

image statements for DDA customers. For ISE, the export ID (xx) is the cycle number. 

The code-line data and document images can be transferred from IXPS to the DDA host 

processor by magnetic tape or a direct physical connection between IXPS and the DDA 

host processor. (Refer to the IXPS Installation, Administration, and Operations Guide 

for details.) 

ICE exports code-line data and document images to an image-enabled third-party 

application that is used for tasks such as account reconciliation and signature verification. 

For ICE, the export ID (xx) is the customer ID number. Typically, ICE is used to process 

commercial DDA items. Images for ICE are exported on magnetic tape in Tagged Image 

File Format (TIFF) or a customized, user-defined format. 

3981 6061–201 1–19


The following figure illustrates how work flows through an institution in an image export 

environment, and the text explains the steps in detail: 

1–20 3981 6061–201



Creating sort patterns is the same in an image export environment as in a conventional 

environment. The IXPS sort pattern must be set up as work type 07, and Patterns enforces 

the division of sort pattern families into two types: IXPS and IPS families. 

Note: A work type of 07 designates an IXPS sort pattern family. If another family is 

already defined with a work type of 07, the work type must be changed if it is 

not an IXPS sort pattern family. 

New IXPS sort pattern screens are available for defining IXPS sort patterns and the Image 

Export Parameter (EXPt) File. This new sort pattern parameter file is a unique, additional 

requirement for using IXPS sort patterns. The new screens present only those parameters 

applicable to IXPS. Other parameters are programmatically set to values appropriate for 

IXPS. 


Operators set up work in much the same way as in ICPS. However, IXPS has the following 

job variations: 

• For Image Statement Export (ISE), the items for each business date within a cycle 

compose one job if the ISE EOJ (end-of-job) ITEM COUNT VERIFICATION? flag is 

enabled in the Environment (ENVt) File. If this flag is not enabled, then the items for 

a cycle can be divided without regard to business dates. 

• For Image Customer Export (ICE), all items for each customer compose one job. 

ISE and ICE jobs are set up with the same control tickets as other ICPS and IPS prime 

pass jobs. For both types of IXPS jobs, Unisys recommends that a block be a tray of work. 

Sorting Documents and Capturing Images 

Documents are sorted for IXPS in much the same way as in ICPS or IPS prime pass jobs 

for on-us items. The differences are as follows: 

• An export ID must be specified at the time of document capture 

• Rejected documents can be rerun as many times as needed 

Modifying Code-Line Data 

Once a block of items has completed prime pass, its images are available to the ICPS 

image workstations. Operators can modify the data associated with each image, and that 

data is corrected in the database. 

The items from a block that have unreadable characters in a nonrequired field go to the 

data corrections activity. Operators view the images and correct the code-line data. 

Operators can also enter the amount and transaction code for an unencoded item. 

3981 6061–201 1–21


Producing IXPS Missing and Free Reports 

After document code line and images are captured, you can optionally print the IXPS 

Missing and Free reports to verify that what was captured agrees with what was expected. 

This step in the work flow requires special preparation by your financial institution. 

The institution must have a Code-Line Match Input (CMxtxx) File ready for each export ID 

for which you need the IXPS Missing and Free reports. Also, if the routing and transit 

numbers and account numbers on check code lines must be translated to their equivalents 

on the DDA system, you must also set up account conversion parameters using the 

Alternate Code-Line Generator (ACG) Program before the IXPS Missing and Free reports 

feature can be used. 

Extracting Code-Line Data and Document Images 

After a block is corrected, the Image Export Extract (IEE) Program of IXPS extracts the 

code-line data and corresponding document images and exports them to the U 6000 

processor for creation of image tapes or for direct transfer to the DDA host processor. 

Tape verification is available with the Image Export Tape Verify (IET) Program. 

If the routing and transit numbers and account numbers on check code lines must be 

translated to their equivalents on the DDA system as part of the extraction, you must set 

up account conversion parameters using the Alternate Code-Line Generator (ACG) 

Program for the code lines requiring translation. 

Exporting Prime Pass Data 

If your institution uses the Image module, the prime pass export feature allows you to 

export selected code lines and images captured during prime pass to an outside 

application for subsequent processing. You can perform prime pass export on inclearings, 

unencoded, and preencoded proof-of-deposit work. 

The system uses the sort pattern to determine whether prime pass export is to be 

performed. The Data Base Compaction (DBC) Program provides a method of compacting 

the database at the end of a processing cycle by removing all data associated with finished 

jobs and relocating the remaining data. The PRIME PASS EXPORT flag in the central site 

record of the ENVt File can be set to disallow compaction until prime pass export is 

complete for all blocks. 

1–22 3981 6061–201

Common Image Export 


Common Image Export (CIE) is a Windows NT-based image export application. It 

provides additional capabilities to the existing Image Item Processing System/Image 

Check Processing System user by expanding the availability of check images to many 

different applications. Using the foundation of IPS, IIPS, and ICPS, CIE facilitates the 

export of images to the Image Retrieval and Information System (IRIS), as well as to third 

party applications such as the ImageSoft Technologies ImageBanc products. 

Typically, CIE is implemented to process commercial DDA items. Possible uses of the CIE 

application include Accounts Reconcilement Processing (ARP), Payable-Through Drafts 

(PTD), or Signature Verification (SV). 

Items for export can be captured either during an IPS prime pass or in a separate 

recapture run on a high-speed document processor. Captured images are stored on an 

IIPS storage and retrieval module. Check images may be transcoded from JPEG grayscale 

into black and white. The black and white image format is a CCITT standard. 

Captured code lines from the document processor are stored on the image application 

server. 

The CIE Application operates in sites that are local and/or remote to the image application 

server. Refer to the CIE Installation, Administration, and Operations Guide for more 

information. 

MICR Code Line 

The American Bankers Association (ABA) Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) 

code line is a specified area on an item that is read and captured by the document 

processor. The code line is encoded with MICR characters. 

IPS captures all fields on standard MICR-encoded documents. Captured fields include: 

• 12-digit Auxiliary On-Us 

• 1-digit Position 44 

• 9-digit Routing and Transit (RT) Number 

• 16-digit Account Number 

• 6-digit Transaction Code 

• 12-digit Amount 

The MICR code line is read from right to left. The Amount Field is always read first. In 

conventional IPS, two fields are required: the RT Number Field and the Amount Field. 

With the Image Check Processing System (ICPS), the Amount Field is not required. Other 

fields are optional. 

The following figure shows the format for the standard MICR code line: 

3981 6061–201 1–23


1–24 3981 6061–201


All MICR-encoded input should be in the format described in the following table. This 

format applies to documents and control tickets. Control tickets create the boundaries for 

divisions of work. Refer to “Control Tickets” in Section 1 of the IPS Technical Overview. 

Field Description 

Auxiliary On-Us Field with a maximum of 12 digits surrounded by on-us delimiters 

located to the left of the Position 44 Field. This field often 

contains the serial number of commercial checks. 

Position 44 Field of one digit located to the left of the RT Number Field and to 

the right of the Auxiliary On-Us Field. A one in this field, also 

known as the External Processing Code (EPC), indicates that an 

item does not require further processing (interbank truncation). 

Routing and Transit Number Field located to the right of the Position 44 Field and to the left of 

the Account Number Field. This field consists of the ABA bank 

number and the Federal Reserve routing number. The ABA bank 

number identifies the bank on which the check was drawn. The 

Federal Reserve routing number identifies the Federal Reserve 

Bank (FRB) that serves the drawee bank. IPS reads and formats 

this field in one of three ways: 

• Nine digits surrounded by routing and transit number 

delimiters. The ninth digit is a check digit. 

• Nine characters surrounded by routing and transit number 

delimiters. The fifth character is a dash separating two fourdigit 

fields. 

• Nine characters surrounded by routing and transit number 

delimiters. The sixth character is a dash separating a fivedigit 

field from a three-digit field. Canadian items use this 

format. 

Account Number Field with a maximum of 18 characters (digits and dashes) located 

to the right of the RT Number Field and the left of the Transaction 

Code Field. This field contains the account number of the person 

or company that drafted the item. These characters are always 

surrounded by on-us delimiters on the right and optionally on the 

left. 

Transaction Code Field with a maximum of six digits located to the left of the Amount 

Field and to the right of the rightmost on-us delimiter of the 

account number. This field often consists of the check serial 

number and a transaction code that indicates the item type or how 

the item should be further processed. This field is optional. 

Amount Field with a maximum of 12 digits surrounded by amount 

delimiters located at the extreme right of an item. This field 

contains the amount of the item. 

3981 6061–201 1–25


Control Levels 

Batch 

Block 

Job 

The three basic units of work in IPS are the batch, the block, and the job. A job is 

composed of multiple blocks, and a block is composed of multiple batches. The system 

imposes limits of 999 batches per block and 9,999 blocks per processing cycle (that is, a 

business day). 

The smallest unit of work is the batch. A batch, typically composed of about 300 items, is 

identified by a three-digit batch number. Each batch is preceded by a batch ticket that 

may be encoded in the Amount Field with the amount total for the items included in the 

batch. A batch can contain one or more subbatches. When this unit of work is used, a 

subbatch ticket is encoded with the amount of the items in the subbatch and is placed at 

the end of the subbatch. 

Over-the-counter work is already grouped into batches at this point. Because inclearings 

are only now entering the system, batch tickets must be added. A bundle of inclearings 

frequently becomes a batch. 

The block, which is a collection of batches, is the primary level of control and 

manipulation in IPS. A block is identified by its four-digit block number. IPS prohibits 

duplication of block numbers within a single processing cycle. 

Two types of control tickets are used in setting up a block: 

• Pocket separator—used to mark the beginning of a block and to assign a block 

number to the block. The number of pocket separators you use within a block is 

determined by the sort pattern you are using. 

• Block ticket—used to mark the end of the block. 

The recommended size for a block is 10 to 20 batches. 

The job is the largest unit of control. Any number of blocks can be combined to form a 

job. Each job is followed by an end-of-job ticket. The job number consists of the sort 

pattern number and the block number of the first block of the job, which is called the key 

block. 

1–26 3981 6061–201

Control Tickets 


Control tickets are used to separate units of work in IPS. The value of the left four digits 

of the Routing and Transit (RT) Number Field in the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition 

(MICR) code line specifies the type of control ticket. 

The following table describes the control tickets used in base IPS: 

Code Line Ticket Required 

4888 Pocket Separator X 

4333 Subbatch X 

4444 Batch X 

4555 Incoming Cash Letter Credit X 

4666 Block X 

4777 End-of-Job X 

77 in leftmost 

digits of RT 

Bundle Cut X 

The following table describes the control tickets used by the IPS modules: 

Optional 

Module Code Line Ticket Required Optional 

Statement and Bulk 

Fine Sort 

Cycle Sort 77 in leftmost 

digits of RT 

DP 500 IES 

or Windows NT Reject 

Reentry 

User Defined Tracer X 

Account Separator X 

End-of-Pass X 

Locator X 


4888 Pocket Separator X 

4444 Batch X 

4666 Block X 


4333 Subbatch X 

4555 Incoming Cash Letter 

Credit 

3981 6061–201 1–27 

X


Encoding Control Tickets 

The RT Number Field must be encoded on all control tickets except for the Pocket 

Separator Ticket. If the items have gone through proof-of-deposit, the Amount Field on 

the batch ticket should contain the sum of the debit item amounts for the batch. 

In addition to encoding the batch total in the Amount Field as suggested, you may need to 

follow these recommendations for encoding control tickets: 

• Encode the control ticket value in both the American Bankers Association (ABA) and 

Federal Reserve Bank (FRB) portions of the RT Number Field. Thus, if the document 

processor cannot read the first set of numbers, it may be able to read the second set. 

This can help reduce rejects. 

• Encode the branch or source number in the Account Number Field of the batch ticket. 

This allows the source of the work to be identified as the work moves through the 

system. 

• Encode the device (document processor) number on the batch ticket. This may help 

trace operator errors or determine which document processors are encoding poorly. 

• If you are using the Availability and Pricing Module, encode the time of receipt of the 

items in the Transaction Code Field. 

Account Separator Ticket 

An account separator ticket is an optional ticket that is used to group items by sort key. 

During the last fine sort pass of items, the account separator ticket is sorted to follow 

items of the same sort key. This ticket can be used for all bulk filing fine sort jobs except 

book split. 

For utility sorting, the sort key is user-defined, so the separator ticket can be used to 

group items in many different ways. The code-line numbers are user defined. Refer to 

“Entering General Parameters” in Section 4 of the IPS Module Parameters Operating 

Guide. 

1–28 3981 6061–201

Batch Ticket 


A batch ticket is a required control ticket that assigns a batch number to a group of items. 

The numbers 4444 in the FRB portion of the RT Number Field indicate that this is a batch 

ticket. 

The following figure shows this ticket: 

3981 6061–201 1–29


Block Ticket 

A block ticket is a required control ticket that follows each block of items. The Amount 

Field contains the total of all batches in that block. A blank amount can also occur in the 

Amount Field. This ticket marks the end of a block and must be followed by a pocket 

separator ticket or an end-of-job ticket. The numbers 4666 in the FRB portion of the RT 

Number Field indicate that this is a block ticket. 


1–30 3981 6061–201

Bundle Cut Ticket 


A bundle cut ticket is an optional ticket that marks a bundle of items in a pocket instead of 

stopping flow and lighting the pocket light. Bundle cut tickets are sorted from the 

secondary hopper. Each bundle cut ticket used during a given business day should have a 

unique six-digit number encoded in the rightmost digits of the RT Number Field. The 

bundle cut ticket is identified by the number 77 in the leftmost digits of the RT Number 

Field. 


3981 6061–201 1–31


End-of-Job Ticket 

The end-of-job ticket is a required ticket that indicates to the document processor that this 

is the last item in a job. The numbers 4777 in the FRB portion of the RT Number Field 

indicate that this is an end-of-job ticket. 


End-of-Pass Ticket 

An end-of-pass ticket is an optional ticket that indicates to the document processor that 

the last item of the current pass has been processed. When the system reads the end-ofpass 

ticket, it automatically stops processing items. You can end a pass either by using 

this ticket or by selecting an option on the Fine Sort Pass Detail Screen. The code-line 

numbers are user defined. 

1–32 3981 6061–201

Incoming Cash Letter Credit Document 


An incoming cash letter credit document is an optional ticket used to define incoming 

cash letter boundaries and to place credit entries and totals in the IPS database. The 

numbers 4555 in the FRB portion of the RT Number Field indicate that this is an incoming 

cash letter credit document. This document is placed before the batch ticket at the 

beginning of a block or before any batch ticket within a block for multiple incoming cash 

letters within the same block. 


3981 6061–201 1–33


Pocket Separator Ticket 

The pocket separator ticket is required and is the first ticket in a block of work. This 

ticket contains the block number encoded in the Amount Field and can contain the 

numbers 1-999999. If this ticket is the first block of work in a job, it contains the key 

block number. The numbers 4888 in the FRB portion of the RT Number Field indicate a 

pocket separator ticket. 


1–34 3981 6061–201

Locator Ticket 


The locator ticket is an optional ticket in the Cycle Sort Module that is used to locate 

individual physical items more easily. Locator tickets are sorted from the secondary 

hopper. Each locator ticket used during a given business day should have a unique sixdigit 

number encoded in the rightmost digits of the RT Number Field. For ease of use, 

these tickets should be created and used in ascending numerical order. The locator ticket 

is identified by the number 77 in the leftmost digits of the RT Field. A count of the number 

of items sorted behind each locator ticket is defined in the Environment (ENVt) File. 


3981 6061–201 1–35


Subbatch Ticket 

Tracer Ticket 

A subbatch ticket is an optional ticket that divides a batch into smaller units. The 

numbers 4333 in the FRB portion of the RT Number Field indicate that this is a subbatch 

ticket. 


A tracer ticket is an optional ticket that is used to help you identify and resolve sequence 

errors that can occur when you retrieve items from pockets in the incorrect order. Tracer 

tickets are fed from the secondary hopper into each pocket at the beginning of all but the 

last fine sort pass. 

On a subsequent pass, you can refer to the unique identification code on each ticket to 

determine whether documents were retrieved from the pockets in the correct order. New 

tracer tickets are sorted to each pocket at the beginning of each pass, but they are not 

used during the last pass. Tickets from the previous pass are rejected. This ticket can be 

used for all types of bulk filing fine sorts and utility sorts, except for book split and 

modulus fine sorts. The code-line numbers are user defined. 

1–36 3981 6061–201

Pockets 

Book Repass 

Exception 

Kill 

Nonexception 


The number of pockets on a high-speed document processor ranges from 4 through 48. A 

sort pattern can define a pocket in different ways and for certain items. The pockets are 

numbered starting with 0 through x - 2 (x being the total number of pockets on the 

document processor). The reject pocket is labeled with the letter R. 

A book repass pocket is used during a book split pass. This pocket is reserved for items 

that require an additional pass to be split into books. Pocket zero on the document 

processor is the pocket designated for book repass during book split. 

An exception pocket receives items that require special handling because of user-defined 

reasons. For example, an item may be an exception because of insufficient funds or a 

stop payment request. In the Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules, this pocket is called 

an outsort pocket. Items in an outsort pocket are not fine sorted. 

Kill pockets receive items requiring no further distribution. The number of kill pockets in 

a job is limited only by the physical configuration of the document processor. 

The sort pattern designates each kill pocket as either an on-us or transit kill pocket. All 

the items in an on-us kill pocket are drawn against the processing financial institution. All 

items in a transit kill pocket are drawn against the accounts of another institution. 

A nonexception pocket receives items that do not require special handling. Nonexception 

items consist of cycle items that are to be fine sorted for statement rendering and 

safekeeping items that are not returned to the customer. 

Power Encode Outsort 

The power encode outsort pocket receives items sorted on the power encoder; these 

items then require manual handling before shipment. Either the Image Check Processing 

System (ICPS) or an Image Workstation operator can mark an item for power encode 

outsort. 

The system, for example, marks high dollar items and items that have been made into free 

items in Image Balancing. The workstation operators mark items for outsort if the 

information required to process them is not available. 

3981 6061–201 1–37


Reject 

Repass 

Waterfall 

Zero Kill 

The reject pocket receives all control tickets, except those pocket separator tickets sent 

to repass pockets and on-us pockets and those bundle cut tickets sent to transit pockets. 

The system rejects items for the following reasons: 

• Data was not captured because of faulty encoding or malfunction of the document 

processor 

• Captured data was invalid based on user-defined criteria 

Each document processor has a reject pocket already designated; this cannot be changed 

by a sort pattern. 

Repass pockets receive items that require further sorting on a subsequent pass through 

the document processor. Subsequent passes may be necessary if the final number of 

distinct sorted groups of items required by your institution exceeds the number of pockets 

on the document processor. 

A waterfall pocket is a user-defined range of pockets that is treated as one logical pocket. 

For example, when sorting in a waterfall pattern, the document processor fills the first 

pocket in the waterfall range first, then the second pocket, then the third pocket, and so 

forth, through the highest pocket in the range. The system records that all documents in 

the waterfall range sorted to the first pocket in the range. 

Kill pockets, not repass pockets, can be designated as waterfall pockets. 

A zero kill pocket is used during modulus fine sort to store items that have completed fine 

sort and are in final order. 

1–38 3981 6061–201

Jobs 

Prime Pass 


The first pass on a document processor is called the prime pass. The input consists of 

items and control tickets. Usually, previously determined batch amount totals are 

provided on the batch tickets. After items are assembled into control levels to form a job, 

the items are processed on a document processor. 

The system performs the following functions on a prime pass job: 

• Distributes items to document processor pockets as specified in the sort pattern. 

• Assigns a unique document identification number (DIN) to each item. 

• Microfilms items (optional). 

• Endorses items in a format defined by the sort pattern and document processor used 

(optional). 

• Accumulates totals for each required control level (batch, block, and job) for 

reconcilement. Totals can be accumulated at a level subordinate to the batch level. 

Subbatch level totals are optional. 

• Rejects items that cannot be read, control tickets that are not required for subsequent 

passes (pocket separator tickets), and items selected for the reject pocket by the sort 

pattern. 

• Reads and captures the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) code line of each 

item and writes that information with the DIN to the database. The system also 

includes the following: 

− A debit or credit indicator 

− An on-us or transit indicator 

− The number of days of availability for transit items in the database 

• Captures images of the items when the Image Check Processing System (ICPS) is 

used. 

Conventional Repass Job 

A repass job consists of items sorted to a repass pocket on a previous pass, called the 

parent pass. The operator can initiate a repass job at any time following the completion of 

the key block on prime pass. Two levels of repass, giving a maximum of three passes, 

provide great flexibility in defining the number of final item groupings. 

During prime pass, at least one pocket separator ticket is sorted to each repass pocket at 

the beginning of each block. As each block of work is run through prime pass, the system 

establishes amount control for the work in each block that is sorted to each repass 

pocket. When the work in each repass pocket is rerun, the system uses the block numbers 

on the pocket separator tickets to relate the work to the control total established on the 

previous pass. 

3981 6061–201 1–39


A repass job can itself contain repass pockets. As each block of work enters the repass 

run, the pocket separator tickets, which contain the prime block number, are sent to the 

repass pockets and the system establishes additional amount control totals for the next 

level of repass. Enough pocket separator tickets must be entered during prime pass to 

allow for at least one for each repass pocket in all subsequent repasses. 

Stacked Repass 

Stacked repass is a method of setting up a repass job that includes blocks of items from 

more than one parent pass. Each block in a stacked repass must have been sorted to the 

same repass pocket number on the previous pass. Jobs that are run with different sort 

patterns can be combined if the sort patterns have been specified in the Repass 

Alternative (RAFt) File. 

Imaging Repass Job 

In an imaging environment, the first repass for proof work must be done on the power 

encoder. Unencoded items in the proof work are encoded with the amount, transaction 

code, and any missing fields. Encoded items in the proof work are sorted to the 

appropriate pocket without further encoding. 

Preencoded work that was processed using ICPS can be repassed on either a power 

encoder or a high-speed document processor. 

1–40 3981 6061–201

Code-Line Matching 


Code-line matching is done on repass jobs to match each item in the repass job to the item 

data captured in the parent pass. An item is matched by comparing the Amount, 

Transaction Code, Routing and Transit (RT) Number, and Account Number fields. 

The system performs code-line matching for repass in the following way: 

• If any number in the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) code line is 

unreadable, the system replaces that number with the number from the item position 

in the parent pass. 

• The system compares the fields and, if they match, assigns the document 

identification number (DIN) of the item in that position on the parent pass repass 

item. 

• If the fields do not match, the system tries to find a match in the missing items 

preceding the current one. If no match is found in the missing items, the system 

compares the repass item with the next 20 items captured during prime pass. If no 

match is found, the replaced fields are restored, the system declares the item a free 

item, and assigns it a sequence number. 

The first free item in a processing cycle is assigned a sequence number of 9000000. 

Subsequent free items in the processing cycle are assigned numbers that are incremented 

by one. 

If an item is present when the parent pass job was run but not when the repass job is run, 

the system reports it as a missing item. 

3981 6061–201 1–41


Document Identification Number (DIN) 

During the prime pass, IPS assigns each item a unique DIN. In an imaging environment, 

the DIN is used to access the item's image in the database as well. 

The DIN is made up of two elements: 

• Two-digit device (document processor) number 

• Seven-digit sequence number 

A DIN is assigned to all items, including control tickets. Regardless of how many passes 

may be needed for a given item, the DIN of that item is sufficient to trace it back to its 

position in the prime pass. The DIN is included in the database as part of the item data. 

On most document processors, the DIN is endorsed on items during prime pass. If the 

items are microfilmed, the DIN appears on microfilm along with the document image. 

Thus, the DIN can be used to find the microfilm image of any item and to trace an itemlevel 

audit trail. 

1–42 3981 6061–201


Microfilm Retrieval Index (MRI) Number 

During Selective Microfilming, IPS assigns each item a unique MRI Number. 

The MRI Number is a six-digit sequence number that is used to assist an operator in 

locating a particular item image during the retrieval process. This microfilm sequence 

number is incremented by one for each item that is filmed and indicates an item's position 

within each reel of film. The MRI Number is included in the database as part of the item 

data. The MRI Number must be supplied to IPS at the beginning of each job. It will be the 

responsibility of the operator to supply the MRI Number. If the MRI Number is not 

supplied, IPS automatically starts numbering at 000001. 

Note: The document identification number (DIN) is not placed on the film when 

Selective Microfilming is enabled. However, the DIN is stored in the database 

and endorsed on each item filmed. 

3981 6061–201 1–43


Microfilm Reel Labels 

Labeling microfilm reels can be done in any of four ways depending on how the two 

available microfilming options are implemented: 

• Store microfilm events in the IPS database 

• Selective microfilming 

Store Microfilm Events Without Selective Microfilming 

The following is a suggested method to label a box of microfilm for easy identification of 

the reel when using the store microfilm events in database option without the selective 

microfilming option: 

• 2-digit cassette number 

• 2-digit reel number 

• 6-digit beginning microfilm retrieval index (MRI) number 

• 6-digit date in mmddyy format 

Write this information on the back of the box. 

Store Microfilm Events with Selective Microfilming 


the reel when using the store microfilm events in database option with the selective 

microfilming option: 

• 8-digit endpoint number from header 

• 4-digit cassette number from header 

• 2-digit reel number from header 

• 6-digit beginning MRI number 



1–44 3981 6061–201


Neither Store Microfilm Events nor Selective Microfilming 

When neither the store microfilm events in database nor the selective microfilming option 

is used, the microfilm header contains a 9-digit document identification number (DIN) 

consisting of a 2-digit device number and a 7-digit sequence number. This number is used 

to track and retrieve an item. 


the reel when neither option is used: 

• 9-digit DIN from header 



When the selective microfilming option is used without the store microfilm events in 

database option, the microfilm header contains an 8-digit endpoint number and a 6-digit 

beginning Microfilm Retrieval Index (MRI) number. 

Selective Microfilming Without Store Microfilm Events 


the reel when only selective microfilming is used: 

• 8-digit endpoint number from header 

• 6-digit MRI number from header 



3981 6061–201 1–45

Section 2 


IPS Base Structure ............................................................ 2–2 

Availability and Pricing Module ......................................... 2–8 

Cash Letter Control Module............................................... 2–9 

Cycle Sort Module ........................................................... 2–10 

Remote Site Module ........................................................ 2–11 

Sort Pattern Generator Module ....................................... 2–12 

Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules ........................... 2–13 

Statistics Module ............................................................. 2–15 

Tape Input/Output Module .............................................. 2–16 

3981 6061–201 2–1


IPS Base Structure 

IPS is composed of a base product and separately priced modules. The base functions of 

IPS are described in the following table: 

Function Description 

Initialization Initializes files; generates parameters, screens, and messages; 

performs database compaction 

Management Directs tasks through a central manager and maintains the 

database 

Input Controls input on document processors; allows job rebuilding 

Sort Pattern Filters and manages sort patterns 

Terminal Reject Reentry Controls reentry of rejects 

Corrections Corrects items in the database 

Report Prints reconcilement and transit reports, cash letter charges, and 

various other reports 

Extraction Extracts data from the database 

Recovery Recovers the database 

Debug Aids in debugging the database 

Imaging Interface Provides the interface to the Image Check Processing System 

(ICPS) and the Image Export Processing System (IXPS) 

The programs that perform these functions are either interactive or stand-alone. 

Interactive programs are controlled by the Manager (IPS) Program, whereas stand-alone 

programs act independently. Some programs are both interactive and stand-alone. 

2–2 3981 6061–201


The functions of the IPS base product are broadly interactive or stand-alone, although 

some interactive programs can be in a stand-alone function and vice versa. The following 

figure shows the relationship of the interactive functions and the independent status of the 

stand-alone functions: 

Each function and the programs that perform it are discussed in this section. Refer to 

“IPS Program Descriptions” in Section 3 of the IPS Technical Overview, for program 

descriptions. 

3981 6061–201 2–3


Initialization Function 

The Initialization Function is performed by the following programs: 

• Alternate Code-Line Generator (ACG) 

• All File Build (AFB) 

• Cash Letter History Compaction (CHC) 

• Conversion (CNV) 

• Database Compaction (DBC) 

• Endpoint Generator (EPG) 

• Environment Generator (ENV) 

• Pack-to-Tape Transfer (PTT) 

• Repass Alternative Generator (RAG) 

• 40 by 12 Screen Generator (S4G) 

• 80 by 24 Screen Generator (SCG) 

Management Function 

The Management Function is performed by the following programs: 

• Control Message Routing (CMR) 

• Disk File Handler (DFH) 

• Manager (IPS) 

Input Function 

The Input Function has various data entry points. Each one includes a device handler that 

captures data from its associated hardware device. The device handler contains the 

hardware-dependent logic to control the device and, in some cases, runs on the device 

itself. 

All data entry points also include a port program that accepts data from the device handler 

and transfers it to the Disk File Handler (DFH) Program for addition to the database. 

The S 4000 Reject Reentry Port (S4P) Program accepts prime pass and reject reentry data 

from the DP 500 document processors running the DP 500 Item Entry System. 

2–4 3981 6061–201

The Input Function is performed by the following programs: 

• High-Speed Handler (HSH) 

• High-Speed Port (HSP) 

• Rebuild A Job (RAJ) 

• S 4000 Reject Reentry Port (S4P) 

Sort Pattern Function 


The Sort Pattern Function is performed by the following programs on the PC and on the 

host processor: 

PC Programs 

• The Convert Program converts sort patterns you have previously created to the most 

current version of Patterns. 

• The Inquiry Program creates custom reports and one-time inquiries on generated sort 

patterns. 

• The Patgen Program generates sort patterns into files that can be used to sort 

documents. 

• The Patterns Program allows you to do the following: 

− Create sort patterns by entering all the information necessary for determining the 

pockets to which documents are sorted 

− Test generated sort patterns to ensure that they sort documents the way you 

intend 

− Update sort patterns as needed 

• The PC Micro Print Gateway (MPG) Program translates printer backup files 

transferred from the host processor into PC print files. 

For additional information about the PC-based programs, refer to the PW2 Item 

Processing System Sort Pattern Generator Module Installation Quick-Reference Guide, 

Patterns Computer-Based Reference, and to Learning Patterns, the online training for 

Patterns. The installation guide includes instructions for running PC MPG, for filtering 

sort patterns on the host processor, and for transferring files between the PC and the host 

processor. 

After generating and testing sort patterns on the PC, you transfer them to the host 

processor using a file transfer program of your choice. 

3981 6061–201 2–5


Host Programs 

• The External Table Lookup (ETL) Program performs the loading and external table 

lookup for any program requesting it. 

• The host Micro Printfile Gateway (MPG) Program translates print files that have been 

transferred from the PC into host printer backup files so reports can be printed on the 

host processor. 

• The Sort Pattern Filter (SPF) Program filters the generated sort pattern files that are 

transferred from the PC. 

• The Sort Pattern Lookup (SPL) Program performs the loading and sort pattern lookup 

for any program requesting it. 

• The Sort Pattern Manager (SPM) Program manages the sort pattern lookup requests 

received from any program. 

• The Sort Pattern Utility (SPU) Program reports directory information on the host sort 

pattern files. 

Terminal Reject Reentry Function 

The Terminal Reject Reentry Function is performed by the following programs: 

• Terminal Handler (TMH) 

• Terminal Port (TMP) 

Corrections Function 

The Corrections Function is performed by the Corrections (COR) Program. As many as 10 

copies of the COR Program can be used at the same time. 

Report Function 

The Report Function is performed by the following programs: 

• Cash Letter Settlement (CLS) 

• Desktop Printer (DTP) 

• Master and Detail Print (MDP) 

• Miscellaneous Reports (REP) 

Extraction Function 

The Extraction Function is performed by the following programs: 

• Automated Reconcilement Extraction (ARE) 

• Common File Extraction (CFE) 

• Computer Output to Microfiche (COM) 

2–6 3981 6061–201

• Cash Letter Extraction (CLE) 

• On-Us Extraction (ONE) 

• Real-Time Extraction Service (REX) 

• Settlement Extract (STE) 

• Statistics Extraction (STX) 

Recovery Function 


The Recovery Function is performed by the Database Recovery (DBR) Program. 

Debug Function 

The Debug Function is performed by the Database Utility (DBU) Program. 

Imaging Interface Function 

The Imaging Interface Function for ICPS is performed by the following programs: 

• Batch Work Prep Stats Extract (BWP) 

• Image Rebuild Handler (IRH) 

• Image Rebuild Port (IRP) 

• Post Interim Corrections (PIC) 

• Power Encode Inquiry (PEI) 

• Power Encode Port (PEP) 

• Power Encode Strings (PES) 

• Transfer Processor (TPP) 

The Imaging Interface Function for IXPS is performed by the following programs: 

• Image Export Input Generator (IEG) 

• Image Export Report Controller (IRC) 

• Image Export Report Get Code Lines (IGC) 

• Image Export Report Match Code Lines (IMC) 

• Image Export Report Output Code Lines (IOC) 

• Image Export Report Sort Code Lines (ISC) 

3981 6061–201 2–7



The Availability and Pricing Module has one function: the Initialization Function. This 

function defines availability of funds and processing charges for the financial institution 

and for its customers. 



• Availability and Pricing File Build (APB) 

• Availability and Pricing Generator (APG) 

2–8 3981 6061–201

Cash Letter Control Module 


The Cash Letter Control Module extracts cash letter control information from the Cash 

Letter History (CLHt) File on the host processor for subsequent transfer to a PC. On the 

PC, the extracted cash letter data is made available in a relational database for online 

inquiry and modification. 


The Cash Letter Extraction (CLE) Program extracts cash letter data from the CLHt File for 

subsequent transfer to the PC. The CLE Program extracts the available cash letter data 

whenever it is run during the processing cycle. The CLE Program extracts cash letter data 

for both the Cash Letter Control Module and the Settlement Module. The CLE Program is 

part of the IPS Base Extraction Function. 

The transfer of the cash letter data from the host processor to the PC is accomplished 

with third-party file transfer software. When shipped, the CLE program is configured for 

use with the recommended software, ICC/FileXpress. The default settings of CLE 

related to file transfer may need to be changed if another product is used. You may also 

want to adjust the settings to optimize the operation. To change the file transfer settings, 

refer to the IPS Installation Guide. 

Unisys recommends that the system be set to automatically transfer the extract files to the 

PC. You can, however, use commands to extract specific data and then manually transfer 

the files to the PC. 

PC Application 

Features 

The PC application imports the extracted cash letter data into the PC (Microsoft Access) 

database and allows the purging of old data from the database. Unisys has developed the 

PC application in Microsoft Visual Basic and Microsoft Access. These applications 

facilitate customer modifications. 

With this module you can 

• Modify cash letter information including: 

– Number of bundles 

– Amount of the cash letter 

– Endpoint information 

– Recalculation of availability and pricing information 

• Add cash letters that were not physically run through IPS, for example, high dollar 

items that could not be run through the document processor 

3981 6061–201 2–9


• Extract cash letter information for use elsewhere, for example in Federal Reserve 

Bank Rainbows, gain/loss posting, and float analysis 

• Provide input to the PC Settlement Module for transit settlement 

• Capture audit data to a file for use in reports 

Cycle Sort Module 

The Cycle Sort Module is used to sort items into user-defined cycles. These cycles are 

usually based on statement mailing dates. The Cycle Sort Module is designed to be used 

with the Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules. 

The Cycle Sort Module has three functions: 

• The Initialization Function initializes various files and builds the tables required for 

using the Cycle Sort Module. 

• The Input Function directs the application handling of documents as they are 

processed on the document processor, accepts the item data from the document 

processor, and builds the cycle sort database. 

• The Report Function produces the cycle sort exceptions reports and an inquiry tape 

and report for sites using locator tickets. 



• Account Range Table Generator (ARG) 

• Cycle Sort File Build (CFB) 

• Cycle Sort Table Generator (CTG) 

• Pocket Matrix Generator (PMG) 

• Site Special Reinitialization (SSR) 



• Cycle Sort Handler (CSH) 

• Cycle Sort Port (CSP) 



• Cycle Sort Exception Report (CSR) Program 

• Cycle Storage Locator Report (LOE) Program 

2–10 3981 6061–201

Remote Site Module 

The Remote Site Module has two functions: 


• The Management Function receives print tasks from the Manager (IPS) Program and 

assigns them to the appropriate remote print program. 

• The Report Function prints the reconcilement and transit reports at a remote site. 


The Remote Print Manager (RPM) Program receives print tasks from the IPS Program and 

assigns them to the appropriate remote print program. 



• Remote Master and Detail Print (RMD) 

• Remote Print (RPR) 

3981 6061–201 2–11


Sort Pattern Generator Module 

The Sort Pattern Generator Module allows you to generate a sort pattern and perform 

parameter maintenance at a PC. Sort pattern tables and parameters are then transferred 

to the host processor. 

The Sort Pattern Generator Module performs four functions: 

• The Initialization Function builds a sort pattern on the microprocessor. 

• The Input Function accepts data you enter and converts this information into files that 

can be used to sort documents and optionally control how images are exported. 

• The Recovery Function recovers and reorganizes the indexed sequential access 

method (ISAM) index files. 

• The Report Function translates printer backup files that have been transferred from 

the host processor into PC print files, creates standard operations reports, and 

performs one-time inquiries. 


The PC program, Patterns, allows you to build sort patterns by entering all the information 

necessary for determining the pockets to which documents are sorted. 


Patterns also accepts the data you entered to generate and test sort patterns and external 

tables on the microprocessor. Patterns is also used to update the sort patterns and to 

change the use of external tables in sort patterns when necessary. The content of external 

tables is not updated by Patterns. 

Recovery Function 

The Sort Pattern Generator Module includes a file management utility that recovers and 

reorganizes the ISAM index files used by Patterns. 


The PC Micro Print Gateway (MPG) Program translates printer backup files transferred 

from the host processor into PC print files. The host MPG Program translates print files 

that have transferred from the PC into host printer backup files. 

Patterns allows you to create standard operations reports and perform one-time inquiries. 

You can extract specific information from any sort pattern that has been generated. After 

you define a report, you can display it at the PC. You can also generate a one-time report 

without creating a permanent file. 

2–12 3981 6061–201

Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules 


The Statement Module initializes fine sort files; builds tables for book split, fine sort of a 

book, and fine sort of an exception pocket; and interfaces with the Bulk Fine Sort Module. 

The Statement Module also produces the Crippled Statements Report, which is used for 

reconciling customer statements. This report lists accounts with missing items, free 

items, or a missing account separator ticket. 

The Bulk Fine Sort Module is used to create sort specifications and to fine sort items by 

user-defined Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) code line fields, such as the 

Routing and Transit (RT) Number Field and the Account Number Field. You can use the 

Bulk Fine Sort Module to divide items into books, fine sort a book of items, or fine sort 

items pulled from an exception pocket during cycle sort. 

The Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules have three functions: 

• The Initialization Function builds tables used for fine sorting documents and initializes 

various files; it also defines and generates parameters for sort specifications used to 

fine sort documents. 

• The Input Function provides the interface between the offload document processor 

and the host processor, writes the fine sort database, handles restart processing, and 

directs the application handling of each document that passes through the offload 

document processor during bulk filing fine sort and utility sort. 

• The Report Function produces the Crippled Statements Report. 



• Book Table Generator (BTG) 

• Exception Fine Sort Table Generator (EFG) 

• Fine Sort File Build (FFB) 

• Sort Spec Editor (SSE) 



• Fine Sort Port (FSP) 

• Fine Sort Handler (FSH) 

• Host Utility (HUL) 

3981 6061–201 2–13




• Fine Sort Report (FSR) 

• Fine Sort Sort (FSS) 

2–14 3981 6061–201

Statistics Module 

The Statistics Module performs two functions: 


• The Extraction Function captures statistics at operator log-off, document processor 

change, or end-of-job for high-speed document processors and DP 500 document 

processors using the DP 500 Item Entry System. . 

• The PC Application prints or graphs statistics for high-speed or low-speed document 

processors on a PC that has received the captured statistics. 


The Statistics Extraction (STX) Program extracts statistics from the Statistics (STAt) File 

into two comma-delimited files, one for high-speed statistics and one for low-speed 

statistics. These comma-delimited files are subsequently transferred to the PC. The STX 

Program is meant to run after processing is complete for the day. The STX Program is 

part of the IPS Base Extraction Function. 

The transfer of the extracted statistics data from the host processor to the PC is 

accomplished with any third-party file transfer software that the customer owns. Unisys 

does not provide any file transfer software with the Statistics Module. 

PC Application 

The Statistics Program on the PC provides access to the statistics database through 

several standard inquiries (filters). The customer determines how to filter the statistics 

data and how much to maintain for reporting. The PC Statistics Module provides two 

sample reports and two sample graphs. Unisys intends that customers modify or contract 

to modify the module to fit their specific reporting and graphing needs. The PC Statistics 

Module provides several built-in customization opportunities to simplify this task. Unisys 

has also developed the Statistics Module in Microsoft Visual Basic and Microsoft Access to 

facilitate customer modifications. 

The standard Statistics Module provides historical reporting and graphing of statistics by 

the following criteria: 

• Date range for all dates available in the historical statistics files for high-speed and 

low-speed document processors running IPS 

• Device number range 

• Operator number range 

• Work type range 

• Pass number 

• Shift number 

• Site number 

3981 6061–201 2–15


Tape Input/Output Module 

The Tape Input/Output Module has two functions: 

• The Input Function creates a magnetic tape containing item data captured during 

processing on a high-speed document processor. 

• The Management Function reconciles the item data contained on the magnetic tape 

with the data from the physical documents. The module accepts tapes in both the 

Automated Clearinghouse (ACH) and the CheckLink formats. 



• Tape Input Port (TIP) 

• Tape Detail Port (TDP) 


The Management Function is performed by the Tape Input Reconcilement (TIR) Program. 

2–16 3981 6061–201

Section 3 


IPS Program Names and Mnemonics................................ 3–2 

IPS Program Descriptions ................................................. 3–6 

Files Updated and Accessed by IPS Programs................ 3–31 

Temporary Work and External Files by IPS Program ..... 3–36 

IPC Codes ........................................................................ 3–43 

IPS COBOL74 Libraries by Program ............................... 3–45 

IPS Programs by COBOL74 Libraries.............................. 3–50 

Description of COBOL74 Libraries .................................. 3–58 

IPS ICM Descriptions ....................................................... 3–65 

ICMs Used with IPS .......................................................... 3–68 

ICMs That Update and Access IPS Files .......................... 3–69 

COBOL74 Libraries and Working Storage Data Items Used 

by IPS ICMs.................................................................. 3–70 

3981 6061–201 3–1


IPS Program Names and Mnemonics 

The following table contains the program mnemonic, program name, naming convention, 

and classification of each IPS program: 

Program 

Mnemonic 

Program Name Naming 

Convention 

ACG Alternate Code-Line Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

Classification 

AFB All File Build pgmt01 Stand-alone, interactive, and 

automatically started 

APB Availability and Pricing File Build pgmt01 Stand-alone 

APG Availability and Pricing Generator pgmtcc Stand-alone 

ARE Automated Reconcilement 

Extraction 

pgmt01 Interactive 

ARG Account Range Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

BTG Book Table Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

BWP Batch Work Prep Stats Extract pgmt01 Stand-alone 

CFB Cycle Sort File Build pgmt01 Stand-alone 

CFE Common File Extraction pgmt01 Interactive 

CHC Cash Letter History Compaction pgmt01 Stand-alone and 


CLE Cash Letter Extraction pgmt01 Interactive 

CLS Cash Letter Settlement pgmt01 Stand-alone 

CMR Control Message Routing pgmt01 Stand-alone 

CNV Conversion pgmt01 Stand-alone 

COM Computer Output to Microfiche pgmtcc Interactive 

COR Corrections pgmtcc Interactive 

CSH Cycle Sort Handler pgmtdd Automatically started 

CSP Cycle Sort Port pgmtdd Interactive 

CSR Cycle Sort Exception Report pgmt01 Stand-alone 

CTG Cycle Sort Table Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

DBC Database Compaction pgmt01 Stand-alone and interactive 

DBR Database Recovery pgmt01 Stand-alone 

DBU Database Utility pgmt01 Stand-alone 

DFH Disk File Handler pgmt01 Automatically started 

DTP Desktop Printer pgmtpp Stand-alone and 


3–2 3981 6061–201

Program 

Mnemonic 


Convention 

EFG Exception Fine Sort Table Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

ENV Environment Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

EPG Endpoint Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 



ETL External Table Lookup pgmtcc Automatically started 

FFB Fine Sort File Build pgmt01 Stand-alone 

FSH Fine Sort Handler pgmtdd Automatically started 

FSP Fine Sort Port pgmtdd Interactive 

FSR Fine Sort Report pgmtcc Interactive 

FSS Fine Sort Sort pgmtcc Automatically started 

HSD Host Data Communications Handler pgmtdd Automatically started 

HSH High-Speed Handler pgmtdd Automatically started 

HSP High-Speed Port pgmtdd Interactive 

HUL Host Utility pgmtdd Stand-alone 

IEG Image Export Input Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

IGC Image Export Report Get Code 

Lines 

IMC Image Export Report Match Code 

Lines 

IOC Image Export Report Output Code 

Lines 

pgmtcc Automatically started 



IPS Manager pgmt01 Stand-alone 

IRC Image Export Report Controller pgmt01 Stand-alone 

IRH Image Rebuild Handler pgmtdd Automatically started 

IRP Image Rebuild Port pgmtdd Stand-alone 

ISC Image Export Report Sort Code 

Lines 


LOE Cycle Storage Locator Report pgmt01 Stand-alone 

MDP Master and Detail Print pgmtcc Interactive 

MPG Micro Printfile Gateway pgmt01 Stand-alone 

NPP NT Power Encode Port pgmtdd Interactive 

ONE On-Us Extraction pgmt01 Interactive 

PED Power Encode Download pgmt01 Interactive 

3981 6061–201 3–3


Program 

Mnemonic 


Convention 

PEI Power Encode Inquiry pgmt01 Stand-alone 


PEP Power Encode Port pgmtdd Automatically started 

PES Power Encode Strings pgmt01 Interactive 

PIC Post Interim Corrections pgmt01 Interactive 

PMG Pocket Matrix Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

PTT Pack-to-Tape Transfer pgmt01 Stand-alone 

RAG Repass Alternative Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

RAJ Rebuild A Job pgmt01 Interactive 

REP Miscellaneous Reports pgmt01 Stand-alone and 


REX Real Time Extraction Service pgmt01 Stand-alone 

RMD Remote Master and Detail Print pgmtps Interactive and automatically 

started 

RPM Remote Print Manager pgmtps Automatically started 

RPR Remote Print pgmtps Stand-alone 

SCG 80 by 24 Screen Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

SPF Sort Pattern Filter pgmt01 Stand-alone 

SPL Sort Pattern Lookup pgmtcc Automatically started 

SPM Sort Pattern Manager pgmt01 Interactive 

SPU Sort Pattern Utility pgmt01 Stand-alone 

SSE Sort Spec Editor pgmt01 Stand-alone 

SSR Site Special Reinitialization pgmt01 Interactive 

STX Statistics Extraction pgmt01 Stand-alone 

S4G 40 by 12 Screen Generator pgmt01 Stand-alone 

S4P S 4000 Reject Reentry Port pgmtdd Automatically started 

S4S S 4000 Reject Reentry Sort pgmtdd Automatically started 

TDP Tape Detail Port pgmt01 Stand-alone and 


TIP Tape Input Port pgmtnn Interactive 

TIR Tape Input Reconcilement pgmt01 Stand-alone 

3–4 3981 6061–201

Program 

Mnemonic 


Convention 



TMH Terminal Handler pgmt01 Automatically started 

TMP Terminal Port pgmt01 Interactive 

TPP Transfer Processor pgmt01 Stand-alone 

TRP Terminal Reentry Port pgmtdd Interactive 

For a list of Sort Pattern Generator Module PC programs and files, refer to the PW 2 Item 

Processing System Sort Pattern Generator Module Installation Quick-Reference Guide 

and Patterns Computer-Based Reference. 

3981 6061–201 3–5


IPS Program Descriptions 

ACG Program 

AFB Program 

APB Program 

APG Program 

The Alternate Code-Line Generator (ACG) Program is a stand-alone program that is 

attached to a terminal. The ACG Program replaces the Serial Number Location Generator 

(SLG) Program. The ACG Program performs all the functions of the SLG Program by 

creating and maintaining the Serial Number Location (SERt) File and producing a printer 

backup file of the Serial Number Location Parameters for Site . 

Also, the ACG Program creates and maintains the Account Conversion Table (ACTt) File. 

The ACTt File is an indexed sequential access method (ISAM) file used in the Image 

Export Processing System to convert Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) codeline 

data to an alternate representation. It contains the parameters used to convert 

routing and transit (RT) numbers and account numbers on the MICR code line to the 

corresponding RT and account numbers used by the demand deposit accounting (DDA) 

system of the institution. It also produces the RT/Account Conversion Parameter Listing. 

The All File Build (AFB) Program is a stand-alone and interactive program. It can also be 

automatically started by the Database Compaction (DBC) Program. The AFB Program 

creates and initializes files so that subsequent programs can access the files in an input or 

output mode. 

The Availability and Pricing File Build (APB) Program, a stand-alone program, creates the 

files that are used by the On-Us Extraction (ONE), Master and Detail Print (MDP), and 

Remote Master and Detail Print (RMD) programs to calculate customer and bank 

availability and pricing. 

All files created by the APB Program are random access files. 

The Availability and Pricing Generator (APG) Program, a stand-alone program, accepts the 

data from the customer and bank schedules and creates the files used by the Availability 

and Pricing File Build (APB) Program. 

The APG Program produces the following reports: 

• Bank Schedule 

• Customer Schedule 

• Market Segment Listing 

3–6 3981 6061–201

ARE Program 

ARG Program 

BTG Program 

• Sendpoint Information Listing 

• Standard Holiday Listing 

If the CLC module is enabled, APG creates the following files: 

• BPMtCD - Bank Parameter Comma-Delimited file (library L256) 

• BPHtCD - Bank Parameter Holiday Comma-Delimited file (library L225) 

• BPRtCD - Bank Parameter RT Comma-Delimited file (library L257) 

• HOLtCD - Holiday Parameter Comma-Delimited file (library L261) 


The Automated Reconcilement Extraction (ARE) Program, an interactive program, 

creates the Automated Reconcilement Interface (Rbbbbt) files that are used by the 

Corrections (COR) Program and the Image Check Processing System (ICPS) programs to 

aid in balancing. These files can also be used as input to another reconcilement system. 

Only one copy of the ARE Program per test system can be in the mix at a time. 

The Account Range Generator (ARG) Program, a stand-alone program, is used to assign a 

range of account numbers or account number subfields. A financial institution uses these 

fields to identify the cycle of an item. 

The Book Table Generator (BTG) Program, a stand-alone program, uses the demand 

deposit accounting (DDA) Statements Items Tape (STMtEF) File to update the Book Table 

(BTstIF) File and the Book Item Data (BKstIF) File. If defined at installation, the BTG 

Program also creates the Book Range Table (BRstIF) File. The BTG Program builds these 

table files in the following order: 

• Ascending routing and transit (RT) number 

• Ascending account number order 

• Ascending ZIP code order 

• Another user-defined order 

These tables are downloaded to the document processor and used for pocket selection 

during a book split and a fine sort of a book. 

BWP Program 

The Batch Work Prep Stats Extract (BWP) Program, a stand-alone program, retrieves 

batch level work preparation data from the Total (TOTt) File and stores it in the Batch 

Work Prep Stats Extract (BWPt) File. The ICPS Host Reports (IHR) Program uses this 

data to print work preparation statistics. 

3981 6061–201 3–7


CFB Program 

CFE Program 

CHC Program 

CLE Program 

The Cycle Sort File Build (CFB) Program, a stand-alone program, creates and initializes 

the files used for the Cycle Sort Module. 

The Common File Extraction (CFE) Program, an interactive program, creates a tape or 

disk pack file for use by the customer in preparing special reports on items processed by 

IPS during the current processing day. 

The CFE Program produces the following reports: 

• CFE Extraction Recap Report 

• CFE Free and Missing Items Report 

• Listing of CFE Key Fields 

The Cash Letter History Compaction (CHC) Program is a stand-alone program that is 

automatically started by the Manager (IPS) Program. The CHC Program does the 

following: 

• Determines on a daily basis if any cash letter history entries are outside the retention 

period specified in the Environment (ENVt) File and compacts the Cash Letter History 

(CLHt) File 

• Rebuilds the Cash Letter Index (CLIt) File 

• Checks for and removes any exception routing and transit (RT) numbers from the CLC 

Exception RT (CERt) File that are more than seven calendar days old, if the 

Availability and Pricing Module is used 

The Cash Letter Extraction (CLE) Program, an interactive program, does the following : 

• Extracts cash letter and APM information from the application server's database. 

• Creates comma-delimited extract files for download to the PC. 

The program traverses through the CLH file and extracts any cash letters not yet 

extracted. The extract files are in the format T where is the test system 

number, and is the file extract number (obtained from the CLH base record). 

3–8 3981 6061–201

CLS Program 


The Cash Letter Settlement (CLS) Program, a stand-alone program, produces the following 

reports: 

• Cash Letter Pricing Report 

• Cash Letter Settlement Availability Report (only if the Availability and Pricing Module 

is used) 

CMR Program 

CNV Program 

The Control Message Routing (CMR) Program, a stand-alone program, enables any 

terminal to interface with the host operating system. 

The Conversion (CNV) Program, a stand-alone program, converts existing IPS files to the 

current release level format. For release levels 800, 820, and 825 the files converted are 

the following: 

File 

Mnemonic 

File Name Release Level Converted 

BNKtPM Bank Parameter 800 

BNKt01 Bank Parameter Key 800 

CLHt Cash Letter History 825 

CnntPM Customer Parameter 800 

Cnnt01 Customer Parameter Key 800 

ENVt Environment 800, 820, and 825 

EPTt Endpoint 800, 820, and 825 

GRPt Groups 800, 820, and 825 

OPRt Operator 800, 820, and 825 

A PC conversion program converts Patterns database files. For more information, refer to 

the PW 2 Item Processing System Sort Pattern Generator Module Installation Quick- 

Reference Guide. 

3981 6061–201 3–9


COM Program 

COR Program 

The Computer Output to Microfiche (COM) Program, an interactive program, supplies the 

interface between IPS and the manual research and adjustments systems at the site. The 

COM Program extracts one prime pass job at a time; however, various sets of jobs can be 

specified with one operator input command. A job becomes eligible for COM extraction 

once it has been released by the Corrections (COR) Program or the programs that manage 

the system. The COM Program retrieves the item and control ticket data as seen during 

the on-us extraction process. It then creates a magnetic tape containing data that is 

suitably formatted for subsequent input to microfiche generation equipment. 

COM requests can be either manually queued by an operator or automatically queued by 

the system for a given job after being released by the COR Program or the programs that 

manage the system. In order to obtain automatic queuing for a job, the appropriate job 

parameter must be set during sort pattern generation. 

The COM Program produces the following reports: 

• Cash Letter Recap 

• Detail List 

• DIN/Block Cross Reference 

• Full Master 

The Corrections (COR) Program is an interactive program. It provides the ability to 

manipulate item data and control ticket totals to correct discrepancies in the database 

discovered during reconcilement of a prime pass block or repass job. Multiple operators 

can enter corrections from one or more terminals, but the system prohibits simultaneous 

corrections to the same block from different terminals. The operator can correct data 

captured during a prime pass job, a repass job, or a reject reentry job. 

The COR Program does the following: 

• Allows changes to any field on a batch or block ticket except the first four digits of the 

Routing and Transit (RT) Number Field 

• Allows changes to items in the database 

• Allows insertion of items or batch tickets into the database at a user-specified position 

and updates totals. Batch control ticket insertion is not allowed if subbatches are 

used in item processing. 

• Allows online reconcilement and correction of prime pass and repass runs without the 

use of the Exception Master 

• Provides online access through a menu-driven terminal interface 

• Prevents operator access by a cutoff dollar amount for a single item amount 

correction 

3–10 3981 6061–201

CSH Program 

CSP Program 

CSR Program 

CTG Program 

DBC Program 


• Performs sort pattern lookup using the Sort Pattern Lookup (SPL) Program and the 

External Table Lookup (ETL) Program, and the Sort Pattern Manager (SPM) Program, 

validates new data, and updates totals 

The COR Program produces the DIN/BUN Cross Reference List of Corrected Items. 

The Cycle Sort Handler (CSH) Program is automatically started by the Cycle Sort Port 

(CSP) Program. The CSH Program processes each item that passes through the document 

processor. 

The Cycle Sort Port (CSP) Program, an interactive program, provides the interface 

between the host processor and the document processor. The CSP Program resides on 

the host processor and downloads processing data to the document processor. The CSP 

Program also accepts item information from the document processor and creates the 

cycle sort database. 

The Cycle Sort Exception Report (CSR) Program, a stand-alone program, prints cycle sort 

exception reports. 

The CSR Program produces the following reports at the completion of cycle sort: 

• Account Pull Items Report 

• Matched Exception Items Report 

• Missing Exception Items Report 

The Cycle Sort Table Generator (CTG) Program, a stand-alone program, uses demand 

deposit accounting (DDA) on-us tapes to create the following tables on a daily basis: 

• One account and one exception table for each cycle sort key block 

• One account and one exception table for IPS reject items 

• One account table for each common repass pocket 

• One account table for cycle sort paid exception items 

These tables are used by the Cycle Sort Handler (CSH) Program for pocket selection. 

The Database Compaction (DBC) Program, a stand-alone and interactive program, is used 

after all required processing steps for a job are complete. It eliminates the data associated 

3981 6061–201 3–11


DBR Program 

DBU Program 

with jobs that are no longer needed in the database for both IPS and IXPS. Parameters are 

set up in the sort pattern to define all of the steps that must be performed on a job before 

its processing is complete. Using these parameters, the DBC Program compacts the 

database at the completion of a processing cycle by removing all data associated with the 

completed jobs for both IPS and IXPS and relocating all remaining data. The DBC 

Program should only be run under the following conditions: 

• All jobs are complete. 

• Posting of interim corrections is complete. 

• No unprocessed entries remain in the following queue files: 

− ARE Completed Block Queue (ACQt) 

− Desktop Queue (DTQt) 

− Post Correction Queue (PCQt) 

− Queue (QUEt) 

− Real-Time Extraction Queue (REQt) 

• None of the following port programs is in the mix: 

− High-Speed Port (HSP) 

− S 4000 Reject Reentry Port (S4P) 

− Tape Detail Port (TDP) 

− Tape Input Port (TIP) 

− Terminal Port (TMP) 

The Database Recovery (DBR) Program, a stand-alone program, uses the backup tapes or 

disk pack files created by the Disk File Handler (DFH) Program to rebuild the database in 

case of a mass storage failure. It rebuilds the entire database or selected files. When the 

DBR Program is started, no other IPS programs can be in the mix. 

The DBR Program produces the Database Recovery Parity Error Listing. 

The Database Utility (DBU) Program, a stand-alone program, aids in testing and debugging 

the system by printing formatted dumps of selected portions of the IPS database. The 

output from this program provides the necessary documentation for reporting difficulty 

with the system. For a list of IPS files that the DBU Program can print, refer to “Programs 

That Update and Access Each IPS File” in Section 4. 

3–12 3981 6061–201

DFH Program 

DTP Program 

EFG Program 


The Disk File Handler (DFH) Program is automatically started when the Manager (IPS) 

Program starts. The DFH Program does the following: 

• Adds new records to the major database files 

• Allocates database space for the major database files in sets of contiguous records 

called partitions 

• Creates and maintains the Backup Tape or Pack (BKptnn) File that contains all 

records written to the IPS database 

The Desktop Printer (DTP) Program is a stand-alone program that can also be 

automatically started by the Cash Letter Control (CLC) or Corrections (COR) programs. 

The DTP Program directs printer backup files to a desktop printer. When started by the 

COR Program, the DTP Program also directs the following reports to a desktop printer: 

• Batch List 

• Exception Master 


The Exception Fine Sort Table Generator (EFG) Program, a stand-alone program, creates 

exception fine sort tables. These tables are in account number order and are used for 

pocket selection during a fine sort of an exception pocket. 

3981 6061–201 3–13


ENV Program 

EPG Program 

The Environment Generator (ENV) Program, a stand-alone program, is used to define 

operating options within the IPS environment. These include the following: 

• Central site parameters 

• Remote site parameters 

• Device (document processor) parameters 

• Host processor parameters 

• Operator parameters 

• Tape Input Port (TIP) parameters 

• Throughput parameters 

• PC module parameters 

• Bulk filing parameters 

• Disk or disk pack assignments and external file names of IPS files 

• Real-Time Extraction Service (REX) parameters 

• Imaging parameters of ICPS and IXPS 

The ENV Program produces the Environment Listing. 

If the Cash Letter Control, Settlement, or Statistics Modules are enabled, ENV creates the 

following files: 

• ENVtCD - ENV Comma-Delimited file (library L272) 

• OPRtCD - Operator Comma-Delimited file (libarry L262) 

The Endpoint Generator (EPG) Program, a stand-alone program, is used to define the 

following parameters: 

• Endpoint parameters 

• Group parameters 

The EPG Program produces the following reports: 

• Endpoint Listing 

• Groups Listing 

If the CLC Module is enabled, EPG creates the following files: 

• EPTtCD - Endpoint Comma-Delimited file (library L273) 

• GRPtCD - Group Comma-Delimited file (library L260) 

3–14 3981 6061–201

ETL Program 

FFB Program 

FSH Program 

FSP Program 

FSR Program 


The External Table Lookup (ETL) Program is automatically started by the Sort Pattern 

Manager (SPM) Program in response to a request from the Sort Pattern Lookup (SPL) 

Program. The SPL Program does the sort pattern lookup for programs that do not run on 

a document processor such as the Corrections (COR) Program and the Terminal Reject 

Reentry Handler (TMH) Program. 

The ETL Program loads the required external table and performs an external table lookup 

for any sort pattern that uses external tables. The ETL Program returns its results to the 

SPL Program by means of an interprogram communication (IPC). 

The Fine Sort File Build (FFB) Program, a stand-alone program, creates and initializes fine 

sort files so they can be accessed for subsequent processing by the Statement and Bulk 

Fine Sort Modules. 

The Fine Sort Handler (FSH) Program is automatically started by the Fine Sort Port (FSP) 

Program or the Host Utility (HUL) Program. The FSH Program does the following: 

• Builds the IPS item entry 

• Reads unformatted item data 

• Sends item destination information to document processors 

• Sends an item entry to the FSP Program 

The Fine Sort Port (FSP) Program, an interactive program, does the following: 

• Accepts item information from the document processor and builds the fine sort 

database 

• Provides the interface between the host processor and the document processor 

• Resides on the host processor and downloads processing environment information 

and tables to the document processor 

The Fine Sort Report (FSR) Program, an interactive program, compares the Statements 

Items (STMtIF) File to the Book Item Data (BKstIF) File. 

The FSR Program produces the Crippled Statements Report. 

3981 6061–201 3–15


FSS Program 

HSD Program 

HSH Program 

HSP Program 

HUL Program 

The Fine Sort Sort (FSS) Program is automatically started by the Fine Sort Report (FSR) 

Program. The FSS Program sorts items for an account transfer account. 

The Host Data Communications Handler (HSD) Program is automatically started by the 

High-Speed Port (HSP) Program. The HSD Program controls data communication with an 

offload document processor that uses a Reader Sorter Data Link Processor (RSDLP). 

The High-Speed Handler (HSH) Program is automatically started by the High-Speed Port 

(HSP) Program. The HSH Program runs on the following document processors: 

• DP 1800 document processor 

• DP 1000 document processor 

The HSH Program performs the following tasks for each item: 

• Builds the IPS item entry 

• Performs sort pattern lookup 


• Sends the item destination information to the document processor 

• Sends the item entry to the HSP Program 

• With ICPS, sends item data to the Storage and Retrieval Module (SRM) to be stored 

with the image 

The High-Speed Port (HSP) Program, an interactive program, receives item data from an 

offload document processor or the Disk Input (DSKtIN) File. The HSP Program and the 

Disk File Handler (DFH) Program build the database. Each offload document processor 

has an HSP Program to receive data. A device (document processor) number must be 

specified when the HSP Program is started, because up to 99 high-speed devices can be 

connected to IPS. 

The Host Utility (HUL) Program, a stand-alone program, is optionally used for utility 

sorting. The HUL Program does the following: 

• Downloads the Expected Keys Table and Host Outsort Table files 

• Receives statistics and results of the host outsorts from the offload document 

processor 

3–16 3981 6061–201

IEG Program 

IGC Program 

IMC Program 

IOC Program 

The HUL Program produces the following reports: 

• Directed Finesort Statistics 

• Host Outsort Notification Report 


The Image Export Input Generator (IEG) Program, a stand-alone program, creates the 

Business Date Item Count (BICt) File for use when capturing jobs for Image Statement 

Export (ISE) for the Image Export Processing System (IXPS). This program is used only if 

the end-of-job item count verification flag is enabled in the Environment (ENVt) File when 

capturing jobs for ISE. The IEG Program creates the BICt File by processing the 

Statements Items Tape (STMtEF) File created by a user-supplied program. The STMtEF 

File is the same file that is used by the Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules of IPS. 

The Image Export Report Get Code Lines (IGC) Program, an automatically started 

program, creates the Retrieved Code Lines (RCxtff) files. The IGC Program retrieves the 

most current code-line data for each item, converts it to its equivalent in the ACTt File, if 

required, rearranges the code-line fields according to the match order specified in the 

EXPt File, and writes each code line to the RCxtff files. 

The Image Export Report Controller (IRC) Program starts and provides parameters to the 

IGC Program when a user request is made for IXPS Missing and Free reports. The IGC 

Program performs the first process in producing IXPS Missing and Free reports. The IRC 

Program can start a maximum of nine copies of the IGC Program. 

The Image Export Report Match Code Lines (IMC) Program, an automatically started 

program, creates the Missing and Free (MFxtxx) File. The IMC Program compares the 

Sorted Code Lines (SCxtff) File created by the Image Export Report Sort Code Lines (ISC) 

Program with the Code-Line Match Input (CMxtxx) File, which is created by a usersupplied 

program, to create the MFxtxx File. If a code line is in the CMxtxx File but not in 

the SCxtff File, the IMC Program writes that code line to the MFxtxx File as a missing 

item. If a code line is in the SCxtff File but not in the CMxtxx File, the IMC Program 

writes that code line to the MFxtxx File as a free item. 

The Image Export Report Controller (IRC) Program starts the IMC Program after the ISC 

Program creates the SCxtff File for the specified customer or cycle. The IRC Program can 

start a maximum of nine copies of the IMC Program. 

The Image Export Report Output Code Lines (IOC) Program, an automatically started 

program, creates printer backup files for the three IXPS Missing and Free reports: 

• IXPS Missing and Free Statement Report 

3981 6061–201 3–17


IPS Program 

• IXPS Missing and Free Customer Report 

• IXPS Missing and Free Institution Report 

The printer backup files are created under separate family names depending on the type of 

report: 

Report Type Family Name 

Statement reports CYCtxx 

Customer reports CUStxx 

Institution reports ALLt 


IOC Program after the IMC Program creates the Missing and Free (MFxtxx) File for the 

specified customer or cycle. The IRC Program can start a maximum of nine copies of the 

IMC Program. 

The Manager (IPS) Program, a stand-alone program, manages system functions for the 

interactive programs. Interactive programs are controlled by a standard set of procedures 

called protocol. Protocol commands (system control commands) are used by the operator 

to communicate with the system. The IPS Program communicates with the interactive 

programs through this standard set of procedures. The IPS Program does the following: 

• Allows the operator to inquire about the status of programs, the contents of queues, 

and the current values of certain system parameters 

• Assigns queued tasks to the programs 

• Enforces protocol 

• Handles the interface between the operator and the master terminal. Refer to “System 

Terminals” in Section 1 of the IPS Base Operating Guide. 

• Maintains an audit listing of messages including master terminal input commands and 

output messages, task initiation, event notification, and inquiry responses. These 

audit listings do not include commands entered directly through the system console or 

through the Control Message Routing (CMR) Program (unless entered directly through 

the IPS Program). 

• Queues tasks that are generated manually through an IPS Program control command 

or automatically by the system in response to user-selected events 

• Provides the interface to the ICPS Manager (IPM) Program and the Image Export 

Manager (IEM) Program 

3–18 3981 6061–201

IRC Program 

IRH Program 


The Image Export Report Controller (IRC) Program, a stand-alone program, controls the 

operation of the processing required to print the IXPS Missing and Free reports. The IRC 

Program accepts commands from the user and then passes the necessary parameters to 

control the processing of the programs that retrieve, sort, match, and output the items to 

the IXPS Missing and Free reports. The IRC Program communicates with its subordinate 

programs by interprogram communications (IPCs), in a manner similar to the IPS 

Program. 

The IRC Program can provide overlapped processing of a single IXPS Missing and Free 

Report or manage the processing of several reports at once by using additional copies of 

its subordinate programs. The IRC Program can start a maximum of nine copies of each 

of the following programs: 

• Image Export Report Get Code Lines (IGC) Program 

• Image Export Report Sort Code Lines (ISC) Program 

• Image Export Report Match Code Lines (IMC) Program 

• Image Export Report Output Code Lines (IOC) Program 

The user can tune the performance of the IXPS Missing and Free reports feature by 

adjusting the number of copies of the subordinate programs available for use by the IRC 

Program. 

The Image Rebuild Handler (IRH) Program is automatically started by the Image Rebuild 

Port (IRP) Program. The IRH Program runs only on a DP 1800 document processor with 

an Image module attached. 

The IRH Program recaptures the images from blocks of items whose images were 

captured on prime pass but were lost or corrupted. The IRH Program performs the 

following tasks for each item: 


• Receives formatted item data from the IRP Program of the items from the prime pass 

• Matches the code lines of the item data from prime pass to the item flowing through 

the track 

• Sends the image data with the item's original document identification number (DIN) 

to be stored on the Storage and Retrieval Module (SRM) 

• Sorts the documents to the reject pocket to maintain the proper order 

3981 6061–201 3–19


IRP Program 

ISC Program 

LOE Program 

The Image Rebuild Port (IRP) Program, a stand-alone program, recaptures the images of 

proof-of-deposit (POD) unencoded jobs that have completed prime pass, but whose 

images were lost or corrupted. The Power Encode Strings (PES) Program creates the 

pocket strings used to code-line match the items as they are repassed so that the original 

document identification number (DIN) is assigned to the appropriate image. Once the 

PES Program creates the power encode strings for a block, you cannot rebuild images for 

the items. 

The Image Export Report Sort Code Lines (ISC) Program, an automatically started 

program, creates the Sorted Code Lines (SCxtff) File by sorting the code lines in the 

RCxtff files. 


ISC Program after the Image Export Report Get Code Lines (IGC) Program creates the 

RCxtff files for the specified customer or cycle. The IRC Program can start a maximum of 

nine copies of the ISC Program. 

The Cycle Storage Locator Report (LOE) Program, a stand-alone program, creates an 

inquiry tape and report for sites using locator tickets. Each tape or report contains inquiry 

information that may be used to locate items in the cycle storage area for a business date. 

MDP Program 

The LOE Program produces the Cycle Storage Locator Report. 

The Master and Detail Print (MDP) Program, an interactive program, schedules reports for 

printing. The MDP Program does the following: 

• Prints endpoint reports 

• Prints reconcilement reports 

• Prints V Series printer backup files 

The MDP Program produces the following reports: 


• Bundle List 


• Control Total Summary 



3–20 3981 6061–201




• On-Us Listing 

• Pocket Listing 

• Reject Pocket Listing 

In addition, the MDP Program sends extraction requests to the Cash Letter Extraction 

(CLE) and Real-Time Extraction Service (REX) Programs. 

MPG Program 

NPP Program 

ONE Program 

The Micro Printfile Gateway (MPG) Program is a stand-alone program. The MPG Program 

translates PC print files that have been transferred from the PC into host printer backup 

files so that reports can be printed on the host processor. 

The Windows NT Power Encode Port (NPP) Program downloads the sort pattern data, 

ENV parameters, and job parameters to the power encode transport program on the 

DP 500 Transport. It also receives pocket string data, statistics information, and audit 

information from the Wndows NT server and writes them to the IPS database. One copy 

of the program is required for each device. Start this program at the master terminal. 

The On-Us Extraction (ONE) Program, an interactive program, supplies the interface to 

your accounting systems. The content and format requirements of these accounting 

systems vary. The ONE Program provides a base structure that your institution can 

modify according to its needs. 

The ONE Program extracts one prime job at a time; however, you can specify various sets 

of prime jobs with a single input command. The program extracts the most recent data for 

each item; that is, it uses the latest reject reentry or correction data wherever applicable. 

A job becomes eligible for on-us extraction once it has been released by the Corrections 

(COR) Program or by programs that manage the system. 

As each item is retrieved from the database, it is handled according to its type: 

• On-us items are written to a magnetic tape file 

• Transit items are accumulated according to the number of days availability assigned 

to them 

User modifications are required to generate collected float records for the accounting 

applications. 

The ONE Program also accumulates on-us, transit, debit, credit, and application totals 

from the IPS database in comma-delimited files for subsequent transfer to a PC. The ONE 

3981 6061–201 3–21


Program accumulates these settlement totals at the same time as it performs its normal 

extraction tasks. The amounts of debit and credit transit items are also collected. 

The ONE Program produces the following settlement extraction files: 

• On-Us Extraction Application Totals Comma-Delimited (OATtff) File 

• On-Us Extraction On-Us Totals Comma-Delimited (OOTtff) File 

• Expected Outsort Extract Comma-Delimited (OEOtff) File 

If the Availability and Pricing Module is used, the ONE Program uses this data to calculate 

availability and pricing for customer deposits. 

PED Program 

PEI Program 

PEP Program 

The ONE Program produces the following reports: 

• Availability and Pricing Exception Listing 

• On-Us Extraction Recap 

The Power Encode Download (PED) Program reads, formats, and downloads the pocket 

string data to the Windows NT server for use by the Windows NT–based Power Encode 

application. There is one instance of this program for each test system. Start this 

program at the master terminal. 

The Power Encode Inquiry (PEI) Program, a stand-alone program, allows the power 

encode supervisor to monitor the status of the unencoded jobs that require power 

encoding. The status of each block and job is updated as the block or job completes the 

following activities: 

• Amount entry 

• Data correction 

• Balancing 


• Power encode 

The Power Encode Port (PEP) Program, an automatically started program, sends and 

receives data from the ICPS Power Encode Handler (PEH) Program. The PEP Program 

downloads the repass strings and sort pattern data to the PEH Program for power 

encoding and receives data from the PEH Program for inclusion in the IPS database. 

3–22 3981 6061–201

PES Program 

PIC Program 


The Power Encode Strings (PES) Program, an interactive program, creates the repass 

strings for proof-of-deposit (POD) unencoded work to be run on the power encoder. It 

also creates repass strings for inclearings and POD encoded work when data correction is 

used. 

The Post Interim Corrections (PIC) Program, an interactive program, processes item data 

corrected at the Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Image Balancing Workstations. 

These corrections, called interim corrections, are stored in the Corrections (CORt) File 

separately from any existing corrections. The PIC Program, directed by entries in the Post 

Correction Queue (PCQt) File, merges the existing and interim corrections together to 

form one group for each block processed. 

PMG Program 

PTT Program 

RAG Program 

The Pocket Matrix Generator (PMG) Program, a stand-alone program, is used to define 

parameters that control pocket selection during cycle sort. Items may be assigned to 

cycle safekeeping or exception pockets. The PMG Program is also used to define 

exception code descriptions and to produce the Pocket Matrix Report. 

The Pack-to-Tape Transfer (PTT) Program, a stand-alone program, copies the Backup 

Tape or Pack (BKptnn) File from disk pack to tape so that the Database Recovery (DBR), 

Database Utility (DBU), and Rebuild A Job (RAJ) programs can access the file at a later 

date, after the disk pack version of the BKptnn File has been removed or overwritten. 

The Repass Alternative Generator (RAG) Program, a stand-alone program, is used to 

create and maintain the Repass Alternative (RAFt) File. The RAG Program generates an 

alternative parent table that contains valid nonstandard sort pattern combinations. 

Through the use of the parameters defined with this program, items selected to a repass 

pocket from one sort pattern can be combined with repass pockets from compatible sort 

patterns. 

The Repass Alternative (RAFt) File contains any number of alternative parents for up to 

999 jobs. An alternative parent is a four-digit number consisting of the sort pattern 

(family) ID and its parent pass number. The RAG Program produces the Alternative SPN 

Listing for . 

3981 6061–201 3–23


RAJ Program 

The Rebuild A Job (RAJ) Program, an interactive program, rebuilds a job using the Backup 

Tape or Pack (BKptnn) File created by the Disk File Handler (DFH) Program. It 

communicates with the DFH Program, which in turn adds the job to the database. 

The RAJ Program produces the Rebuild a Job Parity Error Listing. 

3–24 3981 6061–201

REP Program 

REX Program 


The Miscellaneous Reports (REP) Program is a stand-alone program that can also be 

automatically started by the Database Compaction (DBC) Program. 

The REP Program produces the following reports at the end of a processing cycle: 

• Audit Listing 

• Consolidated Before/After Report 

• Device Statistics Report 

• Job Statistics Report 

• TRR/COR Operator Statistics 

• Unprocessed Work Report 

• IXPS Unprocessed Work Report 

The Real-Time Extraction Service (REX) Program, a stand-alone program, extracts 

selected data from the IPS database using queue requests entered in the Real-Time 

Extraction Queue (REQt) File by the Automated Reconcilement Extraction (ARE), 

Computer Output to Microfiche (COM), Corrections (COR), Manager (IPS), Master and 

Detail Print (MDP), Post Interim Corrections (PIC), Remote Master and Detail Print 

(RMD), and port programs. 

RMD Program 

The Remote Master and Detail Print (RMD) Program, an interactive program, schedules 

reports for printing. The RMD Program remains in the mix until the Remote Print 

Manager (RPM) Program is finished or until a FINISH PRN command is sent to the RPM 

Program. 

The RMD Program does the following: 

• Prints endpoint reports 

• Prints reconcilement reports 

• Prints V Series printer backup files 

The RMD Program produces the following reports: 


• Bundle List 


• Control Total Summary 


3981 6061–201 3–25


RPM Program 

RPR Program 

SCG Program 

SPF Program 




• On-Us Listing 

• Pocket Listing 

• Reject Pocket Listing 

The Remote Print Manager (RPM) Program is automatically started by the Manager (IPS) 

Program when the first remote print task of the day is requested. 

The RPM Program does the following: 

• Assigns queue entries to the appropriate print program 

• Performs all protocol functions for the remote programs 

• Receives and queues remote print-related commands from master terminals 

• Receives and queues remote print tasks from the IPS Program 

Note: The RPM Program remains in the mix until the operator enters the FINISH 

command. 

The Remote Print (RPR) Program, a stand-alone program, sends any printer backup file to 

a printer at a remote site. 

The 80 by 24 Screen Generator (SCG) Program, a stand-alone program, creates and 

changes the 80-character by 24-line screens and 80-character notices used by programs 

that communicate with the operators through terminals. You can use this program to 

convert the language in the standard set of screens and notices to one other than English. 

The SCG Program produces the following reports: 

• Notice Listing 

• Screen Listing 

The Sort Pattern Filter (SPF) Program, a stand-alone program, filters the generated files, 

which are transferred from the PC, into a format required by the IPS host processor 

programs. 

3–26 3981 6061–201

SPL Program 

SPM Program 

SPU Program 

SSE Program 

SSR Program 


The Sort Pattern Lookup (SPL) Program is automatically started by the Sort Pattern 

Manager (SPM) Program. The SPL Program loads and performs sort pattern lookup for 

any program requesting it. The SPL Program also requests and processes the results of 

any external table lookups required by a sort pattern. 

The Sort Pattern Manager (SPM) Program, an interactive program, manages all sort 

pattern lookup requests sent to the Sort Pattern Lookup (SPL) Program. The SPM 

Program keeps track of the following: 

• Number of copies of the SPL and ETL programs in the mix 

• Sort pattern IDs 

• Last time a request was sent to each copy of the SPL or ETL programs 

• External table file IDs 

The Sort Pattern Utility (SPU) Program, a stand-alone program, monitors the date and 

time that the host sort pattern files, including external table files, were last created or 

changed. 

The SPU Program produces the following reports: 

• Filtered Sort Patterns Directory Report 

• Sort Pattern Files Directory Report 

• Unfiltered Sort Patterns Directory Report 

The Sort Spec Editor (SSE) Program, a stand-alone program, creates and maintains the 

Sort Specification Directory (SSDtIF) File for the Bulk Fine Sort Module. The SSDtIF File 

contains parameters for fine sorting items. 

The SSE Program produces the Fine Sort Specification. The SSE Program can print a sort 

specification report. 

The Site Special Reinitialization (SSR) Program, an interactive program, re-creates the 

Cycle Sort Control (CTLtIC) File for a site so you can do the following: 

• Cycle sort the current day's work again for a particular site 

3981 6061–201 3–27


STX Program 

S4G Program 

S4P Program 

S4S Program 

• Cycle sort a previous day's work on the current date for a particular site (before or 

after the current day's work) 

The Statistics Extraction (STX) Program, a stand-alone program, reformats the Statistics 

(STAt) File into two comma-delimited files for subsequent transfer to a PC running the 

Statistics Module.. Statistics for high-speed document processors are placed in the High- 

Speed Statisics (HSSt) File. Statistics for DP 500 document processors using the DP 500 

Item Entry System are placed in the Low-Speed Statistics (LSSt) File. The STX Program 

resets the STAt File to null data after the two comma-delimited files are created to prevent 

the extraction of duplicate data. 

IPS captures statistics at operator log-off, end-of-job, and pickup on a different document 

processor and stores them in the Statistics (STAt) File during daily item processing. The 

STX Program is run ideally at the end of each processing day. Although it is not necessary 

to extract statistics daily, statistics must be extracted and transferred to the Statistics 

Module on the PC before they can be included in a report or graph. 

The 40 by 12 Screen Generator (S4G) Program, a stand-alone program, creates and 

changes the 40-character by 12-line screens and 40-character notices used by programs 

that communicate with the operators through terminals. You can use this program to 

convert the language in the standard set of screens and notices to one other than English. 

The S 4000 Reject Reentry Port (S4P) Program, an automatically started program, does the 

following: 

• Controls the operation of the DP 500 document processor as it corrects and sorts 

items that were rejected during the prime pass on the high-speed document processor 

• Controls the DP 500 document processor during sorting of prime pass items 

• Receives data from the DP 500 Item Entry Handler (D5H) Program 

• Builds the database for prime pass and reject reentry jobs, in conjunction with the 

Disk File Handler (DFH) Program 

The S4P Program differs from other automatically started programs in that certain 

Manager (IPS) Program commands can be used with the S4P Program. 

The S 4000 Reject Reentry Sort (S4S) Program is automatically started by the Manager 

(IPS) Program and requires no operator intervention. The S4S Program runs on the host 

processor and sorts the item entries for a block into sequence number order for the S 4000 

Reject Reentry Port (S4P) Program. 

3–28 3981 6061–201

TDP Program 

TIP Program 

TIR Program 

TMH Program 

TMP Program 


The Tape Detail Port (TDP) Program is a stand-alone program that can also be 

automatically started by the Master and Detail Print (MDP) Program when a Cash Letter 

Recap is completed for an endpoint that requires tape details. The TDP Program creates a 

tape or disk file from the items in a cash letter. The tape can be sent to an endpoint in 

advance or instead of the actual documents. The TDP Program can create CheckLink and 

ACH tape formats as specified in the Endpoint (EPTt) File. (Refer to “Creating or 

Changing an Endpoint” in Section 3 of the IPS Base Parameters Operating Guide.) 

The Tape Input Port (TIP) Program, an interactive program, accepts cash letter item data 

from a magnetic tape and sends the data to the Disk File Handler (DFH) Program for 

addition to the database. The tape formats handled by the TIP Program are as follows: 

• Automated Clearinghouse (ACH) tape format 

• CheckLink tape format 

The Tape Input Reconcilement (TIR) Program, a stand-alone program, compares an input 

detail tape to the job containing the physical items. The TIR Program can read tapes in 

either ACH or CheckLink formats. 

The TIR Program produces the following reports: 

• Tape DIN Cross Reference Report 

• Tape Free and Missing Report 

The Terminal Handler (TMH) Program is automatically started by the Terminal Port 

(TMP) Program. The TMH Program displays reject items on terminals used for reject 

reentry. 

One copy of the TMH Program controls all reject reentry terminals. The TMH Program, 

operating on the host processor, displays formatted screens and receives item data 

entered by the terminal operators. It uses the Sort Pattern Manager (SPM) and Sort 

Pattern Lookup (SPL) programs to perform sort pattern lookup. The TMH Program writes 

data resulting from the sort pattern lookup to a work area on mass storage. 

The Terminal Port (TMP) Program, an interactive program, reads the disk file created 

during terminal reject reentry by the Terminal Handler (TMH) Program and sends this 

data, one block at a time, to the Disk File Handler (DFH) Program for inclusion in the 

database. 

3981 6061–201 3–29


TPP Program 

TRP Program 

The Transfer Processor (TPP) Program, a stand-alone program, moves the single copy of 

either the Power Encode Strings (PES) Program or the Post Interim Corrections (PIC) 

Program to another processor. Only one copy of the PES and PIC programs can run on a 

processor at a time. 

The Terminal Reject Reentry Port (TRP) Program, an interactive program, receives 

operator-corrected data, one block at a time, from the Terminal Reentry Handler (TRH) 

Program running on a Windows NT-based reject reentry workstation. The TRP program 

sends this data to the Disk File Handler (DFH) Program to build the database for reject 

reentry jobs. The TRP Program must be running on the host before the TRH Program can 

run on a Windows NT workstation. One copy of the TRP Program is required for each 

Windows NT reject reentry workstation. 

3–30 3981 6061–201

Files Updated and Accessed by IPS Programs 


The following table lists the files updated and accessed by each IPS program. This table 

does not include temporary work files. 

Note: If you change file mnemonics in the Environment (ENVt) File, the mnemonics 

you defined there supersede the mnemonics listed here. For more information, 

refer to “Changing External File Names of the IPS Production Files” in Section 

5 of the IPS Base Parameters Operating Guide. 

Program Files Accessed and Updated by 

Program 

Files Accessed but 

Not Updated by Program 

ACG ACTt, ACTt01, ADTt, ADTt01, SERt ENVt, NOTt, OPRt, SCRt 

AFB ACQt, AUDt, BPTt, BUNt, CERt, CLHt, CLIt, 

CORt, CTLt, DIRt, DTQt, EPTt, IRBt0s † , 

ITMt, OPRt, PCQt, QUEt, REQt, RSTt, STAt, 

TOTt 

3981 6061–201 3–31 

ENVt 

APB Annt, BNKt, CLOt, Cnnt AnntPM, Annt01, BNKtPM, BNKt01, 

CnntPM, Cnnt01, CTFt, ENVt, HOLtPM 

APG AnntPM, Annt01, BNKtPM, BNKt01, 

BPHtCD, BPMtCD, BPRtCD, CnntPM, 

Cnnt01, CTFt, HOLtCD, HOLtPM 

ENVt, NOTtP, OPRt, SCRtP 

ARE ACQt, BPTt, Rbbbbt, REQt, TOTt CORt, DIRt, ENVt, ITMt 

ARG ARTtIC ENVt, NOTtIC, OPRt, SCRtIC 

BTG BKstIF, BRstIF, BTstIF, CTLtIF ENVt, STMtEF 

BWP BWPt DIRt, ENVt, TOTt 

CFB AUDtIC, CTLtIC, EXCtIC, NEXtIC, RSTtIC ENVt 

CFE CTLt, DIRt, MORCnn BPTt, BUNt, CLHt, CLIt, CORt, ENVt, EPTt, 

ITMt, TOTt 

CHC CERt, CLHt, CLIt ENVt 

CLE CLHt, Ttffff CERt, CLIt, ENVt 

CLS None CLHt, CLIt, ENVt, EPTt 

CMR None ENVt, OPRt 

CNV BNKtPM, BNKt01, CLHt, CLIt, CnntPM, 

Cnnt01, ENVt, EPTt, GRPt, OPRt 

COM BUNt, CERt, CLHt, CLIt, DIRt, ITMt, QUEt, 

REQt 

COR BPTt, CORt, CRStcc, CTLt, DIRt, DTQt, 

ITMt, OPRt, Rbbbbt, REQt, TOTt 

None 

CSH None None 

BNKt, BPTt, CLOt, CORt, ENVt, EPTt, 

GRPt, TOTt 

ENVt, NOTt, SCRt, SPtfff**



Program 



CSP AUDtIC, CTLtIC, EXCtIC, NEXtIC, RSTtIC ATstIC, AUDt, BLKtIC, ENVt, ETstIC, N4Tt, 

N4TtIC, OPRt, PMXtIC, S4Rt, S4RtIC 

CSR CTLtIC ARTtIC, ENVt, EXCtIC, EXDtIC, ONStEC, 

PMXtIC 

CTG ATstIC, BLKtIC, ETstIC ARTtIC, ENVt, ONStEC, PMXtIC, SERt 

DBC BPTt, BUNt, CORt, CTLt, CTPt, DIRt, ITMt, 

TOTt 

DBR ADVt † , BPTt, BUNt, CERt, CGSt † , CLHt, 

CORt, CTLt, CTLtIC, CTLtIF, DIRt, EXCtIC, 

FREt † , INAt † , ITMt, NEXtIC, STMtIF, TOTt 

ACQt, DTQt, ENVt, PCQt, QUEt, REQt 

BKptnn, ENVt 

DBU None ACQt, ADTt, ADTt01, Annt, BICt, BKptnn, 

BNKt, BPTt, BUNt, CERt, CLHt, CLIt, Cnnt, 

CORt, CTLt, DIRt, DTQt, ENVt, ITMt, PCQt, 

QUEt, Rbbbbt, TOTt 

DFH BKptnn, BPTt, CORt, CTLt, DIRt, ITMt, 

STAt, TOTt 

3–32 3981 6061–201 

ENVt 

DTP DTQt BPTt, CORt, DIRt, ENVt, ITMt, TOTt 

EFG ETstIF CTLtIC, ENVt, EXCtIC 

ENV ENVt, ENVtCD, OPRt ,OPRtCD NOTt, SCRt 

EPG EPTt, EPTtCD, GRPt, GRPtCD ENVt, NOTt, OPRt, SCRt 

ETL None 

FFB AUDtIF, CTLtIF, RSTtIF, STMtIF ENVt 

FSH None None 

FSP AUDtIF, CTLtIF, RSTtIF, STMtIF AUDt, BRstIF, BTstIF, ENVt, ETstIF, N4Tt, 

N4TtIF, OPRt, SSDtIF, S4Rt, S4RtIF 

FSR CTLtIF, STMtIF BKstIF, ENVt, 

FSS None None 

HSD None None 

HSH None None 

HSP AUDt, BPTt*, CORt, CTLt, DIRt, ITMt*, 

REQt, RSTt, TOTt* 

HUL Btnnnn, CTBtIF, RSBtIF DFPtEF 

IEG BICt ENVt, STMtEF 

BICt, CARt, CDVt, EDSt, ENVt, EPTt, EXPt, 

JOBt, N4Tt, OPRt, RAFt, SPtfff, S4Rt, 

TCVt,


Program 




IGC RCxtff ACTt, ACTt01, BPTt, CORt, DIRt, ENVt, 

ITMt, SERt, TOTt 

IMC MFxtxx CMxtxx, SCxtff 

IOC None MFxtxx 

IPS AUDt, AUDtIC, AUDtIF, BPTt, CLHt, CTLt, 

DIRt, ENVt, EPTt, QUEt, REQt, TOTt 

CLOt, CORt, CTLtIC, CTLtIF, GRPt, N4Tt, 

OPRt, S4Rt 

IRC IRRt DIRt, ENVt, EXPt, TOTt 

IRH None None 

IRP BPTt, IRBt0s † , TOTt CTLt, DIRt, ENVt, ITMt, N4Tt, S4Rt 

ISC SCxtff RCxtff 

LOE CTLtIC, LOCtIC ENVt, NEXtIC 

MDP BUNt, CERt †† , CLHt, CLIt, DIRt, ITMt, 

QUEt, REQt 

NPP AUDt, BPTt*, CTLt, DIRt, ISTt, ITMt*, 

NTDtdd, REQt, TOTt* 

MPG None None 

ONE CTLt, DIRt, OATtff, ONEtp1, OOTtff 

OEOtff 

BNKt †† , BPTt, CLOt †† , CORt, ENVt, EPTt, 

GRPt, TOTt 

CDVt, CORt, EDSt, ENVt, EPTt, JOBt, 

OPRt, RAFt, SPtfff, 

Annt †† , BPTt, CLOt †† , Cnnt †† , CORt, 

ENVt, ITMt, SERt, TOTt 

PED AUDt, CTLt, DIRt, NTDt01, QUEt, TOTt* BPTt*, CORt, ENVt, ITMt, RAFt 

PEI None ENVt, NOTt, OPRt, SCRt 

PEP AUDt, BPTt*, CTLt, DIRt, E4Dtdd, ISTt, 

ITMt*, REQt, TOTt* 

PES CTLt, DIRt, ITMt, QUEt, TOTt BPTt, CORt, ENVt 

PIC BPTt*, CORt*, CTLt*, DIRt*, ITMt*, PCQt, 

PCRt, REQt, TOTt* 

CD4t, CORt, EDSt, ENVt, EPTt, JOBt, 

RAFt, SPtfff, 

3981 6061–201 3–33 

ENVt 

PMG EXDtIC, PMXtIC ENVt, NOTtIC, OPRt, SCRtIC 

PTT BKptnn (tape) BKptnn (pack), CTLt, ENVt 

RAG RAFt ENVt, NOTt, OPRt, SCRt 

RAJ BPTt, BUNt, CORt, CTLt, DIRt, ITMt, TOTt BKptnn, ENVt 

REP None AUDt, AUDtIC, AUDtIF, BPTt, CORt, DIRt, 

ENVt, ITMt, OPRt, STAt, S4Rt, TOTt 

REX REQt BPTt, BUNt, CERt, CLHt, CLIt, CORt, DIRt, 

ENVt, GRPt, ITMt, TOTt



Program 

RMD BUNt, CERt, CLHt, CLIt, DIRt, ITMt, QUEt, 

REQt 



BNKt, BPTt, CLOt, CORt, ENVt, EPTt, 

GRPt, TOTt 

RPM RPQt0s ENVt, N4Tt, N4TtRM, S4Rt, S4RtRM 

RPR None None 

SCG NOTt, NOTtIC, NOTtP, SCRt, SCRtIC, 

SCRtP 

ENVt, OPRt 

SPF CARt, CDVt, CD4t, EXPt, SPtfff CAGt, CDGt, ENVt, EPTt, EXGt, SGtfff 

SPL None CDVt, ENVt, SPtfff 

SPM None ENVt 

SPU None CAGt, CARt, CDGt, CDVt, CD4t, EDSt, 

ENVt, EXGt, EXPt, INSt, JOBt, SGtfff, 

SPtfff, TCVt, 

SSE SSDtIF ENVt, FRMtIF, OPRt 

SSR CTLtIC ENVt 

STE CLHt, CTLt, DIRt, Ttffff ††† , XAOtff, XCHtff, 

XCTtff, XHPtff, XPTtff, XRHtff 

STX HSSt, LSSt, STAt DIRt, ENVt 

S4G N4Tt, N4TtIC, N4TtIF, N4TtRM, S4Rt, 

S4RtIC, S4RtIF, S4RtRM 

S4P AUDt, BPTt*, CORt, CTLt, DIRt, ITMt*, 

P4Ctdd, P4Dtdd, P4Rtdd, REQt, RSTt, 

TOTt* 

BPTt, CLIt, ENVt, TOTt 

ENVt, NOTt, OPRt, SCRt 

S4S None ENVt, P4Ctdd 

CD4t, EDSt, ENVt, EPTt, JOBt, RAFt, 

SPtfff, 

TDP TDTt BPTt, BUNt, CLHt, CLIt, CORt, DIRt, ENVt, 

EPTt, ITMt, TOTt 

TIP AUDt, CTLt, DIRt, REQt, RSTt, TOTt BPTt, ENVt, EPTt, ITMt, JOBt, SPtfff, 

TDTt, 

TIR None BPTt, CORt, DIRt, ENVt, ITMt, TDTt, TOTt 

TMH BPTt, CTLt, DIRt, OPRt, TRRt ENVt, ITMt, JOBt, NOTt, SCRt, SPtfff, 

TOTt 

TMP AUDt, BPTt*, CTLt*, DIRt*, ITMt*, REQt, 

STAt*, TOTt 

ENVt, JOBt, SPtfff, TRRt 

3–34 3981 6061–201


Program 

TPP CTLt ENVt 

TRP AUDt, BPTt*, CTLt, DIRt, ISTt, NTDtdd, 

ITMt*, REQt, TOTt* 




CDVt, CORt, EDSt, ENVt, EPTt, JOBt, 

OPRt, RAFt, SPtfff, 

* Program updates file indirectly through the Disk File Handler (DFH) Program. 

** Program accesses file indirectly through the Sort Pattern Manager (SPM) Program. 

† File is from the Image Check Processing System (ICPS). 

†† File is only accessed if the Availability and Pricing Module is used. 

††† File is only accessed by STE if the Cash Letter Control Module is not used. 

3981 6061–201 3–35


Temporary Work and External Files by IPS Program 

The following table lists the temporary work and external files for each program: 

Program Temporary Work File External File 

ACG None None 

AFB None None 

APB RELATIVE-APM-FILE 

RELATIVE-BPM-FILE 

RELATIVE-CPM-FILE 

APG USE-CPM-FILE 

RELATIVE-APM 

RELATIVE-BPM 

RELATIVE-CPM 

RELATIVE-USE-CPM 

SORT-FILE 

ARE BATCH-WORK-FILE 

RESTART- FILE 

SBAT-WORK-FILE 

WORK-DEP-FILE 

WORK-EXC-FILE 

WORK-HIST-FILE 

AnntTP 

BNKtTP 

CnntTP 

CnntTP 

AnntTP 

BNKtTP 

CnntTP 

CnntTP 

APGtSR 

ARWtp1 

ARRtp1 

ARStp1 

ARDtp1 

ARXtp1 

ARHtp1 

BWP None None 

CFB None None 

CFE JOBS-FILE 

REPASS-FILE 

RESTART-FILE 

PRINT-SORT-FILE 

PRT-WORK-FILE 

SORT-FILE 

SORTED-PRT-WORK-F ILE 

SORTED-REPASS-FILE 

CFJtp1 

CFPtp1 

CFRtp1 

CFItp1 

CFWtp1 

CFFtp1 

CFNtp1 

CFStp1 

3–36 3981 6061–201



CHC CHZ-FILE 

CLH-FILE-SEQ 

CLH-WORKFILE 

CLH-WORKFILE-SEQ 

CLI-WORKFILE 

3981 6061–201 3–37 

CHZt 

CLHt 

CLHtWF 

CLHtWF 

CLItWF 

CLE None. None. 

CLS SUMMARY-FILE 

SORT-INPUT-FILE 

SORT-OUTPUT-FILE 

CLStSM 

CLStSI 

CLStSO 

CMR None None 

CNV RELATIVE-BPM-FILE 

RELATIVE-CPM-FILE 

COM RESTART-FILE 

SORT- FILE 

SORT-ITM-FILE 

SORT-XREF-FILE 

TASK-FILE 

WORK-FILE 

WORK-ITM-FILE 

WORK-SORTED-ITM-FILE 

WORK-XREF-FILE 

COR ITEM-MAINTENANCE-WORK-FILE 

PROB-MATCH-WORK-FILE 

RECALL-FILE 

SESSION-FILE 

SORT-FILE 

SORT-PAR-REP- FILE 

WORK-FILE 

WORK-PAR-REP-FILE 

WORK-SORTED-PARENT-FILE 

WORK-SORTED-REPASS-FILE 

BNKtTP 

CnntTP 

OMRtpc 

OMStpc 

OIStpc 

OXStpc 

OMKtpc 

OMWt pc 

OIWtpc 

OSItpc 

OMXtpc 

IMWtcc 

PMtpcc 

RCLt 

SESt 

BTStcc 

SFtpcc 

BTWtcc 

WPtpcc 

PStpcc 

RStpcc 

CSH None None



CSP None None 

CSR ACCOUNT-PULL-WORK-FILE 

MISSING-MATCHED-WORK-FILE 

SORT-ACCOUNT-PULL-WORK-FILE 

SORT-EXCEPTIONS-WORK-FILE 

SORT-ONS-WORK-FILE 

ONS-WORK-FILE 

CTG SORT-FILE 

WRK-PD-EXC-FILE 

WRK-REP-FILE 

WRK-RR-FILE 

PULtIC 

A01tCR 

SmmRpt 

SmmRpt 

B01tCR 

B01tCR 

D01tCT 

C01tCT 

B01tCT 

A01tCT 

DBC BPT-INITS-FILE BPTt 

DBR PARITY-FILE 

DBR-CONTROL-FILE 

DBRtPA 

DBRtCN 

DBU BLOCKED-BPT-FILE BPTt 

DFH DEBUG-FILE DFDtp1 

DTP None None 

EFG EFT-BLOCKED-FILE 

SWK-FILE 

3–38 3981 6061–201 

EFTt 

SWKt01 

ENV None None 

EPG SORT-INPUT-FILE 


SORT-FILE 

EPGtSI 

EPGtSO 

EPGtSR 

ETL None None 

FFB None None 

FSH None None 

FSP FINE-SORT-DUMP FDMtdd 

FSR CRIPPLE-WORK-FILE 

INDEX-WORK-FILE 

RESTART-WORK-FILE 

SORT-WORK-FILE 

COctFS 

IOctFS 

ROctFS 

SOctFS



FSS ITEM-WORK-FILE 

ITEM-SORT-FILE 

FWptmm 

FSptmm 

HSD None None 

HSH None None 

HSP None None 

HUL None None 

IEG None None 

IGC None None 

IMC None None 

IOC None None 

IPS AWK-FILE 

CARD-FILE 

DISK-FILE 

DEBUG-FILE 

EQU-FILE 

IPR-FILE 

IRS 

LOST-PORT-IPC-FILE 

3981 6061–201 3–39 

AWKt 

CRDt 

DSKt 

IPDtp1 

IPTt 

IPRtp1 

IRSt 

LPItp 

IRC None None 

IRH None None 

IRP None None 

ISC SORT-FILE ISStcc 

LOE LOE-WORK-FILE 

LOE-RESTART- FILE 

SORT-LOE-WORK-FILE 

WRKtIC 

LORtIC 

SmxRpt



MDP RESTART-FILE 

SORT-FILE 

SORT-ITM-FILE 

SORT-XREF-FILE 

TASK-FILE 

WORK-FILE 

WORK-ITM-FILE 

WORK-SORTED-ITM-FILE (parent) 

WORK-SORTED-ITM-FILE (repass) 


MDRtps 

MDStps 

MIStps 

MXStps 

MDPtps 

MDWtps 

MIWtps 

MSPtps 

MSRtps 

MDXtps 

MPG XFER-FILE User-defined 

NPP None None 

ONE RESTART-FILE ONRtR1 

PED None None 

PEI None None 

PEP None None 

PES None None 

PIC None None 

PMG None None 

PTT None None 

RAG None None 

RAJ SORT-FILE 

WRKBHR-FILE 

WRKBPT-FILE 

WRKBUN-FILE 

WRKCOR-FILE 

WRKPTR-FILE 

WRKRST-FILE 

WRKRUC-FILE 

REP REF-FILE 

WRK-FILE 

SORTED-WORK-FILE 

RASt01 

RAHtp1 

RATtp1 

RABtp1 

RACtp1 

RAPtp1 

RARtR1 

RAUtp1 

REFt11 

REWt11 

RWFtp1 

REX None None 

3–40 3981 6061–201



RMD RESTART-FILE 

SORT-FILE 

SORT-ITM-FILE 

SORT-XREF-FI LE 

TASK-FILE 

WORK-FILE 

WORK-ITM-FILE 

WORK-SORTED- ITM-FILE 


RMRtps 

RMStps 

RIStps 

RXStps 

RMPtps 

RMWtps 

RIWtps 

RSItps 

RMXtps 

RPM None None 

RPR RESTART-FILE RRSt01 

SCG SORT-INPUT-FILE 


SORT-FILE 

USE-FILE 

SCGtSI 

SCGtSO 

SCGtSR 

SPF None None 

SPL None None 

SPM None None 

SPU None None 

SSE None None 

SSR None None 

STE SRS-FILE SRStRS 

STX None None 

S4G SORT-INPUT-FILE 


SORT-FILE 

USE-FILE 

S4P P4C-FILE 

P4D-FILE 

S4S P4S-FILE 

P4C-FILE 

Screen file name 

S4GtSI 

S4GtSO 

S4GtSR 

Screen file name 

P4Ctdd 

P4Dtdd 

P4Stdd 

P4Ctdd 

3981 6061–201 3–41



TDP PKT-WORK-FILE TDtpmm 

TIP None None 

TIR FREE-SORT-FILE 

FREE-WORK-FILE 

ITEM-SORT-FILE 

ITEM-WORK-FILE 

MISS-SORT-FILE 

MISS-WORK-FILE 

TA PE-SORT-FILE 

TAPE-WORK-FILE 

XREF-SORT-FILE 

XREF-WORK-FILE 

TMH RECALL-FILE 

TRR-FILE 

WORK-FILE 

TRRtp1 

TRFtp1 

TREtp1 

TRPtp1 

TRItp1 

TRMtp1 

TRAtp1 

TRTtp1 

TRFtp1 

TRXtp1 

THRt01 

THTt01 

THTtp1 

TMP TRR-FILE THTt01 

TPP None None 

TRP P4R-FILE P4Rtdd 

3–42 3981 6061–201

IPC Codes 


Universal interprogram communication (IPC) codes are used in communications to and 

from the Manager (IPS) Program. The following table lists names and codes for the 

universal IPCs in the system: 

IPC 

Code 

IPC 

Subcode IPC Name 

9001 01 Process task 

02 Get task 

03 Report task 

9002 01 Report restart required 

02 Begin restart 

9003 01 Idle 

9004 01 Queue task 

9005 01 Log text 

02 Display notice 

9006 01 Open device 

9007 01 Close device 

9008 01 Request finish 

02 Report finish 

03 IPM Program will finish 

04 IPM Program will not finish 

9009 01 Abort 

9010 01 Request status 

02 Report status 

9011 01 Change device 

9012 01 Pickup 

9013 01 Logged down 

9014 02, 04 Queue remote master task 

03, 05 Queue remote detail task 

3981 6061–201 3–43


IPC 

Code 

IPC 

Subcode IPC Name 

9015 01 IPS inquiry for executing AFB or DBC 

02 IPS executed AFB. AFB or DBC lockout is on. 

03 DBC executed AFB. IPS executed AFB or DBC and lockout is on. 

04 IPS did not execute AFB and DBC. AFB or DBC lockout is off. 

05 AFB and DBC are complete. AFB or DBC lockout can be turned off. 

06 DFH can begin AFB or DBC lockout. 

07 DFH can end AFB or DBC lockout. 

9025 01 Start a program 

02 Restart a program 

03 Finish a program 

04 Finish kill a program 

05 Discontinue a program 

06 Abort a program 

10 Delete job; restore job 

20 Block ready 

40 Common file services – delete a file 

41 Common file services – rename a file 

50 Structured file services – delete records from a file 

60 Unit management services – SRM online or offline 

3–44 3981 6061–201

IPS COBOL74 Libraries by Program 


The following table presents the COBOL74 libraries used by the IPS programs that are 

released as COBOL source code: 

Program COBOL74 Libraries 

ACG L018 L022 L028 L029 L092 L104 L105 L181 L182 

AFB L001 L002 L003 L004 L005 L006 L008 L009 L010 L014 

L016 L018 L020 L022 L037 L049 L050 L104 L105 L112 

L113 L126 L127 L153 L169 L204 L206 

APB L018 L055 L056 L058 L060 L061 L062 L066 L067 L068 

L104 L105 

APG L018 L022 L028 L029 L055 L056 L058 L060 L068 L104 

L105 L255 L256 L257 L261 

ARE L001 L005 L010 L015 L016 L018 L019 L020 L023 L024 

L025 L104 L105 L119 L127 L128 L132 L153 L154 L155 

L169 L204 L206 L212 

ARG L018 L022 L028 L029 L080 L104 L105 

BTG L018 L095 L096 L097 L098 L102 L104 L105 

BWP L005 L016 L018 L019 L104 L105 L133 L134 

CFB L014 L018 L083 L085 L088 L091 L104 L105 

CFE L001 L003 L004 L005 L006 L008 L009 L010 L015 L016 

L018 L019 L020 L023 L024 L035 L036 L063 L104 L105 

L120 L122 L169 L207 L208 

CHC L003 L004 L018 L063 L104 L105 L113 L120 L169 

CLE L003 L004 L018 L063 L113 L117 L122 L254 

CLS L003 L004 L006 L018 L063 L104 L105 L120 L122 L169 

L207 L208 

CMR L018 L022 L104 L105 

CNV L104 L105 L202 L203 L245 

COR L001 L005 L008 L010 L015 L016 L017 L018 L019 L020 

L022 L023 L024 L025 L029 L034 L104 L105 L106 L111 

L112 L128 L132 L152 L153 L154 L160 L161 L162 L163 

L164 L167 L183 L217 WS-ICM-ARE-FILE WS-ICM-SCR-FILE WS-ICM-SCR- 

MGNT 

3981 6061–201 3–45



CSP DCHBFC DCHBFS DCHBIO DCHBPD DCHBWS 

L014 L018 L022 L030 L031 L081 L082 L083 L084 L085 

L088 L090 L091 L093 L094 L104 L105 

CSR L018 L080 L083 L085 L086 L089 L090 L093 L104 L105 

CTG L018 L080 L081 L082 L084 L089 L090 L092 L104 L105 

DBC L001 L002 L005 L008 L009 L010 L012 L015 L016 L017 

L018 L019 L020 L034 L104 L105 L112 L126 L127 L128 

L153 L169 L204 L206 

DBR C01MPn* L001 L003 L005 L007 L008 L009 L010 L016 L018 

L020 L083 L085 L088 L098 L101 L104 L105 L108 L109 

L113 L169 L207 L208 L600Pn* 

DBU L001 L002 L003 L004 L005 L007 L008 L009 L010 L016 

L018 L019 L020 L061 L062 L063 L066 L104 L105 L108 

L109 L112 L113 L119 L120 L122 L126 L127 L132 L169 

L182 L207 L208 L209 

DFH L001 L005 L007 L008 L010 L016 L018 L019 L020 L049 

L104 L105 L109 

DTP L001 L005 L010 L015 L016 L017 L018 L019 L020 L023 

L024 L034 L104 L105 L112 L125 L152 L154 L165 L167 

EFG L018 L083 L085 L093 L099 L104 L105 

ENV L018 L022 L028 L029 L104 L105 L262 L272 

EPG L006 L013 L018 L022 L028 L029 L104 L105 L260 L273 

ETL L104 L105 L164 L251 L252 

FFB L014 L018 L098 L100 L101 L104 L105 

FSP BFSLFC BFSLFS BFSLPD BFSLWS DCHBFC 

DCHBFS DCHBIO DCHBPD DCHBWS L014 

L018 L022 L030 L031 L095 L097 L098 L099 L100 L101 

L103 L104 L105 

FSR L018 L096 L098 L101 L103 L104 L105 

FSS L104 L105 

HSD None 

HSP DCHBFC DCHBFS DCHBIO DCHBPD DCHBWS L001 L005 

L006 L008 L010 L011 L014 L015 L016 L017 L018 L020 

L021 L022 L026 L027 L030 L031 L037 L040 L043 L104 

L105 L107 L110 L131 L153 L154 L155 L167 L168 L169 

L175 L176 L187 L209 L213 L250 L251 

HUL BFSLFC BFSLFS BFSLPD BFSLWS 

IEG L018 L102 L104 L105 L169 L209 

IGC L104 L105 L141 L210 L211 L215 L219 L220 

3–46 3981 6061–201


IMC L104 L105 L215 L220 

IOC L104 L105 L215 L219 L220 

IPS L001 L002 L003 L005 L006 L008 L013 L014 L016 L018 

L019 L020 L022 L030 L031 L034 L067 L083 L098 L104 

L105 L151 L153 L154 L155 L169 

IRC L005 L016 L018 L104 L105 L215 L218 L220 L221 L222 

L243 

IRH None 

IRP DCHBFC DCHBFS DCHBIO DCHBPD DCHBWS 

L001 L005 L008 L010 L016 L017 L018 L030 L031 L104 

L105 L136 

ISC L104 L105 L215 L220 

LOE L018 L083 L087 L088 L094 L104 L105 


MDP L001 L002 L003 L004 L005 L006 L009 L010 L013 L015 

L016 L017 L018 L019 L020 L023 L024 L061** L063 L064** 

L067** L069** L070** L073** L074** L104 L105 L113** L120 L122 

L123 L124 L125 L130 L153 L154 L155 L165 L166 L167 

L169 L207 L208 L259 

MPG L104 L105 L169 

NPP L001 L002 L005 L006 L008 L010 L011 L013Pn* L014 L015 

L016 L017 L018 L019 L020 L021 L022 L027 L031 

L040 L104 L105 L107 L153 L154 L155 L167 L250 

ONE L001 L005 L008 L010 L015 L016 L018 L019 L020 L023 

L024 L033 L062** L065** L066 L067 L071 L072** L075** L076** 

L077** L078** L079** L092 L104 L105 L265 L266 L267 L269 

L270 L271 

PED L001 L002 L005 L008 L010 L014 L015 L016 L017 L018 

L019 L020 L104 L105 L107 L167 

PEI L018 L028 L029 L104 L105 L144 

PEP L001 L005 L006 L008 L010 L011 L013Pn* L014 L015 L016 

L017 L018 L019 L020 L021 L027 L041 L104 L105 L107 

L153 L154 L155 L167 L250 L251 

PES L001 L002 L005 L008 L010 L015 L016 L017 L018 L019 

L020 L023 L024 L104 L105 L128 

PIC L001 L005 L008 L010 L015 L016 L018 L019 L020 L023 

L104 L105 L121 L126 L128 L149 L153 L154 L155 L159 L167 

PMG L018 L022 L028 L029 L086 L090 L104 L105 

PTT L008 L018 L104 L105 L108 L109 

RAG L018 L022 L028 L029 L104 L105 L107 

3981 6061–201 3–47



RAJ L001 L005 L007 L008 L009 L010 L015 L016 L017 L018 

L019 L020 L023 L034 L104 L105 L108 L109 L128 L167 

L174 

REP L001 L005 L010 L014 L015 L016 L018 L019 L020 L022 

L030 L049 L104 L105 L169 L204 L206 

REX L001 L003 L004 L005 L009 L010 L013 L015 L016 L018 

L019 L020 L063 L104 L105 L113 L120 L122 L128 L153 

RPM L018 L030 L031 L054 L104 L105 

RPR L104 L105 L169 L206 L259 

SCG L018 L022 L028 L029 L104 L105 

SPF L006 L011 L018 L040 L041 L042 L043 L044 L104 L105 

L168 L169 L187 L205 L213 L214 

SPL L011 L015 L018 L040 L104 L105 L111 L164 L252 

SPM L018 L104 L105 L164 L252 

SPU L011 L018 L021 L027 L040 L041 L042 L044 L104 L105 

L131 L135 L169 L187 L205 L213 L214 L251 

SSE L018 L022 

SSR L018 L083 L104 L105 

STE L001 L003 L004 L005 L008 L016 L018 L019 L034 L063 

L104 L105 L117 L120 L122 L254 L263 L264 L265 L266 

L267 L269 

STX L005 L018 L049 L104 L105 L169 

S4G L018 L022 L028 L029 L030 L031 L104 L105 

S4P L001 L005 L006 L008 L010 L011 L014 L015 L016 L017 

L018 L019 L020 L021 L027 L034 L037 L041 L104 L105 

L107 L153 L154 L155 L168 L169 L250 

S4S L015 L018 L104 L105 

TDP L001 L003 L004 L005 L006 L009 L010 L016 L017 L018 

L020 L053 L063 L104 L105 L120 L122 L169 L207 L208 L244 

TIP L001 L005 L006 L008 L010 L011 L015 L016 L017 L018 

L021 L037 L053 L104 L105 L111 L153 L154 L155 L164 

L168 L169 L244 

TIR L001 L005 L010 L015 L016 L018 L019 L020 L023 L024 

L025 L053 L104 L105 L128 L244 

TMH L001 L005 L008 L010 L011 L015 L016 L018 L021 L022 

L028 L029 L104 L105 L111 L128 L164 L168 L169 

3–48 3981 6061–201



TMP L001 L005 L008 L010 L011 L015 L016 L018 L019 L021 

L043 L049 L104 L105 L110 L128 L153 L154 L155 L168 L169 

TPP L008 L018 L104 L105 

TRP L001 L005 L006 L008 L010 L011 L014 L015 L016 L017 

L018 L019 L020 L021 L022 L027 L031 L034 L037 L040 

L104 L105 L107 L153 L154 L155 L168 L169 L250 L275 

* Image Check Processing System (ICPS) COBOL libraries 

** Library only used if the Availability and Pricing Module is used. 

3981 6061–201 3–49


IPS Programs by COBOL74 Libraries 

The following table presents COBOL74 libraries and the IPS programs that use them. For 

libraries used in IPS independently compiled modules (ICMs), refer to “Libraries and 

Working Storage Data Items Used by IPS ICMs” in Section 3 of the IPS Technical 

Overview. 

COBOL74 

Library 

BFSLFC FSP 

BFSLFS FSP 

BFSLPD FSP 

BFSLWS FSP 

C01MPn* DBR 

Table 3–1. IPS Programs by COBOL74 Libraries 

DCHDFC CSP FSP HSP IRP HUL 

DCHDFS CSP FSP HSP IRP HUL 

DCHDIO CSP FSP HSP IRP HUL 

DCHDPD CSP FSP HSP IRP HUL 

DCHDWS CSP FSP HSP IRP HUL 

Programs 

L001 AFB ARE CFE COR DBC DBR DBU DFH DTP HSP IPS 

IRP MDP NPP ONE PED PEP PES PIC RAJ REP REX 

S4P STE TDP TIP TIR TMH TMP TRP 

L002 AFB DBC DBU IPS MDP NPP PED PES 

L003 AFB CFE CHC CLE CLS DBR DBU IPS MDP REX 

STE TDP 

L004 AFB CFE CHC CLE CLS DBU MDP REX STE TDP 

L005 AFB ARE BWP CFE COR DBC DBR DBU DFH DTP 

HSP IPS IRC IRP MDP NPP ONE PED PEP PES 

PIC RAJ REP REX S4P STE STX TDP TIP TIR 

TMH TMP TRP 

L006 AFB CFE CLS EPG HSP IPS MDP NPP PEP S4P 

SPF TDP TIP TRP 

L007 DBR DBU DFH RAJ 

L008 AFB CFE COR DBC DBR DBU DFH HSP IPS IRP 

NPP PED PEP PES PIC PTT RAJ S4P STE TIP 

TMH TMP TPP TRP 

3–50 3981 6061–201

COBOL74 Library Programs 

L009 AFB CFE DBC DBR DBU MDP RAJ REX TDP 

L010 AFB ARE CFE COR DBC DBR DBU DFH DTP HSP 

IRP MDP NPP ONE PED PEP PES PIC RAJ REP 

REX S4P TDP TIP TIR TMH TMP TRP 


L011 HSP NPP PEP S4P SPF SPL SPU TIP TMH TMP TRP 

L012 DBC 

L013 EPG IPS MDP REX 

L013Pn* PEP NPP 

L014 AFB CFB CSP FFB FSP HSP IPS NPP PED PEP REP 

S4P TRP 

L015 ARE CFE COR DBC DTP HSP MDP NPP ONE PED PEP 

PES PIC RAJ REP REX S4P S4S SPL TIP TIR TMH 

TMP TRP 

L016 AFB ARE BWP CFE COR DBC DBR DBU DFH DTP HSP 

IPS IRC IRP MDP NPP ONE PED PEP PES PIC RAJ 

REP REX S4P STE TDP TIP TIR TMH TMP TRP 

L017 COR DBC DTP HSP IRP MDP NPP PED PEP PES RAJ 

S4P TDP TIP TRP 

L018 ACG AFB APB APG ARE ARG BTG BWP CFB CFE 

CHC CLE CLS CMR COR CSP CSR CTG DBC DBR 

DBU DFH DTP EFG ENV EPG FFB FSP FSR HSP IEG 

IPS IRC IRP LOE MDP NPP ONE PED PEI PEP PES 

PIC PMG PTT RAG RAJ REP REX RPM S4G S4P S4S 

SCG SPF SPL SPM SPU SSE SSR STE STX TDP TIP 

TIR TMH TMP TPP TRP 

L019 ARE BWP CFE COR DBC DBU DFH DTP IPS MDP NPP 

ONE PED PEP PES PIC RAJ REP REX S4P STE TIR 

TMP TRP 

L020 AFB ARE CFE COR DBC DBR DBU DFH DTP HSP IPS 

MDP NPP ONE PED PEP PES PIC RAJ REP REX 

S4P TDP TIR TRP 

L021 HSP NPP PEP S4P SPU TIP TMH TMP TRP 

L022 ACG AFB APG ARG CMR COR CSP ENV EPG FSP HSP 

IPS NPP PMG RAG REP S4G SCG SSE TMH TRP 

L023 ARE CFE COR DTP MDP ONE PES PIC RAJ TIR 

L024 ARE CFE COR DTP MDP ONE PES TIR 

L025 ARE COR TIR 

L026 HSP 

L027 HSP NPP PEP S4P SPU TRP 

3981 6061–201 3–51



L028 ACG APG ARG ENV EPG PEI PMG RAG S4G SCG TMH 

L029 ACG APG ARG COR ENV EPG PEI PMG RAG S4G SCG 

TMH 

L030 CSP FSP HSP IPS IRP REP RPM S4G 

L031 CSP FSP HSP IPS IRP NPP RPM S4G TRP 

L033 ONE 

L034 COR DBC DTP IPS RAJ S4P TRP 

L035 CFE 

L036 CFE 

L037 AFB HSP S4P TIP TRP 

L040 HSP NPP SPF SPL SPU TRP 

L041 PEP S4P SPF SPU 

L042 SPF SPU 

L043 HSP SPF TMP 

L044 SPF SPU 

L049 AFB DFH REP STX TMP 

L050 AFB 

L053 TDP TIP TIR 

L054 RPM 

L055 APB APG 

L056 APB APG 

L058 APB APG 

L060 APB APG 

L061 APB DBU MDP 

L062 APB DBU ONE 

L063 CFE CHC CLE CLS DBU MDP REX STE TDP 

L064 MDP 

L065 ONE 

L066 APB DBU ONE 

L067 APB IPS MDP ONE 

L068 APB APG 

L069 MDP 

3–52 3981 6061–201


L070 MDP 

L071 ONE 

L072 ONE 

L073 MDP 

L074 MDP 

L075 ONE 

L076 ONE 

L077 ONE 

L078 ONE 

L079 ONE 

L080 ARG CSR CTG 

L081 CSP CTG 

L082 CSP CTG 

L083 CFB CSP CSR DBR EFG IPS LOE SSR 

L084 CSP CTG 

L085 CFB CSP CSR DBR EFG 

L086 CSR PMG 

L087 LOE 

L088 CFB CSP DBR LOE 

L089 CSR CTG 

L090 CSP CSR CTG PMG 

L091 CFB CSP 

L092 ACG CTG ONE 

L093 CSP CSR EFG 

L094 CSP LOE 

L095 BTG FSP 

L096 BTG FSR 

L097 BTG FSP 

L098 BTG DBR FFB FSP FSR IPS 

L099 EFG FSP 

L100 FFB FSP 

L101 DBR FFB FSP FSR 


3981 6061–201 3–53



L102 BTG IEG 

L103 FSP FSR 

L104 ACG AFB APB APG ARE ARG BTG BWP CFB CFE CHC 

CLS CMR CNV COR CSP CSR CTG DBC DBR DBU 

DFH DTP EFG ENV EPG ETL FFB FSP FSR FSS HSP 

IEG IGC IMC IOC IPS IRC IRP ISC LOE MDP 

MPG NPP ONE PED PEI PEP PES PIC PMG PTT RAG 

RAJ REP REX RPM RPR S4G S4P S4S SCG SPF SPL 

SPM SPU SSR STE STX TDP TIP TIR TMH TMP TPP 

TRP 

L105 ACG AFB APB APG ARE ARG BTG BWP CFB CFE CHC 

CLS CMR CNV COR CSP CSR CTG DBC DBR DBU 

DFH DTP EFG ENV EPG ETL FFB FSP FSR FSS HSP 

IEG IGC IMC IOC IPS IRC IRP ISC LOE MDP 

MPG ONE NPP PED PEI PEP PES PIC PMG PTT RAG 

RAJ REP REX RPM RPR S4G S4P S4S SCG SPF SPL 

SPM SPU SSR STE STX TDP TIP TIR TMH TMP TPP 

TRP 

L106 COR 

L107 HSP NPP PED PEP RAG S4P TRP 

L108 DBR DBU PTT RAJ 

L109 DBR DBU DFH PTT RAJ 

L110 HSP TMP 

L111 COR SPL TIP TMH 

L112 AFB COR DBC DBU DTP 

L113 AFB CHC CLE DBR DBU MDP REX 

L117 CLE STE 

L119 ARE DBU 

L120 CFE CHC CLS DBU MDP REX STE TDP 

L121 PIC 

L122 CFE CLE CLS DBU MDP REX STE TDP 

L123 MDP 

L124 MDP 

L125 DTP MDP 

L126 AFB DBC DBU PIC 

L127 AFB ARE DBC DBU 

L128 ARE COR DBC PES PIC RAJ REX TIR TMH TMP 

3–54 3981 6061–201


L130 MDP 

L131 HSP SPU 

L132 ARE COR DBU 

L133 BWP 

L134 BWP 

L135 SPU 

L136 IRP 

L141 IGC 

L144 PEI 

L149 PIC 

L151 IPS 

L152 COR DTP 


L153 AFB ARE COR DBC HSP IPS MDP NPP PEP PIC REX 

S4P TIP TMP TRP 

L154 ARE COR DTP HSP IPS MDP NPP PEP PIC S4P TIP 

TMP TRP 

L155 ARE HSP IPS MDP NPP PEP PIC S4P TIP TMP TRP 

L159 PIC 

L160 COR 

L161 COR 

L162 COR 

L163 COR 

L164 COR ETL SPL SPM TIP TMH 

L165 DTP MDP 

L166 MDP 

L167 COR DTP HSP MDP NPP PED PEP PIC RAJ 

L168 HSP S4P SPF TIP TMH TMP TRP 

L169 AFB ARE CFE CHC CLS DBC DBR DBU HSP IEG IPS 

MDP MPG REP RPR S4P SPF SPU STX TDP TIP TMH 

TMP TRP I50 

L174 RAJ 

L175 HSP 

L176 HSP 

3981 6061–201 3–55



L181 ACG 

L182 ACG DBU 

L183 COR 

L187 HSP SPF SPU 

L202 CNV 

L203 CNV 

L204 AFB ARE DBC REP 

L205 SPF SPU 

L206 AFB ARE DBC REP RPR 

L207 CFE CLS DBR DBU MDP TDP 

L208 CFE CLS DBR DBU MDP TDP 

L209 DBU HSP IEG 

L210 IGC 

L211 IGC 

L212 ARE 

L213 HSP SPF SPU 

L214 SPF SPU 

L215 IGC IMC IOC IRC ISC 

L217 COR 

L218 IRC 

L219 IGC IOC 

L220 IGC IMC IOC IRC ISC 

L221 IRC 

L222 IRC 

L243 IRC 

L244 TDP TIP TIR 

L245 CNV 

L250 HSP NPP PEP S4P TRP I50 

L251 ETL HSP PEP SPU I50 

L252 ETL SPL SPM 

L254 CLE STE 

3–56 3981 6061–201


L255 APG 

L256 APG 

L257 APG 

L259 MDP RPR 

L260 EPG 

L261 APG 

L262 ENV 

L263 ONE 

L264 ONE 

L265 ONE 

L266 ONE 

L267 ONE 

L269 ONE 

L270 ONE 

L271 ONE 

L272 ENV 

L273 EPG 

L275 S4P, TMP, TRP 

L276 CNV 

L600Pn* DBR 

WS-ICM-ARE-FILE IRC 

WS-ICM-SCR-MGNT COR 

WS-ICM-SCR-FILE COR 


3981 6061–201 3–57


Description of COBOL74 Libraries 

The following table lists all the COBOL74 copy libraries for V Series IPS. In the table, WS 

signifies Working Storage and FD signifies File Description. 

Library Name Description 

L001 BPT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L002 QUE DISKPACK FILE FD 

L003 CLH DISKPACK FILE FD 

L004 CLI DISKPACK FILE FD 

L005 DIR DISKPACK FILE FD 

L006 EPT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L007 BAC TAPE FILE FD 

L008 CTL DISKPACK FILE FD 

L009 BUN DISKPACK FILE FD 

L010 ITM DISKPACK FILE FD 

L011 SP DISKPACK FILE FD 

L012 CTP TAPE FILE FD 

L013 GRP DISKPACK FILE FD 

L014 AUD DISKPACK FILE FD 

L015 ITM WS MASTER STRING ENTRY 

L016 TOT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L017 ITM WS POCKET STRING ENTRY 

L018 ENV DISKPACK FILE FD 

L019 TOT WS TOTDIR RECORD 

L020 COR DISKPACK FILE FD 

L021 JOB DISKPACK FILE FD 

L022 OPR DISKPACK FILE FD 

L023 ITM WS MASTER RECORD 

L024 TOT WS REJECT REENTRY TOT-DIR RECORD 

L025 ITM WS REJECT REENTRY MASTER RECORD 

L026 TOT FILE DIRECTORY WS FILM INFORMATION ENTRY 

L027 EDS DISKPACK FILE FD 

L028 SCR DISKPACK FILE FD 

3–58 3981 6061–201


L029 NOT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L030 S4R DISKPACK FILE FD 

L031 N4T DISKPACK FILE FD 

L033 ONE TAPE FILE FD 

L034 DIR WS DIR-DEF RECORD 

L035 CFE TAPE FILE FD 

L036 CFE DISKPACK FILE FD 

L037 RST DISKPACK FILE FD 

L040 CDV DISKPACK FILE FD 

L041 CD4 DISKPACK FILE FD 

L042 SG DISKPACK FILE FD 

L043 SP WS SP-FAM-RECORD 

L044 CDG DISKPACK FILE FD 

L049 STA DISKPACK FILE FD 

L050 AFB WS FILE TABLES 

L053 TDT TAPE FILE FD 

L054 RPQ DISKPACK FILE FD 

L055 HOL DISKPACK FILE FD 

L056 CPM DISKPACK FILE FD 

L058 BPM DISKPACK FILE FD 

L060 APM DISKPACK FILE FD 

L061 BNK DISKPACK FILE FD 

L062 CNN DISKPACK FILE FD 

L063 CLH FILE WS 

L064 MDP, COM, RMD PROCEDURE DIVISION (STANDARD) 

L065 ONE PROCEDURE DIVISION (STANDARD) 

L066 ANN DISKPACK FILE FD 

L067 CLO DISKPACK FILE FD 

L068 CTF DISKPACK FILE FD 

L069 MDP, COM, RMD WS (APM) 

L070 MDP, COM, RMD PROCEDURE DIVISION (APM) 


3981 6061–201 3–59



L071 ONE WS (APM) 

L072 ONE PROCEDURE DIVISION (APM) 

L073 MDP, COM, RMD FILE CONTROL SECTION (APM) 

L074 MDP, COM, RMD DECLARATIVES (APM) 

L075 ONE I-O CONTROL SECTION (APM) 

L076 ONE FILE CONTROL SECTION (APM) 

L077 ONE PRINT FILE FD (APM) 

L078 ONE DECLARATIVES (APM) 

L079 ONE DISKPACK DUMMY-FILE FD 

L080 ART DISKPACK FILE FD 

L081 AT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L082 BLK DISKPACK FILE FD 

L083 CTLC DISKPACK FILE FD 

L084 ET DISKPACK FILE FD 

L085 EXC DISKPACK FILE FD 

L086 EXD DISKPACK FILE FD 

L087 LOC TAPE FILE FD 

L088 NEX DISKPACK FILE FD 

L089 ONS TAPE FILE FD 

L090 PMX DISKPACK FILE FD 

L091 RST DISKPACK FILE FD (CYC) 

L092 SER DISKPACK FILE FD 

L093 EXC WS ITEM ENTRY 

L094 NEX WS ITEM ENTRY 

L095 BT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L096 BK DISKPACK FILE FD 

L097 BR DISKPACK FILE FD 

L098 CTLF DISKPACK FILE FD 

L099 EFT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L100 RST DISKPACK FILE FD (STM) 

L101 STMI DISKPACK FILE FD 

3–60 3981 6061–201


L102 STME TAPE FILE FD 

L103 STMI WS ITEM ENTRY 

L104 PROGRAM/JOB INFORMATION INTRINSIC WS 


L105 PROGRAM/JOB INFORMATION INTRINSIC PROCEDURE DIVISION 

L106 CRS DISKPACK FILE FD 

L107 RAF DISKPACK FILE FD 

L108 BAC TAPE FILE FD 

L109 BAC DISKPACK FILE FD (IPS 700) 

L110 SP WS SP-PASS-RECORD 

L111 SYSTEM KEYS AREA WS 

L112 DTQ DISKPACK FILE FD 

L113 CER DISKPACK FILE ID 

L117 CLECD DISKPACK FILE FD 

L118 ICM WS CLOSEOUT-DATA-CORRECTIONS-BLOCK 

L119 ARE DISKPACK FILE FD 

L120 CLI FILE WS 

L121 PCR DISKPACK FILE FD 

L122 PROCEDURE DIVISION LIBRARY FOR ACCESSING CLH AND CLI 

FILES 

L123 PROCEDURE DIVISION LIBRARY FOR UPDATING CLH AND CLI 

FILES 

L124 MDP AND COM DETAIL PRINT TASK PROCEDURE DIVISION CODE 

L125 MDP, COM, AND DTP MASTER PRINT TASK PROCEDURE DIVISION 

CODE 

L126 PCQ DISKPACK FILE FD 

L127 ACQ DISKPACK FILE FD 

L128 BPT WS BLOCK ENTRY 

L129 CDC COMMON WS FOR DATA CORRECTIONS 

L130 MDP AND COM COMMON MASTER AND DETAIL WS CODE 

L131 TCV DISKPACK FILE FD 

L132 ARE FILE WS 

L133 BWP DISKPACK FILE FD 

L134 BWP FILE WS 

3981 6061–201 3–61



L135 INS DISKPACK FILE FD 

L136 IRB DISKPACK FILE FD 

L140 ICM WS UPDATE-AR-STATUS 

L141 ICM WS GET-ITEM-DATA 

L142 ICM WS GET-INTERIM-CORRECTIONS 

L143 ICM WS GET-PULL-LIST 

L144 ICM WS GET-POWER-ENCODE-STATUS 

L145 ICM WS UPDATE-JOB-STATUS 

L146 ICM WS UPDATE-BLOCK-STATUS 

L147 ICM WS EXTRACT-WORK-FLOW-STATUS 

L148 CAE COMMON WS FOR AMOUNT ENTRY 

L149 PCQ ENTRY TABLE WS 

L150 ICM WS GET-ACTIVE-JOB/BLOCK-DATA 

L151 EQU DISKPACK FILE FD 

L152 DTQ FILE ENTRY WS 

L153 REQ DISKPACK FILE FD 

L154 REQ FILE WS 

L155 PROCEDURE DIVISION CODE FOR CREATING REQ FILE ENTRIES 

L159 PCR FILE WS 

L160 COR PROCEDURE DIVISION CODE 




L164 SP LOOKUP/IPC SEND & RECEIVE WS 

L165 MDP, COM AND DTP MASTER TASK WS 

L166 MDP AND COM DETAIL TASK WS 

L167 COR FILE STRING ENTRY WS 

L168 PROCEDURE DIVISION FOR DISK FILE HEADER INTERROGATION 

L169 WS LIBRARY DISK FILE HEADER INTERROGATION 

L170 EPT FILE ENDPOINT INFORMATION WS 

L174 RAJ PROCEDURE DIVISION/BATCH INSERT AND DELETE LOGIC 

3–62 3981 6061–201


L175 HSP FILM HANDLING WS 

L176 HSP FILM HANDLING PROCEDURE DIVISION 

L181 ACT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L182 ADT DISKPACK FILE FD 


L183 PROCEDURE DIVISION LIBRARY FOR SCREEN FILE I/O AND 

SCREEN MANAGEMENT 

L187 CAR DISKPACK FILE FD 

L188 CAR FILE WS 

L199 TOT BLOCK HEADER RECORD WS 

L202 PROCEDURE DIVISION LIBRARY FOR CONVERTING LEVEL 800 IPS 

FILES TO LEVEL 820 FORMAT 

L203 PROCEDURE DIVISION LIBRARY FOR CONVERTING LEVEL 820 IPS 

FILES TO LEVEL 825 FORMAT 

L204 FILE REBLOCK LIBRARY 

L205 CAG DISKPACK FILE FD 

L206 PROCEDURE DIVISION LIBRARY FOR DISK FILE HEADER 

INTERROGATION TO COMPUTE FILE ATTRIBUTES 

L207 WS FOR CHC LOCKOUT 

L208 PROCEDURE DIVISION LIBRARY FOR CHC LOCKOUT 

L209 BIC DISKPACK FILE FD 

L210 GET KEYS DATA I30 COMMON WS 

L211 CODE-LINE CONVERSION I31 COMMON WS 

L212 ACQ FILE WS 

L213 EXP DISKPACK FILE FD 

L214 EXG DISKPACK FILE FD 

L215 IMAGE EXPORT REPORT FILE ACCESS LIBRARY 

L216 CODE-LINE MATCH INPUT I32 COMMON WS 

L217 PROCEDURE DIVISION FOR ARE FILE MANAGEMENT 

L218 GET EXPORT PARAMETERS I36 COMMON WS 

L219 ORDER CODE-LINE FIELDS I37 COMMON WS 

L220 IMAGE EXPORT REPORT WS 

L221 IRR DISKPACK FILE FD 

L222 IRR FILE WS 

3981 6061–201 3–63



L243 ICM WS RETRIEVE-WORD 

L244 TAPE ELECTRONIC CHECK FILE (TEC) FD 

L245 PROCEDURE DIVISION LIBRARY FOR CONVERTING LEVEL 

825/827 IPS FILES TO LEVEL 835 FORMAT 

L250 EXTERNAL TABLE DOWNLOAD MANAGER COMMON WS 

L251 EXTERNAL TABLE FILE DISKPACK FILE FD 

L252 EXT TBL LOOKUP/IPC SEND & RECEIVE WS 

L254 PROCEDURE DIVISION LIBRARY FOR EXTRACTING CASH LETTER 

DATA 

L255 BANK PARAMETER HOLIDAY COMMA-DELIMITED FILE FD 

L256 BANK PARAMETER COMMA-DELIMITED FILE FD 

L257 BANK PARAMETER RT COMMA-DELIMITED FILE FD 

L259 COBOL COMMON AREA FOR BPL SPACE COMPRESSION ICM I18 

L260 GROUP COMMA-DELIMITED FILE FD 

L261 BANK HOLIDAY COMMA-DELIMITED FILE RD 

L262 OPERATOR COMMA-DELIMITED FILE FD 

L263 SETTLEMENT EXTRACTION CONTROL TOTALS FILE FD 

L264 SETTLEMENT EXTRACTION POCKET TOTALS FILE FD 

L265 SETTLEMENT EXTRACTION ACTUAL OUTSORT DATE FILE FD 

L266 SETTLEMENT EXTRACTION REJECT REENTRY HISTORY FILE PD 

L267 SETTLEMENT EXTRACTION COR HISTORY FILE FD 

L269 OOT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L270 OAT DISKPACK FILE FD 

L271 ON-US EXTRACTION EXPECTED OUTSORT DATA FILE FD 

L272 ENVIRONMENT COMMA-DELIMITED FILE FD 

L273 ENDPOINT COMMA-DELIMITED FILE FD 

L600Pn RECOVERY COMMON DATA 

3–64 3981 6061–201

IPS ICM Descriptions 


The following table describes all the independently compiled modules (ICMs) that are 

provided on the IPS base tape for use with IPS programs and libraries, as well as with the 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) and the Image Export Processing System (IXPS). 

The Used By column provides the name of the system (IPS, ICPS, IXPS) in which the ICM 

is bound into programs. 

ICM 

I01 ICPS 

I02 ICPS 

I03 ICPS, 

IXPS 

I04 ICPS 

I05 ICPS, 

IXPS 

I06 ICPS 

I07 ICPS 

I08 ICPS 

I09 ICPS, 

IXPS 

I10 ICPS 

I11 ICPS 

I12 ICPS 

I13 ICPS 

Used 

By Description 

The Amount Entry Services ICM updates block statuses and processes requests for 

item data by the amount entry function of ICPS. 

The Data Correction Services ICM updates block statuses and processes requests 

for item data by the data corrections function of ICPS. 

The Get Active Job/Block Data Service ICM reports job totals and statuses and 

block totals and statuses for active jobs (prime pass jobs not marked ready for 

extraction). 

The Update Job Statuses ICM updates the status of jobs in the Job Directory (DIRt) 

File. 

The Update Block Statuses ICM updates the status of blocks in the Block Pointer 

(BPTt) File. 

The Get Pull List Service ICM retrieves items from the IPS database that are still 

rejects after data corrections is complete for the job. 

The Power Encode Inquiry Service ICM reports the power encode status of 

requested jobs, blocks, or power encode devices. 

The Workflow Stats Extract ICM reports the totals and status of prime pass blocks 

in the IPS database. 

The BAR (Balancing and Reconcilement) Get Item Data Service ICM retrieves the 

most current item data from the IPS database. 

The Update AR (Automated Reconcilement) Status ICM updates block statuses 

before entries are made in the Post Corrections Queue (PCQt) File. 

The Store Interim Corrections Service ICM updates Correction (CORt) File items and 

stores interim corrections, reschedules the Automated Reconcilement Extraction 

(ARE) Program, if required, and retrieves the most current interim correction in case 

of a system failure. 

The Get User Keys Data ICM provides a program shell for use in retrieving 

commonly used keys from the BPTt, DIRt, and other files for storage in a common 

use area. 

The Close Out Data Correction Block ICM updates the Block Pointer (BPTt), Job 

Directory (DIRt), and Total (TOTt) files with appropriate statuses when a block has 

completed data correction (DC). This ICM also schedules the Power Encode Strings 

(PES) and ARE programs for the completed block, if appropriate. 

3981 6061–201 3–65


ICM 

Used 


I14 IPS The Retrieve Word ICM parses a text message for number and size of words in the 

message and stores each word for examination by the calling program. 

I15 IPS The Retrieve Screen Module ICM retrieves a specified screen from the Screen 

(SCRt) File or the screen tanking area in memory. 

I16 IPS The Manage ARE Files ICM provides file access routines for multiple Automated 

Reconcilement Interface (Rbbbbt) files to improve throughput and reduce processor 

input/output overhead in the Corrections (COR) Program. 

I17 IPS The Screen Management Module ICM loads a retrieved screen with data, returns 

error notices, and positions the cursor at fields in error. 

I18 IPS The BPL Space Compression ICM compresses consecutive spaces before sending 

print lines to a remote printer. It is used by the Remote Master and Detail Print 

(RMD) and Remote Print (RPR) programs. 

I30 ICPS, 

IPS, 

IXPS 

I31 IPS, 

IXPS 

The Get Keys Data Service ICM retrieves prime pass key information from the BPTt, 

DIRt, and TOTt files for storage in a common use area. 

The Code-Line Conversion Service ICM converts MICR code lines according to 

parameters set in the Account Conversion Table (ACTt) File. It also locates serial 

numbers in the MICR code line according to parameters set in the Serial Number 

Location (SERt) File. 

I32 IPS The Code-Line Match Input ICM accepts parameters from a user-written program to 

create the Code Line Match Input (CMxtxx) File for use in producing the IXPS Missing 

and Free reports. 

I33 IPS The Image Export Report File–1 Access ICM provides file access routines for one of 

the CMxtxx or RCxtft files used to produce the IXPS Missing and Free reports. 

I34 IPS The Image Export Report File–2 Access ICM provides file access routines for the 

SCxtff File used to produce the IXPS Missing and Free reports. 

I35 IPS The Image Export Report File–3 Access ICM provides file access routines for the 

MFxtxx File used to produce the IXPS Missing and Free reports. 

I36 IPS The Get Export Parameters ICM retrieves the image export parameters for a 

specified cycle number or customer ID from the Image Export Parameter (EXPt) File 

for use in producing the IXPS Missing and Free reports. 

3–66 3981 6061–201

ICM 

Used 



I37 IPS The Order Code-Line Fields ICM rearranges the order of code-line fields according to 

the match order provided by the calling program for producing the Retrieved Code 

Lines (RCxtff) File and the Code-Line Match Input (CMxtxx) File. 

I50 IPS The External Table Manager ICM verifies the external tables used by a sort pattern. 

It returns the number of table entries in each table to ensure that the tables fit in 

available memory. It also returns the next buffer of compressed external table data 

needed by a sort pattern. The High Speed Port (HSP), Power Encode Port (PEP), 

S 4000 Reject Reentry Port (S4P), and Terminal Reject Reentry Port (TRP) programs 

use it. 

3981 6061–201 3–67


ICMs Used with IPS 

The following table lists the independently compiled modules (ICMs) that are provided on 

the IPS base tape and are used with IPS programs and libraries. For similar information 

on ICMs used with the Image Check Processing System (ICPS) and the Image Export 

Processing System (IXPS), refer to “ICMs Used with ICPS” and “ICMs Used with IXPS” in 

Section 7 of this overview . 

ICM ICM Name 

I14 Retrieve Word 

I15 Retrieve Screen Module 

I16 Manage ARE Files 

I17 Screen Management Module 

I18 BPL Space Compression 

I30 Get Keys Data Service 

I31 Code-Line Conversion Service 

I32 Code-Line Match Input 

I33 Image Export Report File–1 Access 



I36 Get Export Parameters 

I37 Order Code-Line Fields 

I50 External Table Manager 

3–68 3981 6061–201

ICMs That Update and Access IPS Files 


The following table lists the independently compiled modules (ICMs) that update and 

access each IPS file. 

File ICMs That Access and Update File ICMS That Access but Do Not Update File 

ACTt None I31 

ACTt01 None I31 

ADTt None I31 

ADTt01 None I31 

BPTt I01 I02 I04 I05 I10 I11 

I13 

CMxtxx I32 I33 None 

CORt I02 I11 I06 I09 

CTLt None I07 

I03 I06 I07 I08 I09 I30 

DIRt I04 I13 I01 I02 I03 I06 I07 I08 I30 

ENVt None I01 I02 I03 I04 I05 I06 I07 I08 

I09 I10 I11 I13 I30 I31 I32 

EXPt None I36 

ITMt I01 I09 

MFxtxx I35 None 

RAFt None I07 

RCxtff I33 None 

Rbbbbt I16 I11 

SCxtff I34 None 

SCRt None I15 

SERt None I31 

TOTt I02 I10 I13 I01 I03 I04 I06 I07 I08 I30 

 

None I50 

3981 6061–201 3–69


COBOL74 Libraries and Working Storage Data Items 

Used by IPS ICMs 

The following table presents the COBOL74 libraries or working storage data items used by 

the independently compiled modules (ICMs) released with IPS. The COBOL74 libraries 

are released as source code. 

ICM Library or Working Storage Data Item 

I01 L001 L005 L010 L015 L016 L018 L104 L105 L128 L148 

I02 L001 L005 L015 L016 L018 L019 L020 L104 L105 L118 L128 

L129 

I03 L001 L005 L016 L018 L019 L034 L104 L105 L128 L150 

I04 L001 L005 L016 L018 L019 L104 L105 L118 L128 L145 

I05 L001 L018 L104 L105 L128 L146 

I06 L001 L005 L015 L016 L018 L020 L104 L105 L128 L143 

I07 L001 L005 L008 L016 L018 L019 L104 L105 L107 L144 

I08 L001 L005 L016 L018 L019 L104 L105 L128 L147 

I09 L001 L010 L015 L018 L020 L023 L025 L104 L105 L128 L141 

L167 

I10 L001 L016 L018 L104 L105 L128 L140 

I11 L001 L018 L020 L104 L105 L119 L128 L142 L167 

I12 None 

I13 L001 L005 L016 L018 L104 L105 L118 

I14 L243 WS-ICM-WRD-RETRIEVAL 

I15 WS-ICM-SCR-FILE 

I16 WS-ICM-ARE-FILE 

I17 WS-ICM-SCR-MGNT 

I18 L259 

I30 L001 L005 L016 L018 L104 L105 L128 L210 

I31 L018 L092 L104 L105 L181 L182 L211 

I32 L018 L104 L105 L215 L216 L218 L219 L220 

I33 L169 L215 

I34 L169 L215 

I35 L169 L215 

3–70 3981 6061–201

ICM Library or Working Storage Data Item 

I36 L104 L105 L213 L218 L220 

I37 L219 L220 

I50 L169 L250 


3981 6061–201 3–71

Section 4 


IPS File Names and Mnemonics .............................................. 4–2 

Programs That Update and Access Each IPS File................... 4–7 

IPS COBOL74 Libraries by File................................................ 4–13 

IPS Files by COBOL74 Library................................................. 4–17 

IPS Files Used to Run Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Module 

Jobs ..................................................................................... 4–22 

Cycle Sort Module Files Used to Run Statement 

and Bulk Fine Sort Module Jobs.......................................... 4–23 

Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Module Files ............................ 4–24 

3981 6061–201 4–1


IPS File Names and Mnemonics 

The following table lists the system files created and accessed by IPS programs. 

An external file name typically consists of the first three uppercase characters of the file 

name followed by the test system number. For example, the external file name for the 

Environment File is ENVt. A number of exceptions exist including the Rbbbbt File with its 

name of Automated Reconcilement Interface File and the MORCnn File with its name of 

Common Format Extraction File. Not all external file names are mnemonics. 

Note: If you change external file names in the ENVt File, the file names you defined 

there supersede the file names listed here. For more information, refer to 

“Changing External File Names of the IPS Production Files” in Section 5 of the 

IPS Base Parameters Operating Guide. 

For the meaning of the file naming conventions used in this table, refer to “Notation 

Conventions” in “About This Overview” at the beginning of this overview. 

External File Name Descriptive File Name 

Annt Account File 

AnntPM Account Parameter File 

Annt01 Account Parameter Key File 

ACQt ARE Completed Block Queue File 

ACTt Account Conversion Table File 

ACTt01 Account Conversion Table Key File 

ADTt Account Deconversion Table File 

ADTt01 Account Deconversion Table Key File 

ARTtIC Account Range Table File 

ATstIC Account Table File 

AUDt Audit File 

AUDtIC Audit File for Cycle Sort Module 

AUDtIF Audit File for Bulk Fine Sort Module 

BICt Business Date Item Count File 

BKptnn Backup Tape or Pack File 

BKstIF Book Item Data File 

BLKtIC Block Table File 

BNKt Bank File 

BNKtPM Bank Parameter File 

BNKt01 Bank Parameter Key File 

4–2 3981 6061–201


BPHtCD Bank Parameter Holiday Comma-Delimited File 

BPMtCD Bank Parameter Comma-Delimited File 

BPRtCD Bank Parameter RT Comma-Delimited File 

BPTt Block Pointer File 

BRstIF Book Range Table File 

Btnnnn 

nnnn = record number 

in CTBtIF File of control 

file identifying book 

BTstIF Book Table File 

BUNt Bundle File 

Book Data File for Bulk Fine Sort Module 

BWPt Batch Work Prep Stats Extract File 

CAGt Generated Courtesy Amount Read Location File (unfiltered on host) 

CARt Courtesy Amount Read Location File (filtered on host) 

CDGt Generated Check Digit Verification File (unfilteredon host) 

CDVt Check Digit Verification File (filtered on host) 

CD4t S 4000 Check Digit Verification File (filtered on host) 

CERt CLC Exception RT File 

CLHt Cash Letter History File 

CLIt Cash Letter Index File 

CLOt Closed Day File 

CMxtxx Code-Line Match Input File 

Cnnt Customer File 

CnntPM Customer Parameter File 

Cnnt01 Customer Parameter Key File 

CORt Corrections File 

CRStcc Correction Restart File 

CTBtIF Book Control File for Bulk Fine Sort Module 

CTFt Customer Table File 

CTLt Control File 


3981 6061–201 4–3



CTLtIC Cycle Sort Control File 

CTLtIF Fine Sort Control File 

CTPt Database Compaction Tape File 

DFPtEF Bulk Fine Sort Parameter File 

DIRt Job Directory File 

DSKtIN Disk Input File 

DTQt Desktop Queue File 

EDSt Endorsement File 

ENVt Environment File 

ENVtCD Environment Comma-Delimited File 

EPTt Endpoint File 

EPTtCD Endpoint Comma-Delimited File 

ETstIC Exception Table File 

ETstIF Exception Fine Sort Table File 

EXCtIC Exception Items File 

EXDtIC Exception Description File 

EXGt Generated Image Export Parameter File (unfiltered on host) 

EXPt Image Export Parameter File (filtered on host) 

External Table File (6-character user-defined name) 

E4Dtdd IPC File for Power Encode 

FRMtIF Sort Specification Forms File for Bulk Fine Sort 

GRPt Groups File 

GRPtCD Group Comma-Delimited File 

HOLtCD Bank Holiday Comma-Delimited File 

HOLtPM Holiday Parameter File 

HSSt High-Speed Statistics History File 

INSt Institution Parameters File 

IRBt0s Image Rebuild File 

IRRt Image Export Report Restart File 

ITMt Item File 

4–4 3981 6061–201


JOBt Job Parameters File 

LOCtIC Location Data Tape File 

LSSXt Low-Speed Statistics History File 

MORCnn Common Format Extraction File 

MFxtxx Missing and Free File 

NEXtIC Nonexception Items File 

NOTt Notice File (80-character) 

NOTtIC Notice File (80-character) for Cycle Sort Module 

NOTtP Notice File (80-character) for Availability and Pricing Module 

N4Tt Notice File (40-character) 

N4TtIC Notice File (40-character) for Cycle Sort Module 

N4TtIF Notice File (40-character) for Statement Module 

N4TtRM Notice File (40-character) for Remote Site Module 

OATtff On-Us Extraction Application Totals Comma-Delimited File 

OEOtff On-Us Extraction Expected Outsort Data Comma-Delimited File 

ONEtp1 On-Us Extraction Tape File 

ONStEC On-Us DDA Tape File 

OOTtff On-Us Extraction On-Us Totals Comma-Delimited File 

OPRt Operator File 

OPRtCD Operator Comma-Delimited File 

PCQt Post Corrections Queue File 

PCRt Post Interim Correction Restart File 

PMXtIC Pocket Matrix File 

P4Ctdd Control Ticket File used by S4P Program 

P4Dtdd IPC File for S4P and TRP Programs 

P4Rtdd Pocket Restart File used by S4P and TRP Programs 

QUEt Queue File 

RAFt Repass Alternative File 

Rbbbbt Automated Reconcilement Interface File 

RCxtff Retrieved Code Lines File 

REQt Real-Time Extraction Queue File 

RPQt0s Remote Print Queue File 

RSBtIF Restart File for Bulk Fine Sort Module 


3981 6061–201 4–5



RSTt Restart File 

RSTtIC Restart File for Cycle Sort Module 

RSTtIF Restart File for Statement Module 

SCxtff Sorted Code Lines File 

SCRt Screen File (80-character by 24-line) 

SCRtIC Screen File (80-character by 24-line) for Cycle Sort Module 

SCRtP Screen File (80-character by 24-line) for Availability and Pricing Module 

SERt Serial Number Location File 

SGtfff Generated Sort Pattern File (unfiltered on host) 

SPtfff Sort Pattern File (filtered on host) 

SSDtIF Sort Specification Directory File for Bulk Fine Sort Module 

STAt Statistics File 

STMtEF Statements Items Tape File 

STMtIF Statements Items File 

S4Rt Screen File (40-character by 12-line) 

S4RtIC Screen File (40-character by 12-line) for Cycle Sort Module 

S4RtIF Screen File (40-character by 12-line) for Statement Module 

S4RtRM Screen File (40-character by 12-line) for Remote Site Module 

TCVt Travelers Check Validation File 

TDTt Tape Detail File 

TOTt Total File 

Ttffff Cash Letter Extraction Comma-Delimited File on disk pack 

XAOtff Settlement Extraction Actual Outsort Comma-Delimited File 

XCHtff Settlement Extraction Corrections History Comma-Delimited File 

XCTtff Settlement Extraction Control Totals Comma-Delimited File 

XHPtff Settlement Extraction Holdover Pocket Totals Comma-Delimited File 

XPTtff Settlement Extraction Pocket Totals Comma-Delimited File 

XRHtff Settlement Extraction Reject History Comma-Delimited File 

4–6 3981 6061–201

Programs That Update and Access Each IPS File 


The following table lists the programs that update and access each IPS file. This table 

does not include temporary work files. 

Note: If you change file mnemonics in the Environment (ENVt) File, the mnemonics 

you defined there supersede the mnemonics listed here. For more information, 

refer to “Changing External File Names of the IPS Production Files” in Section 

5 of the IPS Base Parameters Operating Guide. 

File 

Programs That Access 

and Update File 

ACQt AFB, ARE, BRP † , DBC, DBR BRM † , DBU 

ACTt ACG IEE †† , IGC 

ACTt01 ACG IGC 

ADTt ACG DBU, IEE †† 

ADTt01 ACG DBU 

Annt APB DBU, ONE 

Annt01 APG APB 

AnntPM APG APB 

ARTtIC ARG CSR, CTG 

ATstIC CTG CSP 

AUDt AFB, HSP, IPS, NPP, PED, PEP, 

S4P,TIP, TMP, TRP 

AUDtIC CFB, CSP, IPS REP 

AUDtIF FFB, FSP, IPS REP 

Programs That Access but 

Do Not Update File 

CSP, FSP, REP 

BICt IEG HSP, DBU 

BKptnn DFH, PTT DBR, DBU, RAJ, ICA † 

BKstIF BTG FSR 

BLKtIC CTG CSP 

BNKt APB COM, DBU, MDP, RMD 

BNKt01 APG, CNV APB 

BNKtPM APG, CNV APB 

BPHtCD APG None. 

BPMtCD APG None. 

BPRtCD APG None. 

3981 6061–201 4–7


File 



BPTt AFB, ARE, CIM †††, COR, DBC, DBR, 

DFH, HSP*, IEE †† , IEM †† , IPS, IRP, 

NPP*, PEP*, PIC*, RAJ, S4P*, TMH, 

TMP*, TRP 

BRstIF BTG FSP 

Btnnnn HUL None 

BTstIF BTG FSP 

BUNt AFB, COM, DBC, DBR, MDP, RAJ, RMD 

BWPt BWP ISP † 

CAGt None SPF, SPU 

CARt SPF HSP, SPU 

CDGt None SPF, SPU 



AEW † , BRD † , BRM † , BRP † , CFE, COM, 

DBU, DCM † , DCW † , DTP, IIF † , IRT † , 

MDP, ONE, PED, PES, REP, REX, RIP † , 

RMD, STE, STM † , TDP, TIP, TIR 

CFE, DBU, REX, TDP 

CDVt SPF DSP † , HSP, NPP, PED, SPL, SPU, 

TRP 

CD4t SPF PEP, SPU, S4P 

CERt AFB, CHC, COM, DBR, MDP, RMD CLE, DBU, REX, STE 

CLHt AFB, CHC, CLE, CNV, COM, DBR, IPS, 

MDP, RMD, STE 

CFE, CLS, DBU, REX, TDP 

CLIt AFB, CHC, CNV, COM, MDP, RMD CFE, CLE, CLS, DBU, REX, STE, TDP 

CLOt APB COM, IPS, MDP, ONE, RMD 

CMxtxx None IMC 

Cnnt APB DBU, ONE 

CnntPM APG, CNV APB 

Cnnt01 APG, CNV APB 

CORt AFB, COR, DBC, DBR, DFH, HSP, PIC*, 

RAJ, S4P, TRP 

CRStcc COR None 

CTBtIF HUL None 

CTFt APG APB 

CTLt AFB, CFE, COR, DBC, DBR, DFH, HSP, 

IPS, NPP, ONE, PED, PEP, PES, PIC*, 

RAJ, S4P, STE, TIP, TMH, TMP*, TPP, 

TRP 

ARE, CFE, COM, DBU, DTP,IEE †† , IPS, 

MDP, NPP, ONE, PED, PEP, PES, REP, 

REX, RMD, TDP, TIR 

DBU, IRP, PTT 

CTLtIC CFB, CSP, CSR, DBR, LOE, SSR EFG, IPS 

CTLtIF BTG, DBR, FFB, FSP, FSR IPS 

4–8 3981 6061–201

File 



CTPt DBC None 

DFPtEF None HUL 

DIRt AFB, CFE, COM, COR, DBC, DBR, DFH, 

HSP, IPS, MDP, NPP, ONE, PED, PEP, 

PES, PIC*, RAJ, RMD, S4P, STE, TIP, 

TMH, TMP*, TRP 

DTQt AFB, COR, DTP DBC, DBU 




AEW † , ARE, BRD † , BRM † , BRP † , BWP, 

CAC † , DBU, DCM † , DCW † , DTP, 

IEE †† , IEM †† , IHR † , IRP, REP, REX, 

RIP † , STM † , STX, TDP, TIR 

EDSt None HSP, NPP, PEP, SPU, S4P, TRP 

ENVt CNV, ENV, IPS ACG, AEB † , AEM † , AEW † , AFB, APB, 

APG, ARE, ARG, BRD † , BRM † , BRP † , 

BTG, BWP, CAC † , CFB, CFE, CHC, 

CIM †††, CLE, CLS, CMR, COM, COR, 

CSP, CSR, CTG, DBC, DBR, DBU, 

DCB † , DCM † , DCW † , DFH, DIJ † , 

DSP † , DTP, EFG, EPG, ETL, FFB, FSP, 

FSR, HSP, IEC †† , IED †† , IEE †† , IEF †† , 

IEG, IEM †† , IEP †† , IET †† , IGC, IFU † , 

IHR † , IIF † , IPM † , IRC, IRP, IRT † , ISA † , 

ISP † , IWR † , LOE, MDP, NPP, ONE, 

PED, PEI, PEP, PES, PIC, PMG, PTT, 

RAG, RAJ, REP, REX, RII † , RIP † , RMD, 

RPM, SCG, SPF, SPL, SPM, SPU, SSE, 

SSR, STM † , STE, STX, S4G, S4P, 

S4S, TDP, TIP, TIR, TMH, TMP, TPP, 

TRP 

ENVtCD ENV None 

EPTt AFB, CNV, EPG, IPS CFE, CLS, COM, HSP, MDP, NPP, PEP, 

RMD, SPF, S4P, TDP, TIP, TRP 

EPTtCD EPG None 

ETstIC CTG CSP 

ETstIF EFG FSP 

EXCtIC CFB, CSP, DBR CSR, EFG 

EXDtIC PMG CSR 

EXGt None SPF, SPU 

EXPt SPF HSP, IEM †† , IRC, SPU 

 

User-created ETL, HSP, NPP, PEP, SPU, S4P 

FRMtIF None SSE 

GRPt CNV, EPG COM, IPS, MDP, REX, RMD 

3981 6061–201 4–9


GRPtCD EPG None 

4–10 3981 6061–201

File 



HOLtCD APG None 

HOLtPM APG APB 

HSSt STX None 



INSt None AEW † , BRD † , DCW † , IWR † , SPU 

IRBt0s IRP, RIP † None 

IRRt IRC None 

ITMt AFB, COM, COR, DBC, DBR, DFH, 

HSP*, MDP, NPP, PEP*, PES, PIC*, 

RAJ, RMD, S4P*, TMP*, TRP 


ARE, CFE, DBU, DTP, IEE †† , IRP, ONE, 

PED, REP, REX, TDP, TIP, TIR, TMH 

JOBt None HSP, NPP, PEP, SPU, S4P, TIP, TMH, 

TMP, TRP 

LOCtIC LOE None 

LSSt STX None 

MFxtxx IMC IOC 

MORCnn CFE None 

NEXtIC CFB, CSP, DBR LOE 

NOTt SCG ACG, COR, ENV, EPG, PEI, RAG, S4G, 

TMH 

NOTtIC SCG ARG, PMG 

NOTtP SCG APG 

NTDtdd NPP, TRP None 

NTDt01 PED None 

N4Tt S4G CSP, FSP, HSP, IPS, IRP, RPM 

N4TtIC S4G CSP 

N4TtIF S4G FSP 

N4TtRM S4G RPM 

OATtff ONE None 

OEOtff ONE None. 

ONEtp1 ONE None 

ONStEC None CSR, CTG 

OOTtff ONE None 

3981 6061–201 4–11


File 





OPRt AFB, CNV, COR, ENV, TMH ACG, AEW † , APG, ARG, CMR, CSP, 

DCW † , EPG, FSP, HSP, IHR † , IPM † , 

IPS, ISP † , NPP, PMG, RAG, REP, SCG, 

SSE, STM † , S4G 

OPRtCD ENV None 

PCQt AFB, BRM † , BRP † , PIC, STM † DBC, DBU 

PCRt PIC None 

PMXtIC PMG CSP, CSR, CTG 

P4Ctdd S4P S4S 

P4Dtdd S4P None 

P4Rtdd S4P, TRP None 

QUEt AFB, COM, IPS, MDP, PED, PES, RMD DBC, DBU 

RAFt RAG HSP, NPP, PED, PEP, S4P, TRP 

Rbbbbt ARE, COR BRD † , DBU, IRT † 

RCxtff IGC ISC 

REQt AFB, ARE, COM, COR, HSP, IPS, MDP, 

NPP, PEP, PIC, REX, RMD, S4P, TIP, 

TMP, TRP 

4–12 3981 6061–201 

DBC 

RPQt0s RPM None 

RSBtIF HUL None 

RSTt AFB, HSP, S4P, TIP, TRP None 

RSTtIC CFB, CSP None 

RSTtIF FFB, FSP None 

SCxtff ISC IMC 

SCRt SCG ACG, COR, ENV, EPG, PEI, RAG, S4G, 

TMH 

SCRtIC SCG ARG, PMG 

SCRtP SCG APG 

SERt ACG CTG, IEE †† , ONE 

SGtfff None SPF, SPU 

SPtfff SPF CAC † , COR**, DSP † , HSP, NPP, PEP, 

SPL, SPU, S4P, TIP, TMH**, TMP, 

TRP 

SSDtIF SSE FSP

File 



STAt AFB, DFH, STX, TMP REP 

STMtEF None BTG, IEG 

STMtIF DBR, FFB, FSP, FSR None 




S4Rt S4G CSP, FSP, HSP, IPS, IRP, REP 

S4RtIC S4G CSP 

S4RtIF S4G FSP 

S4RtRM S4G RPM 

TCVt None HSP, SPU 

TDTt TDP TIP, TIR 

TOTt AFB, ARE, COR, DBC, DBR, DFH, 

HSP*, IPS, NPP, PED, PEP*, PES, 

PIC*, RAJ, S4P*, TMP, TRP 

Ttffff CLE, STE None 

XAOtff STE None 

XCHtff STE None 

XCTtff STE None 

XHPtff STE None 

XPTtff STE None 

XRHtff STE None 

BRD † , BRM † , BRP † , BWP, CFE, COM, 

DBU, DTP, IEE †† , MDP, ONE, REP, 

REX, RMD, STE, STM † , TDP, TIP, TIR, 

TMH 

* Program updates file indirectly through the Disk File Handler (DFH) Program. 

** Program accesses file indirectly through the Sort Pattern Manager (SPM) Program. 

† Program is from the Image Check Processing System (ICPS). 

†† Program is from the Image Export Processing System (IXPS). 

††† Program is from the Common Image Export (CIE) Application. 

3981 6061–201 4–13


IPS COBOL74 Libraries by File 

The following table presents the COBOL74 libraries associated with IPS files: 

File COBOL74 Libraries 

ACQt L127 L212 

ACTt L181 

ADTt L182 

Annt L066 

AnntPM L060 

ARTtIC L080 

ATstIC L081 

AUDt L014 

BICt L209 

BKptnn L007 L108 L109 

BKstIF L096 

BLKtIC L082 

BNKt L061 

BNKtPM L058 

BPHtCD L255 

BPMtCD L256 

BPRtCD L257 

BPTt L001 L128 

BRstIF L097 

BTstIF L095 

BUNt L009 

BWPt L133 L134 

CAGt L205 

CARt L187 L188 

CDGt L044 

CDVt L040 

CD4t L041 

CERt L113 

4–14 3981 6061–201


CLHt L003 L063 L122 L123 

CLIt L004 L120 L122 L123 

CLOt L067 

CMxtxx L215 

Cnnt L062 

CnntPM L056 

CORt L020 L167 

CRStcc L106 

CTFt L068 

CTLt L008 

CTLtIC L083 

CTLtIF L098 

CTPt L012 

DIRt L005 L034 

DTQt L112 L152 

EDSt L027 

ENVt L018 

ENVtCD L272 

EPTt L006 L170 

EPTtCD L273 

ETstIC L084 

ETstIF L099 

EXCtIC L085 L093 

EXDtIC L086 

EXGt L214 

EXPt L213 

 

L251 

GRPt L013 

GRPtCD L260 

HOLtCD L261 


3981 6061–201 4–15



HOLtPM L055 

INSt L135 

IRBt0s L136 

IRRt L221 L222 

ITMt L010 L015 L017 L023 L025 

JOBt L021 

LOCtIC L087 

MFxtxx L215 

MORCnn L035 L036 

NEXtIC L088 L094 

NOTt L029 

N4Tt L031 

OATtff L270 

OEOtff L271 

ONEtp1 L033 

ONStEC L089 

OOTtff L269 

OPRt L022 

OPRtCD L262 

PCQt L126 L149 

PCRt L121 L159 

PMXtIC L090 

QUEt L002 

RAFt L107 

Rbbbbt L119 L132 

RCxtff L215 

REQt L153 L154 L155 

RPQt0S L054 

RSTt L037 

RSTtIC L091 

RSTtIF L100 

4–16 3981 6061–201


SCRt L028 

SCxtff L215 

SERt L092 

SGtfff L042 

SPtfff L011 L043 L110 L111 

STAt L049 

STMtEF L102 

STMtIF L101 L103 

S4Rt L030 

 

L244 

TCVt L131 

TDTt L053 

TOTt L016 L019 L024 L026 L199 

Ttffff L117 

XAOtff L265 

XCHtff L267 

XCTtff L263 

XPTtff L264 

XRHtff L266 


3981 6061–201 4–17


IPS Files by COBOL74 Library 

The following table presents the COBOL74 libraries associated with IPS files. These 

libraries are file and record descriptions and working storage libraries associated with IPS 

files. 

COBOL74 

Library IPS Files 

L001 BPTt 

L002 QUEt 

L003 CLHt 

L004 CLIt 

L005 DIRt 

L006 EPTt 

L007 BKptnn 

L008 CTLt 

L009 BUNt 

L010 ITMt 

L011 SPtfff 

L012 CTPt 

L013 GRPt 

L014 AUDt 

L015 ITMt 

L016 TOTt 

L017 ITMt 

L018 ENVt 

L019 TOTt 

L020 CORt 

L021 JOBt 

L022 OPRt 

L023 ITMt 

L024 TOTt 

L025 ITMt 

L026 TOTt 

4–18 3981 6061–201

COBOL74 


L027 EDSt 

L028 SCRt 

L029 NOTt 

L030 S4Rt 

L031 N4Tt 

L033 ONEtp1 

L034 DIRt 

L035 MORCnn (tape) 

L036 MORCnn (disk pack) 

L037 RSTt 

L040 CDVt 

L041 CD4t 

L042 SGtfff 

L043 SPtfff 

L044 CDGt 

L049 STAt 

L053 TDTt 

L054 RPQt0s 

L055 HOLtPM 

L056 CnntPM 

L058 BNKtPM 

L060 AnntPM 

L061 BNKt 

L062 Cnnt 

L063 CLHt 

L066 Annt 

L067 CLOt 

L068 CTFt 

L080 ARTtIC 

L081 ATstIC 

L082 BLKtIC 


3981 6061–201 4–19


COBOL74 


L083 CTLtIC 

L084 ETstIC 

L085 EXCtIC 

L086 EXDtIC 

L087 LOCtIC 

L088 NEXtIC 

L089 ONStEC 

L090 PMXtIC 

L091 RSTtIC 

L092 SERt 

L093 EXCtIC 

L094 NEXtIC 

L095 BTstIF 

L096 Btnnnn 

L097 BRstIF 

L098 CTLtIF 

L099 ETstIF 

L100 RSTtIF 

L101 STMtIF 

L102 STMtEF 

L103 STMtIF 

L106 CRStcc 

L107 RAFt 

L108 BKptnn (tape) 

L109 BKptnn (disk pack) 

L110 SPtfff 

L111 SPtfff 

L112 DTQt 

L113 CERt 

L117 Ttffff (CLECD) 

L119 Rbbbbt 

4–20 3981 6061–201

COBOL74 


L120 CLIt 

L121 PCRt 

L122 CLHt CLIt 

L123 CLHt CLIt 

L126 PCQt 

L127 ACQt 

L128 BPTt 

L131 TCVt 

L132 Rbbbbt 

L133 BWPt 

L134 BWPt 

L135 INSt 

L136 IRBt0s 

L149 PCQt 

L152 DTQt 

L153 REQt 

L154 REQt 

L155 REQt 

L159 PCRt 

L167 CORt 

L170 EPTt 

L181 ACTt 

L182 ADTt 

L187 CARt 

L188 CARt 

L199 TOTt 

L205 CAGt 

L209 BICt 

L212 ACQt 

L213 EXPt 

L214 EXGt 


3981 6061–201 4–21


COBOL74 


L215 CMxtxx MFxtxx RCxtff SCxtff 

L221 IRRt 

L222 IRRt 

L244 

L251 

L255 BPHtCD 

L256 BPMtCD 

L257 BPRtCD 

L260 GRPtCD 

L261 HOLtCD 

L262 OPRtCD 

L263 XCTtff 

L264 XPTtff 

L265 XAOtff 

L266 XRHtff 

L267 XCHtff 

L269 OOTtff 

L270 OATtff 

L271 OEOtff 

L272 ENVtCD 

L273 EPTtCD 

4–22 3981 6061–201


IPS Files Used to Run Statement and Bulk Fine Sort 

Module Jobs 

The following table lists the IPS files required to run Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Module 

jobs. It also lists the programs that update, access, and initialize each file. 

File Programs That Update File Programs That Access File 

AUDt AFB, IPS IPS, REP AFB 

BKptnn DFH DBR, DFH DFH 

BPTt AFB, DBR, DFH, IPS DBR, DFH, IPS AFB 

CTLt AFB, DBR, DFH DBR AFB 

DIRt AFB, DBR, DFH, IPS DBR, DFH, IPS, REP AFB 

ENVt ENV AFB, BTG, DFH, EFG, ENV, FFB, 

FSP, FSR, SSE 

ITMt AFB, DBR, DFH DBR, DFH AFB 

N4Tt S4G IPS, S4G None 

OPRt ENV FSP, IPS, REP, SSE ENV 

QUEt AFB, IPS IPS AFB 

STAt AFB, DFH REP AFB 

S4Rt S4G IPS, REP, S4G None 

TOTt AFB, DBR, DFH DBR, DFH, IPS, REP AFB 

Programs That 

Initialize File 

3981 6061–201 4–23 

ENV


Cycle Sort Module Files Used to Run Statement 

and Bulk Fine Sort Module Jobs 

The following table lists the Cycle Sort Module files required to run Statement and Bulk 

Fine Sort Module jobs. It also lists the programs that update, access, and initialize each 

file. 


CTLtIC DBR DBR, EFG None 

EXCtIC DBR DBR, EFG None 

Programs That 


4–24 3981 6061–201

Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Module Files 


The following table lists the Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Module files and the programs 

that update, access, and initialize each file: 


BKstIF BTG BTG, FSR BTG 

BRstIF BTG BTG, FSP BTG 

Btnnnn HUL HUL HUL 

BTstIF BTG BTG, FSP BTG 

CTBtIF HUL HUL HUL 

CTLtIC DBR, LOE DBR, EFG, LOE None 

CTLtIF BTG, DBR, FFB, FSP, FSR BTG, DBR, FSP, FSR FFB 

Programs That 


DFPtEF User-created file HUL, SSE User-created 

program 

ETstIF EFG EFG, FSP EFG 

EXCtIC DBR DBR, EFG None 

Expected 

Keys 

Table 

(Userdefined) 

None HUL User-created 

program 

FRMtIF None SSE None 

Host 

Outsort 

Tables 

(Userdefined) 

HUL HUL User-created 

program 

N4TtIF S4G FSP None 

RSBtIF HUL HUL HUL 

RSTtIF FFB, FSP FSP FFB 

SSDtIF SSE FSP, HUL SSE 

STMtEF Demand deposit accounting 

(DDA) system 

BTG DDA system 

STMtIF DBR, FFB, FSP DBR, FSP, FSR FFB 

S4RtIF S4G FSP None 

3981 6061–201 4–25

Section 5 


Overview 

Availability.......................................................................... 5–2 

Endpoints, Sendpoints, and Exception RT Numbers ......... 5–3 

Market Segments .............................................................. 5–6 

Holidays and Other Closed Days ....................................... 5–8 

How the Availability and Pricing Module Works .............. 5–10 

Bank Schedule Data ........................................................ 5–14 

Customer Schedule Data................................................. 5–18 

Bank and Customer Schedule Deadlines ........................ 5–25 

Bank Schedule Charges .................................................. 5–32 

Customer Schedule Charges........................................... 5–33 

Differences Between Customer and Bank Availability 

and Pricing .................................................................. 5–34 

3981 6061–201 5–1

Availability and Pricing Module Overview 

Availability 

Availability refers to the time when deposited funds can be used for withdrawal, 

investment, or payment. Availability can be calculated using the following ratio: 

Δ:ππ 

ωηερε: 

Δ = Νυμβερ οφ βυσινεσσ δαψσ βεφορε αλλ ορ παρτ οφ τηε δεποσιτεδ αμουντ 

βεχομεσ αϖαιλαβλε 

ππ = Περχενταγε οφ τηε αμουντ τηατ βεχομεσ αϖαιλαβλε ιν Δ βυσινεσσ δαψσ 

Examples 

• On a deposit of $100.00, an availability of 2:25 indicates that 25 percent of the funds 

($25.00) is available in two business days. 


($150.00) is available in three business days. 

The remainder of the funds (100 percent minus pp percent) always becomes available in 

D + 1 business days. 

Examples 


($25.00) is available in two business days, and the remaining 75 percent of the funds 

($75.00) is available in three business days. 

• On a deposit of $200, an availability of 3:75 indicates that 75 percent of the funds 

($150.00) is available in three business days, and the remaining 25 percent of the funds 

($50.00) is available in four business days. 

When zeros occupy the low-order positions (pp) of the availability formula (D:pp), 100 

percent of the funds is available in D business days. 

Examples 


($65.00) is available in one business day. 


($95.00) is available in two business days. 

When zeros occupy all three positions of the availability formula (0:00), 100 percent of the 

funds is available immediately. 

Example 


($65.00) is available immediately. 

5–2 3981 6061–201


Endpoints, Sendpoints, and Exception RT Numbers 

Endpoints 

Sendpoints 

An endpoint is a point to which you send processed documents. The eight-digit endpoint 

number refers to the destination and cash letter type of processed documents. 

When you define an endpoint in the Availability and Pricing Module, you must specify the 

endpoint-closed days, nonstandard holidays, and availability and pricing information. 

Refer to “Adding, Changing, or Deleting an Endpoint” in Section 2 of the IPS Module 

Parameters Operating Guide. If some banks function as endpoints and as sendpoints, 

you cannot define the same number as the endpoint number and the sendpoint number. 

The Availability and Pricing File Build (APB) Program requires you to define a default 

endpoint number 99999999. 

A sendpoint is a point from which you send documents to be processed further. 

When you define a sendpoint in the Availability and Pricing Module, you must specify the 

sendpoint-closed days and nonstandard holidays. Refer to “Adding, Changing, or Deleting 

a Sendpoint” in Section 2 of the IPS Module Parameters Operating Guide. If some banks 

function as sendpoints and as endpoints, you cannot define the same number as the 

endpoint number and the sendpoint number. 

Before you define sendpoints, consider the following: 

• Branch banks and correspondent banks can be identified as sendpoints and receive 

different availability and pricing. 

• A remote site can be identified as a different sendpoint and receive different 

availability and pricing. 

• You must define a sendpoint in all sort patterns that use the Availability and Pricing 

Module. 

3981 6061–201 5–3


Exception RT Numbers 

An exception routing and transit (RT) number differs from other RT numbers in the same 

endpoint because of its special values for availability, pricing, or both. The Availability 

and Pricing Module allows you to define any exception RT number for any endpoint. 

Exception RT numbers are used, for example, to define additional days of availability for 

an endpoint bank's correspondent banks. 

Note the following restrictions on defining exception RT numbers: 

• You cannot specify deadlines for the exception RT numbers that differ from the 

endpoint deadlines. 

• You cannot specify a premium charge for the exception RT number unless you define 

a premium deadline for the associated endpoint. 

Any RT number that you define must follow one of these formats: 

Type Format 

Old U.S. Use one of the following: 

• nnnn-nnnn 

• nnnnnnnn 

• nnnnn nnn 

Current U.S. nnnnnnnnc, where c is the check digit 

Federal Reserve Bank Zone nnnn-0000 

Federal Reserve Bank District nn00-0000 

Canadian nnnnn-nnn 

Impact of Exception RT Numbers on Availability 

The following scenario illustrates the impact that exception RT numbers have on the 

calculation of availability in a correspondent banking situation: 

Correspondent Relationship 

Bank A is a financial institution that handles its own document processing and acts as a 

correspondent bank by processing documents for Bank B and Bank C. Bank A is the 

endpoint for Bank A, Bank B, and Bank C. 

5–4 3981 6061–201

Transaction 

Your bank sends three types of cash letters to Bank A: 


• Cash letters consisting of on-us documents for Bank A 

• Cash letters consisting of on-us documents for Bank B that are processed by Bank A 

• Cash letters consisting of on-us documents for Bank C that are processed by Bank A 

The following figure illustrates this relationship and transaction: 

Assignment of Availability 

In this example, Bank A adds an additional day of availability for documents processed for 

Bank B and Bank C. To reflect this added day of availability, your bank sets up Bank B 

and Bank C as exception RT numbers. 

3981 6061–201 5–5


Market Segments 

A market segment is a group of similar customer accounts. The similarity may be the type 

of account (NOW, personal, commercial) or it may be the volume of the accounts (high 

volume, low volume). 

Whatever the basis you use for the grouping, it is convenient to group your customer 

accounts into market segments. Each market segment can then be assigned to a 

particular customer schedule. This gives you convenience and flexibility because you can 

readily change availability and pricing for any market segment by changing the customer 

schedule number to which that market segment is assigned. 

Defining Market Segments 

Defining market segments involves the following steps: 

1. Define a name for each market segment. Refer to “Defining, Changing, or Deleting 

Market Segments” in Section 2 of the IPS Module Parameters Operating Guide. 

2. Define a customer schedule number for each market segment. Refer to “Defining, 

Changing, or Deleting Market Segments” in Section 2 of the IPS Module Parameters 

Operating Guide. 

3. Define the account number subfield position (optional). Refer to “Defining the 

Account Number Subfield Position” in Section 2 of the IPS Module Parameters 

Operating Guide. 

4. Add account numbers for each market segment. Refer to “Adding or Deleting Account 

Numbers for Market Segments” in Section 2 of the IPS Module Parameters Operating 

Guide. 

5. Add account number subfields for each market segment. Refer to “Adding, Changing, 

or Deleting an Exception RT for an Endpoint” in Section 2 of the IPS Module 

Parameters Operating Guide. 

Note: If you are using multiple Customer Parameter (CnntPM) files and a market 

segment exists in several files, define the market segment for each file in which 

it exists. 

Account Number Subfield 

If your account numbering scheme is set up so that a group of digits in the account 

number can be used to identify the type of account, you can define an account number 

subfield to represent each account type, rather than defining individual account numbers. 

For example, if all your personal account numbers begin with 123, define the first three 

digits of the account number as the subfield position. Then, when you define account 

numbers for the market segment, you only have to enter 123 to indicate all personal 

account numbers, rather than having to enter all of the individual account numbers. 

5–6 3981 6061–201


Defining the account number subfield position does not restrict you to only defining 

subfields for a market segment; you can enter both account numbers and account number 

subfields for a market segment. However, you can only define one account number 

subfield position for each CnntPM File. An account number or subfield cannot be defined 

in more than one market segment per CnntPM File. 

3981 6061–201 5–7


Holidays and Other Closed Days 

Categories of Holidays and Closed Days 

Holidays and other closed days are divided into three categories: 

Category Description 

Standard holidays Holidays that are recognized nationwide, such as Thanksgiving, 

when all banks, endpoints, or sendpoints are closed. 

Nonstandard holidays Holidays that are not recognized nationwide, such as state, local, 

or provincial holidays. 

Because nonstandard holidays do not apply to all banks, you can 

define these holidays individually for each endpoint and sendpoint 

at the time when you set up the bank schedule and the customer 

schedules. Refer to “Creating the Holiday Schedule, the Bank 

Schedule, and the Customer Schedules” in Section 2 of the IPS 

Module Parameters Operating Guide. You can redefine and update 

the nonstandard holidays for any endpoint or sendpoint as needed. 

Closed days Days when an individual bank is closed on a regular basis, such as 

Saturdays, Sundays, or both. 

Defining Holidays for Current and Future Years 

Because closed days vary from bank to bank, you can specify 

these closed days individually for each endpoint or sendpoint. You 

can also update the information as needed. Refer to “Creating the 

Holiday Schedule, the Bank Schedule, and the Customer 

Schedules” in Section 2 of the IPS Module Parameters Operating 

Guide. 

You can define standard holidays and nonstandard holidays for the present year and for 

future years if you choose. If you define either of these categories of holidays for the 

present year only, remember to review and change the dates at the beginning of each new 

calendar year. 

How IPS Uses Holiday and Closed Day Information 

Holiday and closed day information is recorded by the Availability and Pricing File Build 

(APB) Program in the Closed Day (CLOt) File. The CLOt File, in turn, is used by the On-Us 

Extraction (ONE), Master and Detail Print (MDP), and Remote Master and Detail Print 

(RMD) programs when taking holidays and closed days into account for the calculation of 

customer and bank float. 

• The ONE Program uses data in the CLOt File to compute the amount of funds 

becoming available to the customer over the next 16 calendar days. 

5–8 3981 6061–201


• The MDP and RMD programs use the CLOt File to determine how many calendar days 

funds are held for that sendpoint. Nonbusiness days at the sendpoint and endpoint 

can increase the number of calendar days the funds are held. 

The following example illustrates how the MDP and RMD programs use the information in 

the CLOt File and the availability formula to calculate the collection period. 

Example 

An item leaves your institution (the sendpoint) and arrives at the endpoint on Thursday 

afternoon. By Saturday afternoon, the funds have been held two calendar days, but since 

the endpoint was closed on Friday, only one business day has passed. The endpoint is 

also closed on Sunday, so the endpoint does not clear the funds until Monday afternoon. 

Your institution is closed on Monday, so the funds are not available to your institution 

until Tuesday morning. 

Schedule Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 

SENDPOINT Closed Closed Open Open Open Closed Open 

ENDPOINT Closed Open Open Open Open Closed Open 

Two business days of availability causes the funds to be held for five calendar days. The 

Cash Letter Settlement Availability Report reflects this delay in the collection period. 

Defining Holiday and Closed Day Information for Both Customer 

and Bank Availability and Pricing 

The Availability and Pricing Module uses standard and nonstandard holiday information 

and closed day information to compute both the bank schedule and customer schedules. 

Even if you are only using the customer availability and pricing portion, define 

nonstandard holidays and closed days for each endpoint, unless you do not need to use 

the endpoint closed day schedule when adjusting availability and pricing. 

Note: If you are using the customer availability and pricing portion, standard 

holiday schedules do not relate to each endpoint. 

3981 6061–201 5–9


How the Availability and Pricing Module Works 

Types of Availability and Pricing Information 

Required Data 

The Availability and Pricing Module computes the following data: 

Type Description 

Availability—Bank The availability your bank can expect on the funds in each cash 

letter sent to another bank 

Availability—Customer The availability your customer can expect on the funds in each 

deposit 

Pricing—Bank The item charge to your bank for items in each cash letter sent to 

another bank 

Pricing—Customer The item charge to your customer for items in each deposit 

The Availability and Pricing Module uses the data you enter on the parameter input 

screens of the Availability and Pricing Generator (APG) Program to create a bank 

schedule for your bank, multiple customer schedules for your bank's customers, and a 

holiday schedule. Refer to Section 2 in the V Series Item Processing System Modules 

Parameters Operating Guide. These schedules provide a means of storing and retrieving 

detailed information on availability, pricing, and bank holidays. Using the data in these 

schedules, the Availability and Pricing Module assigns availability and pricing to 

documents processed by IPS. 

Bank Schedule 

The bank schedule is a listing of availability and pricing information pertaining to each of 

the endpoints to which your bank sends transit documents. This information includes: 

• The availability of funds that each endpoint bank customarily assigns to transit 

documents from your bank 

• The processing fees customarily charged by each bank 

Customer Schedules 

Customer schedules are listings of availability and pricing information arranged by the 

routing and transit (RT) number that specify the availability and pricing data for your 

bank's customer accounts. Each group of customer accounts is called a market segment. 

You can create a different customer schedule for each market segment or for each set of 

similar market segments. The information in each customer schedule includes: 

• Availability of funds assigned by your bank to each RT number in a customer deposit 

• The processing fees customarily charged by your bank 

5–10 3981 6061–201


Holiday Schedule 

The holiday schedule provides a record of the days on which individual banks are closed, 

either because of standard or nonstandard holidays, or because of regularly scheduled 

closed days. This information is used to calculate the number of days of availability 

assigned to a given document. 

Factors Affecting Availability and Pricing 

Some of the factors in bank and customer schedules that can affect availability and pricing 

are as follows: 

• Day of the week that the document is processed 

• Time of the day that the document is processed 

• Intermediate routing of the document 

• Final destination of the document 

• Dollar amount of processed documents (customer schedules only) 

3981 6061–201 5–11


Function of the Availability and Pricing Module 

The following figure shows the function of the Availability and Pricing Module: 

5–12 3981 6061–201

How IPS Uses Availability and Pricing Module Data 


IPS uses the bank schedule and customer schedules for different purposes when it assigns 

availability and pricing to processed documents. 

• The bank schedule is used by IPS as follows: 

− The Master and Detail Print (MDP) and Remote Master and Detail Print (RMD) 

programs use the bank schedule to assign transit document float and pricing data 

for outgoing cash letters, and stores this information in the Cash Letter History 

(CLHt) File. 

− The Cash Letter Settlement (CLS) Program prints the bank schedule data stored in 

the CLHt File on the Cash Letter Settlement Availability Report and the Cash 

Letter Pricing Report. 

• The customer schedule is used by the On-Us Extraction (ONE) Program as follows: 

− Assigns availability and pricing to each customer deposit 

− Records availability and pricing on the ONE tape 

How Banks Use Availability and Pricing Module Data 

Your bank uses the Availability and Pricing Module data as follows: 

• Your general ledger department uses the Availability and Pricing Module data on the 

Cash Letter Settlement Availability Report and Cash Letter Pricing Report to update 

Cash-Items-in-Process-of-Collection (CIPC) accounts and other due-from accounts. 

• Your posting department uses the Availability and Pricing Module data on the ONE 

tape to update your customers' accounts. 

3981 6061–201 5–13


Bank Schedule Data 

Bank File 

One Bank (BNKt) File is generated for each bank schedule. The bank schedule contains 

one group of availability and pricing data for each endpoint. 

The following figure shows the relationship between the BNKt File and the bank schedule: 

Bank Schedule 

Bank schedules are set up with two types of data: 

Availability 

Availability data indicates when funds from outgoing cash letters become available to your 

bank. Availability is expressed as a formula showing the number of business days before a 

given percentage of the funds become available for use. Refer to “Availability” in Section 

5 of the IPS Technical Overview. 

5–14 3981 6061–201


Pricing 

Pricing data indicates the item charges applied to the bank by the receiving institution for 

each item in a cash letter. Pricing is expressed as cents in decimal form. Refer to “Bank 

Schedule Charges” in Section 5 of the IPS Technical Overview. 

Organization of the Bank Schedule 

The bank schedule is organized by endpoint number. The endpoint number is a userdefined 

number that indicates the next destination and the cash letter type for the 

processed documents. 

The bank schedule contains a different set of availability and pricing data for each 

endpoint number. You can specify a maximum of one availability and two item charges 

per day for each endpoint number in the bank schedule. 

Variables for Each Endpoint 

For each endpoint number in the bank schedule, the following variables can determine 

availability and pricing: 

Variable Description 

Day of week You can vary bank availability and pricing by day of the week to 

account for such factors as different courier schedules. 

Deadline For each day of the week, you can specify both a regular and a 

premium deadline, corresponding to the time that Cash Letter 

Recaps are printed. You can then define different item charges 

for the two types of deadlines. Refer to “Bank and Customer 

Schedule Deadlines” in Section 5 of the IPS Technical Overview. 

3981 6061–201 5–15


Example of the Effect of Bank Schedule Variables 

The following figure illustrates the organization of a bank schedule and provides specific 

information for the examples that follow: 

For the purposes of the following examples, assume that your bank sends a document to 

endpoint number 12345678 on Thursday. 

Regular Deadline 

If you print cash letters for endpoint 12345678 before the regular deadline (1 p.m.), it 

receives the following treatment: 

• Item charge is 1.75 cents. 

• Availability is 2:25 (meaning that 25 percent of the funds is available in two business 

days and the remaining 75 percent of the funds is available in three business days). 

Premium Deadline 

If you print cash letters for endpoint 12345678 after the regular deadline (1 p.m.) but 

before the premium deadline (5 p.m.), it receives the following treatment: 


• Availability is 2:25 (meaning that 25 percent of the funds is available in two business 

days and the remaining 75 percent of the funds is available in three business days). 

5–16 3981 6061–201


After Premium Deadline 

If you print cash letters for endpoint 12345678 after the regular (1 p.m.) and premium 

(5 p.m.) deadlines, it receives the following treatment: 


• Availability is 3:25 (add one business day of availability to the availability assigned to 

the regular deadline, meaning that 25 percent of the funds is available in three 

business days and the remaining 75 percent of the funds is available in four business 

days). 

Interface Between Bank Schedule and IPS 

The Master and Detail Print (MDP) and Remote Master and Detail Print (RMD) programs 

use the bank schedule data to update the Cash Letter History (CLHt) File. The CLHt File 

enables you to update your general ledger accounts. The MDP and RMD programs create 

a record for each cash letter at the time the Cash Letter Recap is printed. This record 

includes the following information for each cash letter: 

• Availability of funds projected over the next 16-day period, with adjustments for 

holidays and other closed days 

• Summary of item charges in the cash letter 

The record is placed in the CLHt File and stored for up to 365 days to allow you to 

reconcile item charges and to report monthly, quarterly, or yearly trends. 

3981 6061–201 5–17


Customer Schedule Data 

Cnnt Files and Annt Files 

The Account (Annt) File contains data on the types of accounts offered by your bank. One 

Annt File is associated with each Customer (Cnnt) File. For example, the A15t File is 

associated with the C15t File. 

The Closed Day (CLOt) File contains information about open and closed days of endpoints 

and sendpoints. 

The following figure shows the relationship between Cnnt Files and Annt Files: 

You can create from 1 through 99 Cnnt files. Your bank can associate each sort pattern it 

uses with a different Cnnt File. This feature allows you to assign different availability and 

pricing to branch offices or to institutions for which you perform item processing. 

5–18 3981 6061–201


Each Cnnt File contains from 1 through 99 customer schedules. Customer schedules 

contain one group of availability and pricing data for each financial institution on which 

deposited documents are drawn. 

Customer Schedules 

Customer schedules are set up with three types of data: 

Availability 

Availability data indicates when deposited funds are available for customer withdrawal. 

Availability is expressed as a formula showing the number of business days before a 

certain percentage of funds become available. Refer to “Availability” in Section 5 of the 

IPS Technical Overview. 

Pricing 

Pricing data refers to the processing fees or item charges that your bank assesses its 

customers in payment for the processing of deposited items. For more information, refer 

to “Customer Schedule Charges” in Section 5 of the IPS Technical Overview.. 

Reject penalty 

To cover the added cost of rehandling documents rejected during prime pass, you can 

specify a reject penalty that applies to all rejected documents for all routing and transit 

(RT) numbers on a given customer schedule. Your assignment of a reject penalty is 

optional. You can assign a different reject penalty to each customer schedule. You can 

define the reject penalty as additional days of availability, increased item charges, or both. 

Refer to “Maintaining Reject Penalty Parameters for a Customer Schedule” in Section 2 of 

the IPS Module Parameters Operating Guide. 

Organization of the Customer Schedules 

Customer schedules are organized by RT number. The RT number identifies each 

financial institution to which your bank sends transit documents. 

Customer schedules contain a different set of availability and pricing data for each RT 

number. You can specify a maximum of four different availabilities, item charges, and 

endpoints per day. 

3981 6061–201 5–19


Variables for Each RT Number in a Customer Schedule 

For each RT number in a customer schedule, the following variables can determine 

availability and pricing: 

Variable Description 

Day of the week You can vary availability and pricing by day of the week. This 

allows for different item routing or courier schedules. 

Dollar cutoff amount You can assign a different dollar cutoff amount for each day of the 

week. Documents with an amount less than or equal to the dollar 

cutoff amount can receive different availability and pricing from 

documents with an amount greater than the dollar cutoff amount. 

Deadline For each day of the week, you can specify both a first and a 

second deadline, corresponding to the time encoded on the batch 

ticket. You can then define different item charges for the two 

types of deadlines. Refer to “Adding or Deleting Account Numbers 

for Market Segments” in Section 2 of the IPS Module Parameters 

Operating Guide 

You are not required to use all the preceding variables when setting up customer 

schedules. For example, your bank may vary availability and pricing by day of week and 

deadline, but not by dollar cutoff amount. Before setting up customer schedules, 

determine which of the variables you need and specify the values for each. 

5–20 3981 6061–201


Examples of the Effect of Customer Schedule Variables 

The following figure illustrates the organization of a customer schedule and provides 

specific information for the examples that follow: 

For the purposes of the following examples, assume that the example document has an 

amount of $1000, an RT number of 123456780, and that it is processed on a Thursday. 

3981 6061–201 5–21


First Deadline 

If the document is processed before the first deadline (1 p.m.), it receives the following 

treatment: 


• Availability is 2:25 [meaning that 25 percent of the funds ($250) is available in two 

business days and the remaining 75 percent of the funds ($750) is available in three 

business days]. 

• Routing is to endpoint number 22345678. 

Second Deadline 

If the document misses the first deadline (1 p.m.) but is processed before the second 

deadline (5 p.m.), it receives the following treatment: 


• Availability is 2:25 [meaning that 25 percent of the funds ($250) is available in two 




After Second Deadline 

If the document misses both the first (1 p.m.) and second (5 p.m.) deadlines, it receives 

the following treatment: 


• Availability is 3:25 [add one business day of availability to the availability assigned for 

the first deadline, meaning that 25 percent of the funds ($250) is available in three 

business days and the remaining 75 percent of the funds ($750) is available in four 



For the purposes of the following examples, assume that the example document has an 

amount of $2000, an RT number of 123456780, and that it is processed on a Thursday. 

First Deadline 

If the document is processed before the first deadline (1 p.m.), it receives the following 

treatment: 


• Availability is 1:25 [meaning that 25 percent of the funds ($500) is available in one 

business day and the remaining 75 percent of the funds ($1500) is available in two 



5–22 3981 6061–201


Second Deadline 

If the document misses the first deadline (1 p.m.) but is processed before the second 

deadline (5 p.m.), it receives the following treatment: 


• Availability is 3:50 [meaning that 50 percent of the funds ($1000) is available in three 

business days and the remaining 50 percent of the funds ($1000) is available in four 



After Second Deadline 

If the document misses both the first (1 p.m.) and second (5 p.m.) deadlines, it receives 

the following treatment: 


• Availability is 2:25 [add one business day of availability to the availability assigned for 

the first deadline, meaning that 25 percent of the funds ($500) is available in two 




Multiple CnntPM Files 

A Customer Parameter (CnntPM) File is a collection of the customer schedules to be used 

with a particular sort pattern. (You can use a CnntPM File with more than one sort 

pattern.) The Availability and Pricing Module works if you define only one CnntPM File, 

but you can define up to 99 files. 

Defining multiple CnntPM files enables you to do the following: 

• Tailor each CnntPM File to a specific sort pattern so that you can accommodate 

different processing conditions during the day 

• Vary the availability and pricing data for your branches, correspondent banks, or both 

Interface Between Customer Schedule Data and IPS 

The Availability and Pricing Module computes a float and pricing record and places it in 

the On-Us Extraction (ONEtp1) File for each customer deposit. The float and pricing 

record includes the following information for each customer deposit: 

• Availability of funds distributed over a 16-day period and adjusted for holidays and 

closed days 

• Total item charge for each deposit 

Float is expressed as a dollar amount, and is computed by applying the availability 

formula to the dollar amount of the item, using the business date of the job and the time 

that is encoded on the batch ticket. 

3981 6061–201 5–23


During the execution of the On-Us Extraction (ONE) Program, IPS uses data from the 

Availability and Pricing Module to create a customer float and pricing record for each 

customer deposit. This record is placed on the ONE tape that is used to update customer 

accounts. 

5–24 3981 6061–201


Bank and Customer Schedule Deadlines 

A deadline is a dividing time in a bank's document processing cycle. Documents that 

reach a certain point in the processing before the deadline receive more favorable 

availability and pricing than documents that reach that point after the deadline. 

Documents are considered to meet a deadline for a bank schedule if the cash letter in 

which they are included is printed at the deadline time or earlier. Documents are 

considered to meet a deadline for a customer schedule if the time encoded on their batch 

ticket is the deadline time or earlier. 

You can specify an earlier and a later deadline for each business day. For a bank schedule 

the earlier deadline is the REGULAR deadline, and the later deadline is the PREMIUM 

deadline. For a customer schedule the earlier deadline is the FIRST deadline, and the later 

deadline is the SECOND deadline. 

Defining Bank Schedule Deadlines 

For any given endpoint on the bank schedule and for any day that endpoint is open, you 

have three options for defining deadlines: 

Both Regular and Premium Deadlines 

When you choose to define both regular and premium deadlines for a given day, the effect 

on availability and pricing is shown in the following table: 

Time That Cash Letter 

Recap Is Printed 

AT or BEFORE the regular 

deadline 

AFTER the regular deadline, but 

BEFORE the premium deadline 

Effect on Availability and Pricing 

Documents are assigned the availability and pricing specified for 

the REGULAR deadline. 


the PREMIUM deadline. 

AFTER the premium deadline An additional day of availability is added and the REGULAR 

deadline charge is used for pricing. 

3981 6061–201 5–25


Only Regular Deadlines 

When you choose to define one deadline only, it must be the regular deadline and its 

specifications affect the availability and pricing for that day as shown in the following 

table: 

Time That Cash Letter 

Recap Is Printed 

AT or BEFORE the regular 

deadline 



the REGULAR deadline. 

AFTER the regular deadline An additional day of availabiltiy is added, and the REGULAR 

deadline charge is used for pricing. 

No Deadlines 

If you choose to define no deadlines, the item charge specified beside REGULAR CHARGE 

is used. In this case, availability and pricing do not reflect missed deadlines. 

Defining Customer Schedule Deadlines 

For any given RT on the customer schedule and for any day that RT is open, you have 

three options for defining deadlines: 

Both First and Second Deadlines 

When you choose to define both first and second deadlines for a given day, the effect on 

availability and pricing is shown in the following table: 

Time Encoded on Batch 

Ticket 

AT or BEFORE the first deadline 

AFTER the first deadline, but 

BEFORE the second deadline 



the FIRST deadline. 


the SECOND deadline. 

AFTER the second deadline An additional day of availability is added and the FIRST deadline 

charge is used for pricing. 

5–26 3981 6061–201


Only First Deadlines 

When you choose to define one deadline only, it must be the first deadline and its 

specifications affect the availability and pricing for that day as shown in the following 

table: 

Time Encoded On Batch 

Ticket 

AT or BEFORE the first 

deadline 



the FIRST deadline. 

AFTER the first deadline An additional day of availabiltiy is added, and the FIRST deadline 

charge is used for pricing. 

No Deadlines 

If you choose to define no deadlines, the item charge specified beside FIRST CHARGE is 

used. In this case, availability and pricing do not reflect missed deadlines. 

Parts of the Deadline Fields 

The deadline field has five characters: 

• The first four characters (0001–2400) express time of day on a 24-hour clock. 

• The fifth character (P, blank, or N) is the calendar day indicator—an alphabetical 

code showing on which calendar day the deadline time specified in the first four 

characters falls. For more information, refer to "Determining the Calendar Day 

Indicator," in this block. 

− If the deadline falls on the previous calendar day, enter P in the calendar day 

indicator position. 

− If the deadline falls on the current calendar day, leave the calendar day indicator 

position blank. 

− If the deadline falls on the next calendar day, enter N in the calendar day indicator 

position. 

3981 6061–201 5–27


Determining the Calendar Day Indicator 

The fifth character of the deadline field is the calendar day indicator; it is a means of 

relating calendar day and business day. 

• A calendar day begins and ends at midnight. 

• A bank's business day begins and ends with that bank's general ledger cutoff time, 

which could be any time of day. A bank's business day for calculating customer 

availability and pricing begins and ends with that bank's customer ledger cutoff time, 

which could be any time of day. 

• A business day, like a calendar day, is named according to its incremental order in the 

month, such as June 29 or September 5. But a business day and a calendar day with 

the same name may not include identical hours. 

• If the bank's general ledger or customer ledger cutoff time is any time other than 

midnight, the business day overlaps portions of two calendar days. 

− The business day can overlap backward to include part of the previous calendar 

day as well as part of the current calendar day. For example, business day May 18 

could overlap portions of calendar days May 17 and May 18. 

− The business day can also overlap forward to include part of the current calendar 

day and part of the next calendar day. For example, business day May 18 could 

overlap portions of calendar days May 18 and May 19. 

5–28 3981 6061–201


• The pattern of overlap of business days on calendar days is determined by when the 

bank's general ledger or customer ledger cutoff occurs each day. 

− If the general ledger or customer ledger cutoff is before noon, then the business 

day overlaps forward to include a portion of the next calendar day, as illustrated 

in the following figure: 

− If the general ledger or customer ledger cutoff is noon or after, then the business 

day overlaps portions of the previous and the current calendar days, as illustrated 

in the following figure: 

3981 6061–201 5–29


Relationship Between Deadlines and Calendar Days 

Because of the overlap of business days on calendar days, a deadline occurring in a given 

business day could fall on either of two calendar days. 

• The previous or current calendar day 

• The next or current calendar day 

The following figures illustrate the effect of the timing of the general ledger or customer 

ledger cutoff on deadlines and calendar days: 

5–30 3981 6061–201


3981 6061–201 5–31


Bank Schedule Charges 

Definition and Format of Item Charges 

An item charge is a processing fee that your bank is charged for each debit. The item 

charge you set for a given endpoint or routing and transit (RT) number is based on your 

past experience with that institution's charges. 

The item charge (.0000 to .9999) is expressed as cents in decimal form. For example, an 

item charge of .0125 means 1.25 cents for each document processed. 

Number of Charges Per Endpoint 

On the bank schedule, you can specify up to two charges per day for each endpoint 

number in the schedule. 

Regular Charges and Premium Charges 

The two charges per day per endpoint on the bank schedule are known as regular charges 

for documents that meet the regular deadline, and premium charges for documents that 

miss the regular deadline but meet the premium deadline. 

Requirements for Specifying Regular and Premium Charges 

On the bank schedule you can define both regular and premium charges for any endpoint 

and for any day that the endpoint is open. 

The following conditions apply: 

• If you specify a premium deadline, you must specify a premium charge. 

• If you do not specify charges for a given day, the item charge is zero. 

5–32 3981 6061–201

Customer Schedule Charges 

Definition and Format of Item Charges 


An item charge is a processing fee that your bank charges for each debit document that it 

handles. 

The item charge (.0000 to .9999) is expressed as cents in decimal form. For example, an 

item charge of .0125 means 1.25 cents for each document processed. 

Number of Charges per RT Number 

You can specify up to four separate charges per day for each RT number in the customer 

schedule. 

• If you have specified a second deadline, you must specify an item charge for the 

second deadline. 

• If you do not specify any charges for a given day, the item charge is zero. 

Dollar Cutoff Amount 

The Availability and Pricing Module enables you to sort your transit documents into two 

categories: those with lower dollar amounts, and those with higher dollar amounts. You 

can assign different availability and pricing to each category. The dollar cutoff amount is 

the dividing line between the lower and higher dollar amounts. You can set the dollar 

cutoff amount at a different value for each day with each RT number in any customer 

schedule. The amount can be from $10.00 through$99,990. 

Relationship of Charges to First and Second Deadlines 

Each of the four charges on the customer schedule is related to one of the four potential 

deadlines. The reason for four possible deadlines is because the customer schedule 

provides for two sets of first and second deadlines: 

• One set of deadlines is for documents whose amount is less than or equal to the dollar 

cutoff amount. 

• The other set of deadlines is for documents whose amount is greater than the dollar 

cutoff amount. 

3981 6061–201 5–33


Differences Between Customer and Bank Availability 

and Pricing 

The following table presents the differences between customer and bank availability and 

pricing: 

Customer Bank 

Multiple Customer (Cnnt) files One Bank (BNKt) File 

Multiple customer schedules One bank schedule 

Customer schedules organized 

by the routing and transit (RT) 

number 

Availability and pricing varied by 

day of week, amount, and 

deadline 

Availability and pricing 

computed at the deposit level 

Float assigned on the business 

date of the job 

Float assignment based on the 

time encoded on each batch 

ticket of a job 

Deadlines called first and 

second 

Bank schedule organized by endpoint number 

Availability and pricing varied by day of week and deadline 

Availability and pricing computed at the outgoing cash letter level 

Float assigned on the current system date, as adjusted by the 

general ledger cutoff, the sendpoint closed days, and the endpoint 

closed days 

Float assignment based on the date and time that Cash Letter 

Recaps are printed 

Deadlines called regular and premium 

5–34 3981 6061–201

Section 6 

REX Program Overview 

REX Program Overview ..................................................... 6–2 

Data Selection Process...................................................... 6–4 

3981 6061–201 6–1



The Real-Time Extraction Service (REX) Program, a stand-alone program, extracts 

selected data from the IPS database using queue requests entered in the Real-Time 

Extraction Queue (REQt) File by the Computer Output to Microfiche (COM), Corrections 

(COR), Master and Detail Print (MDP), Remote Master and Detail Print (RMD), and port 

programs. 

The REX Program extracts data at one of the following points during the processing cycle, 

depending on the extraction requests entered through the Environment Generator (ENV) 

Program: 

• End of block 

• End of prime job 

• End of repass job 

• Completion of bundle request 

• Completion of Cash Letter Recap request 

The existing routines in the REX Program call the Process Extracted Data stub, which 

contains user-written code that processes the extracted data. For more information refer 

to “Changing the REX Program” in Section 7 of the IPS Installation Guide. The code in 

the Process Extracted Data stub may call user-written routines outside itself. 

6–2 3981 6061–201


The following figure illustrates the transfer of data within the REX Program: 

Description 

• Existing Routines in the REX Program—the portion of the REX Program that calls the 

Process Extraction Data stub. 

• Process Extraction Data Stub—the user-written routine that determines how the 

extracted data is processed. It is required for processing the extracted data. 

• User Routines—other user-written routines that determine how the extracted data is 

processed. These routines are optional. 

• Program Memory—the working storage portion of the REX Program that contains the 

extracted data. 

3981 6061–201 6–3


Data Selection Process 

The Environment Generator (ENV) Program is used to determine the data to be extracted 

by the Real-Time Extraction Service (REX) Program. For more information refer to 

Section 10 in the V Series Item Processing System Operating Guide. 

The Master and Detail Print (MDP), Remote Master and Detail Print (RMD), Computer 

Output to Microfiche (COM), Corrections (COR), and port programs access the 

Environment (ENVt) File to identify what extraction requests to make during the 

processing cycle. These extraction requests are queued in the Real-Time Extraction 

Queue (REQt) File. 

The REX Program uses the queue requests in the REQt File to process the extracted data. 

Refer to “REX Program Overview” in Section 6 of the IPS Technical Overview. 

The following figure illustrates the flow of data within IPS: 

6–4 3981 6061–201

Section 7 


Imaging Overview .............................................................. 7–2 

Definition of System Differences ....................................... 7–3 

ICPS Program Names and Mnemonics ............................. 7–4 

IXPS Program Names and Mnemonics ............................. 7–6 

CIE Program Names and Mnemonics ............................... 7–6 

ICPS Programs That Update and Access IPS Files............ 7–7 

IXPS Programs That Update and Access IPS Files............ 7–9 

CIE Programs That Update and Access IPS Files.............. 7–9 

ICMs Used with ICPS........................................................ 7–10 

ICMs Used with IXPS ........................................................ 7–11 

ICMs Used with CIE .......................................................... 7–11 

3981 6061–201 7–1


Imaging Overview 

The Image Check Processing System (ICPS) and Image Export Processing System (IXPS) 

are software packages designed to run on Image Item Processing System (IIPS) hardware. 

ICPS uses imaging technology to capture document images during prime pass on highspeed 

document processors at a central or remote site, which improves the speed and 

efficiency of an institution's proof and transit operations. IXPS incorporates ICPS 

functions to provide code-line data and images to an image statement print application 

and images on tape for use in other customer applications. For statement printing, IXPS 

increases the efficiency of producing customer statement mailings and reduces costs by 

significantly reducing the weight of those mailings. 

Refer to the Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Functional Overview for a description 

of the individual and combined functions of ICPS. Refer to the IXPS Installation, 

Administration, and Operations Guide for a description of the functions of IXPS. 

7–2 3981 6061–201

Definition of System Differences 

IPS Database 


IPS and the Image Check Processing System (ICPS) work together to increase the speed 

of your institution's check processing. Although the operators for the two systems may 

work on different hardware and the operator functions may seem separate, the systems 

interact in a complex manner. 

This becomes most apparent during installation and when confronting system errors. For 

systems administrators and supervisors, deciding where to look for answers to problems 

can be complicated. This discussion of the differences between IPS and ICPS helps in 

those situations. 

Both systems have programs that run on the host processor, but only IPS programs access 

or update the IPS database without the ICPS interface. 

ICMs: How the Systems Communicate 

The interface between the two systems is accomplished through independently compiled 

modules (ICMs). These ICMs are small sections of code that are bound into the programs 

when the programs are compiled. When these ICMs are compiled into an ICPS program, 

the program can access the IPS database. 

There are also ICMs that must be compiled into IPS programs during the installation of 

IPS with ICPS. For more information on installing IPS with ICPS, refer to “ICPS Interface 

Installation Checklist” in Section 1 of the IPS Installation Guide. 

For more information for compiling programs with ICMs, refer to the Image Check 

Processing System (ICPS) Installation and Maintenance Guide. 

System Error Conditions 

Knowing the differences between the systems becomes imperative when dealing with 

error conditions. When some part of the system fails, the operator or supervisor must 

know which documentation to use to correct the problem. 

When the system displays an error message, it also displays the name of the program that 

generated the error condition. To determine which set of documentation you should use, 

identify which program generated the error message, and identify to which system the 

program belongs. 

3981 6061–201 7–3


ICPS Program Names and Mnemonics 

The following table contains the mnemonics and names of the programs of the Image 

Check Processing System (ICPS). For information about IPS programs, refer to “IPS 

Program Names and Mnemonics” in Section 3 of the IPS Technical Overview. 

Program Mnemonic Program Name 

AEB Amount Entry Block Supervisor 

AEM Amount Entry Manager 

AEW Amount Entry Workstation Supervisor 

BRD Balancing Download 

BRM Balancing Manager 

BRP Balancing Transaction Processor 

CAC CAR Amount Compare 

DCB Data Correction Block Supervisor 

DCM Data Correction Manager 

DCW Data Correction Workstation Supervisor 

DIJ Delete ICPS Job 

DSP Download Sort Patterns 

ICA ICPS CAR Analysis 

IFC ICPS File Conversion 

IFU ICPS File Utility 

IHR ICPS Host Reports 

IIF Initialize ICPS Files 

IPM ICPS Manager 

IRT Image Removal Task 

ISA Image Status Analyzer 

ISP ICPS Statistics Post 

IWR ICPS Workstation Reports 

MHC Multiple Host Communication 

PEH Power Encode Handler 

RII Recover ICPS ISAM Files 

RIP Reimage Preparation 

7–4 3981 6061–201


SII SRM Space Inquiry 

STM Status Manager 


3981 6061–201 7–5


IXPS Program Names and Mnemonics 

The following table contains the mnemonics and names of the programs of the Image 

Export Processing System (IXPS) programs that run on the V Series host. IPS 

communicates with the IEC, IEE, and IEM programs through the ICPS Manager (IPM) 

Program using IPS Program commands. 

For more information about ICPS programs, refer to “ICPS Program Names and 

Mnemonics” in Section 7 of this overview. 


IEC Image Export Communicate with U 6000 

IED Image Export Debug Utility 

IEE Image Export Extract 

IEF Image Export File Maintenance 

IEI Image Export ISAM Recovery 

IEM Image Export Manager 

IEP Image Export Print Reports 

IET Image Export Tape Verify 

CIE Program Names and Mnemonics 

The following table contains the mnemonics and names of the programs of the Common 

Image Export (CIE) application that run on the V Series host. IPS communicates with the 

Common Image Export Manager (CIM) program through the ICPS Manager (IPM) 

Program using IPS Program commands. 

For more information about ICPS programs, refer to “ICPS Program Names and 

Mnemonics” in Section 7 of this overview. 


CIM Common Image Export Manager 

CIX Common Image Export Extract 

IED Image Export Debug Utility 

IEF Image Export File Maintenance 

IEI Image Export ISAM Recovery 

7–6 3981 6061–201


ICPS Programs That Update and Access IPS Files 

The following table lists the IPS files updated and accessed by each program in the Image 

Check Processing System (ICPS). For similar information about IPS programs, refer to 

“Files Updated and Accessed by IPS Programs” in Section 3 of the IPS Technical 

Overview. 

ICPS Program 

Mnemonic 

Files Accessed 

and Updated by 

Program Files Accessed but Not Updated by Program 

AEB None ENVt 

AEM None ENVt 

AEW None BPTt, DIRt, ENVt, INSt, OPRt 

BRD None BPTt, DIRt, ENVt, INSt, Rbbbbt, TOTt 

BRM ACQt, PCQt BPTt, DIRt, ENVt, Rbbbbt, TOTt 

BRP PCQt BPTt, DIRt, ENVt, TOTt 

CAC None DIRt, ENVt 

DCB None ENVt 

DCM None BPTt, DIRt, ENVt 

DCW None BPTt, DIRt, ENVt, INSt, OPRt 

DIJ None ENVt 

DSP None CDVt, ENVt, JOBt, SPtfff 

ICA None BKtpnn 

IFU None ENVt 

IHR None DIRt, ENVt, OPRt 

IIF None BPTt, CDVt, ENVt, JOBt, SPtfff 

IPM None ENVt, OPRt 

IRT None BPTt, DIRt, ENVt, Rbbbbt 

ISA None ENVt 

ISP None BWPt, ENVt, OPRt 

IWR None ENVt, INSt 

MHC None ENVt 

PEH None None 

RII None ENVt 

RIP IRBt BPTt, DIRt, ENVt 

3981 6061–201 7–7


ICPS Program 

Mnemonic 

Files Accessed 

and Updated by 

Program Files Accessed but Not Updated by Program 

SII None BPTt, CTLt, ENVt 

STM PCQt BPTt, DIRt, ENVt, OPRt, TOTt 

7–8 3981 6061–201


IXPS Programs That Update and Access IPS Files 

The following table lists the IPS files updated and accessed by each V Series program in 

the Image Export Processing System (IXPS). For information about all IPS files accessed 

and updated by ICMs, refer to “ICMs That Update and Access IPS Files” in Section 3 . 

IXPS 

Program 

Through 

ICM 

(Service) 

Files Accessed and Updated by 

Program 

IEC None None ENVt 

IED None None ENVt 

IEE None None ENVt 

I03 None DIRt None 

I05 BPTt None None 

I09 None CORt, ITMt None 

I30 None TOTt None 

I31 None ACTt, ADTt, SERt None 

IEF None None ENVt 

IEI None None ENVt 

IEM None None ENVt, EXPt 

I03 None DIRt None 

I05 BPTt None None 

IEP None None ENVt 

IET None None ENVt 

Files Accessed but Not Updated 

by Program 

CIE Programs That Update and Access IPS Files 

The following table lists the IPS files updated and accessed by each V Series program in 

the Common Image Export (CIE) Application. For information about all IPS files 

accessed and updated by ICMs, refer to “ICMs That Update and Access IPS Files” in 

Section 3 . 

CIE 

Program 

Through 

ICM 

(Service) 

Files Accessed and Updated by 

Program 

CIM None BPTt ENVt , BPTt 

CIX None None ENVt 

Files Accessed but Not Updated 

by Program 

3981 6061–201 7–9


ICMs Used with ICPS 


the base tape and are used with the Image Check Processing System (ICPS). 

ICM ICM Name 

I01 Amount Entry Services 

I02 Data Correction Services 

I03 Get Active Job/Blk Data Service 

I04 Update Job Statuses 

I05 Update Block Statuses 

I06 Get Pull List Service 

I07 Power Encode Inquiry Service 

I08 Workflow Stats Extract 

I09 BAR Get Item Data Service 

I10 Update AR Status Service 

I11 Store Interim Corrections Service 

I12 Get User Keys Data 

I13 Close Out Data Correction Block 


7–10 3981 6061–201

ICMs Used with IXPS 



the base IPS tape and used with the Image Export Processing System (IXPS) programs. 

ICM ICM Name 





I31 Code-Line Conversion Service 

ICMs Used with CIE 


the base IPS tape and used with the Common Image Export (CIE) programs. 

ICM ICM Name 





3981 6061–201 7–11

Glossary 

A 

ABA 

See American Bankers Association. 

ABA number 

The last four digits of the RT Field. It identifies state and federal commercial banks and 

helps route unpaid checks in transit. 

abort 

A process that ends a program task when an irrecoverable error or malfunction has 

occurred. 

account conversion 

A parameter-driven process that changes the routing and transit number and account 

number on the MICR code line to correspond to the routing and transit number and the 

account number in the DDA system used by the financial institution. 

account number 

A numerical reference used by a financial institution to identify its accounts. Account 

numbers are used in proof, sorting, and bookkeeping operations, and may be used to 

describe the type of account. 

Account Number Field 

The field on the MICR code line that contains the account number. 

account number subfield 

A portion of the Account Number Field that may be used to identify a type of account. 

account pull item 

An exception item outsorted by RT and account numbers, usually during cycle sort 

processing. 

account range table 

A list of high and low numbers representing ranges for RT and account numbers, 

optionally used during split of a book for fine sort. 

account separator ticket 

A control ticket used to separate unique RT or account numbers during fine sort. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–1

Glossary 

account transfer 

A feature that allows the system to treat two or more accounts (a maximum of five) as one 

account during fine sort. Items for the accounts are sorted to the same pocket and are not 

separated with an account separator ticket. 

ACH 

ADF 

See Automated Clearinghouse. 

See ASCII delimited file. 

adjustment 

Any correcting entry to the balance of an account. For example, adjustments may result 

during cash letter processing for items listed but not enclosed, items enclosed but not 

listed, and discrepancies between listed and actual item amounts. 

Advice Generation System (AGS) 

A separately priced module of the Image Check Processing System that generates 

customer advices automatically based on user-defined parameters and text files. 

alpha keyboard 

An optional, detachable keyboard for entering alphanumeric characters on a 

DP 500document processor. 

alternative parent 

A four-digit number consisting of a family ID and parent pass number, entered as a 

parameter for the Repass Alternative Generator (RAG) Program. 

American Bankers Association (ABA) 

A voluntary organization of financial institutions developed to promote the general 

welfare and usefulness of commercial banks and other financial institutions. 

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards 

Data processing standards used throughout the United States. 

American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) 

A code that uses seven or eight binary positions to represent a single character. 

amount entry 

The ICPS activity that allows an operator to view images, enter amounts, and optionally 

enter transaction codes. 

Amount Field 

The field of the MICR code line that contains the item amount. 

ANSI standards 

See American National Standards Institute standards. 

Glossary–2 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

ARE type code 

One-digit code set in the prime job parameters that instructs the Automated 

Reconcilement Extraction (ARE) Program to use a particular type of reconcilement for a 

job. The ARE Program creates an Automated Reconcilement Interface (Rbbbbt) File in 

one of two formats. One format is used with the Corrections (COR) Program, and the 

other format is used with ICPS Balancing. 

argument 

A sort pattern key combined with a value. It specifies the place for a search routine to 

look for information, as well as the information to look for. See also duplicate major 

argument, major argument, range argument, and single argument. 

argument library 

An ASCII text file without word processing formatting codes that contains statements 

specifying how items are assigned to selectors (and therefore sorted to the correct 

pockets). 

ASCII 

See American Standard Code for Information Interchange. 

ASCII delimited file 

A common database import and export format in which fields (columns) are separated by 

commas, records (rows) are separated by carriage returns, and data is enclosed in 

quotation marks. 

ATM 

audit list 

See Automated Teller Machine. 

A history of all system responses and operator input messages. Audit lists can be 

produced for high-speed and DP 500 document processors, corrections operators, and 

system operators. 

audit trail 

A term applied to the ability to track a transaction from its point of entry into an 

institution, through proof and encoding, into positions on a customer's record and, 

subsequently, into management reports. This enables an auditor to trace each step of a 

transaction within a financial institution. 

Automated Clearinghouse (ACH) 

A means to exchange paperless debit and credit entries between financial institutions 

usually by magnetic tape media. These debit and credit entries include such items as 

government, insurance, and utility company payments; depository transfer transactions; 

and payroll, pension, and stock dividend deposits. 

automated reconcilement 

An application that uses the Automated Reconcilement Extraction (ARE) Program output 

consisting of detailed item information in blocks to balance item processing work. 

Automated Teller Machine (ATM) 

A machine that gives depositors the ability to withdraw funds, make deposits, and perform 

other banking functions without human assistance. ATMs are usually available 24 hours a 

day, seven days a week. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–3

Glossary 

automatic job call 

A feature that enables an operator to automatically schedule all repass jobs associated 

with a particular parent pass. 

automatically started program 

A program that is automatically started by another program. 

AUX Field 

See Auxiliary On-Us Field. 

Auxiliary On-Us (AUX) Field 

The field on the MICR code line containing additional data relevant to the drawee's 

institution such as the check number. This field is located to the left of the Position 44 

Field. 

availability 

The time when deposited funds can be used for withdrawal, investment, or compensation 

for services performed; usually measured in business days from receipt of a deposit. 


A separately priced IPS module that aids in defining the availability of funds and 

processing charges for the financial institution and its customers. This module computes 

float and per-item charges during on-us extraction and for outgoing cash letters. 

B 

balance 

A condition where debits equal credits. 

balancing activity 

The ICPS activity that allows an operator to balance transactions by viewing the images of 

both credits and debits. 

bank 

See commercial bank. 

bank or institution float 

The float levied against an institution. Bank or institution float is determined by the 

endpoint to which the item is sent, the RT number, and the time of the courier deposit at 

the receiving institution. 

bank schedule 

A listing of availability and pricing data for each of the endpoints to which your bank 

sends transit documents. 

bar code 

A code consisting of bars sprayed on an item, used for subsequent identification of that 

item. 

Glossary–4 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

base argument library 

The ASCII text file without formatting codes that contains statements specifying how 

items are assigned to selectors (and therefore sorted to the correct pockets). The base 

argument library may contain a copy statement that copies in a secondary argument 

library. 

batch 

A control level used to group approximately 300 items for processing and reconcilement. 

It is subordinate to the block control level. 

batch number 

A number assigned to each batch of a block. Batch numbers are reset to one at the 

beginning of each block. 

batch proof amount 

The amount by which a batch can be out of balance but still be considered in proof. See 

also proof amount. 

batch ticket 

A control ticket used to assign a batch number to a group of items. 

baud rate 

The transmission rate per second. It is used as a measure of serial data flow between 

computers and communications devices. 

bill of exchange 

Synonym for draft. 

black band 

A band of low reflectance, nonmagnetic ink that can appear on an item on the same side 

as the magnetic characters. When a black-banded item is detected on a document 

processor, the feeder stops. Then, depending on the condition, the feeder is 

programmatically started again or a message is displayed. 

blip 

block 

Synonym for image count mark (ICM). 

A control level that serves as the basic unit of work for reject reentry, print queuing, and 

reconcilement. A block consists of one batch or a group of batches. 

block number 

A unique number assigned to each block within a processing cycle. The block number 

appears in the Amount Field on the pocket separator ticket at the beginning of each block. 

block proof amount 

The amount by which a block can be out of balance but still be considered in proof. See 

also proof amount. 

block ticket 

A control ticket used to mark the end of a block. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–5

Glossary 

block validation 

An automatic process that validates a block number to ensure that it is not the same as 

another block number within the current processing cycle. 

book 

A group of items to be fine sorted during a later sorting pass. Documents are divided into 

books according to a range (or ranges) of code-line values. 

book sort range 

The high and low code-line values that determine which documents are sorted into a 

particular book. 

book split 

The process of dividing a large number of items into smaller groups by a sort field defined 

by the user. The smaller groups, called books, are then fine sorted separately. 

box 

BPL 

A set of contiguous bundles in a pocket. The number of bundles in the set is a userdefined 

parameter for the associated endpoint. A box is sent to one endpoint. 

See Burroughs Programming Language. 

branch bank 

One of a number of banking offices owned and operated by a single parent bank. 

bulk filing 

A filing method in which documents are sorted by statement rendering date (cycle) rather 

than by sort field. Fine sorting is done at the time statements are prepared. 

Bulk Fine Sort and Statement Modules 

Separately priced IPS modules that are used to fine sort documents encoded in a MICR 

font into a user-defined sequence for tasks such as statement rendering. The Bulk Fine 

Sort Module can be used independently of IPS for directed and modulus fine sorts. 

bundle 

A set of contiguous items in a pocket, where the number of items in the set is a userdefined 

parameter for the associated endpoint. 

bundle cut ticket 

A control ticket used in a transit kill pocket to delimit a bundle. 

Burroughs Programming Language (BPL) 

A proprietary programming language similar to an Algorithmic Language (ALGOL). It is 

used in IPS for efficiency in program execution. 

burst printer 

A high-speed printer on a DP 500 document processor. 

business day 

The interval of time that represents the daily accounting period of an institution. 

Glossary–6 3981 6061–201

C 

CAR location 

The boundaries of the courtesy amount box on an item. 

CAR location gauge 

An instrument to help you define the upper left and lower right X, Y coordinates that 

define the courtesy amount location. 

CAR Module 

See courtesy amount read (CAR) Module 

Glossary 

carrier item 

An item constructed to serve as a carrier for another item that cannot be processed by a 

document processor. For example, a carrier could carry a mutilated item through a 

document processor. The data for the item being carried is encoded on the carrier item. 

cash items in process of collection (CIPC) account 

An account indicating the total dollar value of all documents that have been accepted for 

deposit but for which the financial institution has not received funds. 

cash letter 

A set of documents shipped to another institution. It includes the items, the Detail Lists, 

and a Cash Letter Recap. 

cash letter charge 

A charge levied against one institution by another for each cash letter. This charge is 

usually calculated using a contractual charge that varies according to the type of cash 

letter or the type of service provided. 

cash letter number 

A unique number assigned to a cash letter within a given processing cycle. 

Cash Letter Recap 

A listing of the bundles in a given cash letter. 

cash ticket 

An item used as a substitute for cash. It can either be a cash-in ticket or a cash-out ticket. 

cash-in ticket 

A debit ticket that, in lieu of cash received by a teller, is sent to the proof department for 

balancing a given deposit. 

cash-out ticket 

A credit item that represents cash paid out by the teller. 

CBIS 

CCITT 

Acronym for Cincinnati Bell Information Systems. 

Acronym for Consultative Committee on International Telephone and Telegraph. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–7

Glossary 

CDV 

See check digit verification. 

CDV routine 

See check digit verification routine. 

character recognition 

The process of matching a character and a classifier used to determine the character's 

identity. 

character substitution 

A technique for preventing items from being rejected by using code-line matching to 

prevent unreadable character rejects on repasses. Unreadable characters are replaced by 

the corresponding captured characters in the database entry using code-line matching. 

check 

A written order on an institution (drawee) by a depositor (drawer) to pay a certain sum of 

money from a demand deposit account to the order of either a third party (payee) or the 

bearer. 

check collection 

The process of receiving checks, drafts, and other items from a customer or another 

institution for the purpose of clearing items and crediting accounts. 

check collection department 

The department of an institution that performs check collection. 

check digit 

A digit in a MICR field used to test the validity of a field. 

check digit verification (CDV) 

A procedure in which the check digit is computed according to a formula and then 

compared to the value of the check digit recorded on the field. 

check digit verification (CDV) routine 

A mathematical algorithm used to verify that a field on the MICR code line is read 

correctly. 

CheckLink 

A product developed by J. D. Carreker and Associates to facilitate electronic check 

presentment and used by several large banks. IPS provides an interface through its Tape 

Input and Output Module to this product. 

check number 

A number that appears on a check and distinguishes different checks belonging to the 

same account. This number is usually encoded in the AUX Field of business checks and 

the TC Field of personal checks. 

check number relocation 

A processing option in which check numbers are treated as if they were encoded in the 

AUX Field, even though some documents may have the check number encoded elsewhere. 

Glossary–8 3981 6061–201

checking account 

Synonym for demand deposit accounting (DDA). 

Glossary 

cinemode microfilm 

A type of one-sided microfilm that can be filmed in one direction only. The use of this 

type of film simplifies other operations. 

CIPC account 

See cash items in process of collection account. 

city item 

classifier 

clearing 

An item drawn on a depository institution located in the same city as the processing 

Federal Reserve office. When deposited at the collecting Federal Reserve office, credit for 

city items is immediate. 

Character shapes, styles, variances, and other details that appear on a document that are 

analyzed by the CAR module to help determine the handwritten or machine-printed 

amounts. 

The process of exchanging items and keeping records of the amount of funds involved. 

clearinghouse 

A voluntary association of financial institutions located in the same geographic area that is 

formed to ease the daily exchange of checks, drafts, and notes among its members and to 

settle balances for their mutual benefit. 

closed days 

Days when an individual bank is closed on a regular basis, such as Saturdays and Sundays. 

Used by the Availability and Pricing Module to determine bank and customer availability 

and pricing. 

cluster 

A type of sort key in which two or more consecutive sort keys are treated as a single sort 

key. The sort keys must appear in ascending order. 

code-line conversion 

See account conversion. 

code-line data 

The information from the MICR code line of an item. 

code-line matching 

The process of matching item data in a repass to the data captured previously. 

collected balance 

A balance with zero-day bank or institution float. 

comma-delimited file 

See ASCII delimited file. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–9

Glossary 

command line 

The line on a PC screen containing the MS-DOS prompt. 

commercial bank 

A full-service financial institution that offers deposits, payment, credit, and other financial 

services to all types of customers. 

commingled endpoint 

An endpoint to which bundles that contain items with at least two different RTs can be 

sent. 

commingled inclearings 

The items received by a multi-institution processing center, at least two of which are on-us 

items from different customer institutions of the processing center. 

compaction 

A process that rebuilds a database by removing records for processed work and retaining 

records for unfinished work. 

consecutive rejects 

A situation in which items are rejected consecutively. Consecutive rejects often indicate a 

problem with the sorting run. For example, inserting documents into the hopper 

incorrectly may cause consecutive rejects. 

consolidated shipment (cash letter) 

A cash letter consisting of items of a particular type (city, RCPC, or country) drawn on 

depository institutions located in another Federal Reserve district. The local Federal 

Reserve transports these items to where they are processed by the collecting Federal 

Reserve office in the district where the drawee institution is located. The Federal Reserve 

assesses a fee for the use of their transportation system for these shipments. 

control level 

A subset of items delineated by two control tickets. Control levels are used to manage and 

audit the flow of items through the system. See also batch, block, end-of-job, and 

subbatch tickets. 

control point 

A position within a group of items at which a control ticket is introduced. 

control ticket 

A document used to delimit a group of items, to supply parameters to a process, or to 

allow an operator to intervene in a process. See also account separator ticket, batch 

ticket, block ticket, bundle cut ticket, end-of-job ticket, end-of-pass ticket, incoming cash 

letter credit document, locator ticket, pocket separator ticket, subbatch ticket, and tracer 

ticket. 

Control Total Summary 

A listing that summarizes control level information for one or more jobs. 

conventional environment 

IPS used without ICPS. Also called paper-based environment. 

Glossary–10 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

copy statement 

In Patterns, a statement in a base argument library that tells the search routine to copy the 

contents of a disk file containing a secondary argument library at the place where the copy 

statement is located in the base argument library. 

correspondent bank (institution) 

A financial institution that maintains an account relationship with another financial 

institution or engages in an exchange of services with another financial institution 

courtesy amount read (CAR) Module 

A freestanding, intelligent, high-speed character recognition module that locates, analyzes, 

and recognizes amounts on financial documents. 

credit 

A document that results in an increase to a customer's account balance. 

crippled account 

An account with a missing item, free item, or missing account separator ticket. 

customer float 

Float that is charged to a customer by an institution. Customer float is determined by the 

RT number, time of day of deposit, amount, and depositor. 

customer institution 

An institution that contracts with a multi-institution processing center to perform some or 

all of its item processing. 

customer schedules 

The listings of availability and pricing data for each financial institution for which a 

correspondent bank performs item processing. 

cut a pocket 

To force the end of a bundle in a transit kill pocket and queue a Detail List for the bundles 

from that pocket. May be performed before the bundle level is reached. Pockets can be 

cut while the document processor is running. 

cycle 

A set of accounts that all have the same statement date. 

cycle item 

A document belonging to a group of items that has the same statement date. 

cycle sort 

A sorting technique in which documents are sorted by DDA statement date for bulk filing. 

Exception items are also sorted to the appropriate pocket during cycle sort. 


A separately priced IPS module used to sort items by statement date for bulk filing. 

cycle storage 

The area in which documents are physically stored until they are fine sorted and returned 

to the customer. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–11

Glossary 

D 

data communications handler (DCH) 

A program used to control or communicate with an external DCP. 

data communications processor (DCP) 

A device used to extend the data communications capability of a host system by assuming 

responsibility for data communications tasks otherwise handled by the host. 

data communications software 

Software used for the transmission of data. V Series systems use Network Definition 

Language (NDL), Generalized Message Control System (GEMCOS), Switch Program, or 

V Series Communication System (VCS). 

data corrections activity 

The ICPS activity that allows an operator to correct MICR code-line data by viewing 

images of the items. 

data entry field 

A field on a screen in which you can enter data. 

data entry point 

A point in the system processing when data is entered into the database. 

data field 

The highlighted area on input screens where you enter information. 

data link processor (DLP) 

A hardware connection between a peripheral device and the mainframe. 

database 

(1) In IPS, a file or group of files containing information captured during processing and 

coordinated with each other to provide data integrity and efficient access. 

(2) A collection of information that is organized for ease of access. 

database file 

A Patterns file whose contents change as parameters are entered and changed, such as the 

Family and Job files. 

date of cash letter 

The business date on which the cash letter was printed, or, if changed, the date that the 

cash letter was sent. 

DCH 

DCP 

DDA 

See data communications handler. 

See data communications processor. 

See demand deposit accounting. 

Glossary–12 3981 6061–201

deadline 

debit 

Glossary 

The time of day by which a processing step must be complete in order to receive a certain 

benefit or begin processing a subsequent step. An example is the deadline for a transit 

shipment to be sent to a receiving institution to receive availability. 

A document that results in a decrease to a customer's account balance. 

default value 

The value used by the system when the user does not select a value. 

delimiter 

A symbol that marks the boundary of a field or series of options. 

demand deposit accounting (DDA) 

An account for which deposits are payable on demand. The account is drawn against by 

check or ATM transaction. No notice of withdrawal is required. 

deposit 

The cash, checks, drafts, and other funds that are received by an institution. For 

processing, each deposit is converted to a set of one or more contiguous credit items and 

one or more offsetting contiguous debit items. Either the credit or the debit items can 

appear first in the deposit, depending on the mode of processing used by the institution. 

deposit slip 

A listing of the cash and items that a depositor presents to an institution for account 

credit. 

Detail List 

A detailed listing of the items in a set of outgoing bundles. It includes count and amount 

totals of the items in each of the bundles. 

device terminal 

A document processor terminal that is not mounted on the document processor, but is 

located near it. The device terminal is optional with the DP 1800 document processor. 

DIN 

See document identification number. 

direct sends 

See direct shipment (cash letter). 

direct shipment (cash letter) 

Cash letters for which transportation to the processing Federal Reserve office is arranged 

and paid for by the depositing institution. 

directed fine sort 

The sorting of documents into sort key sequence using a user-defined sort key. The sort 

key is converted into a base number corresponding to the number of available pockets on 

the document processor; the resulting sort requires fewer passes. 

disable 

To turn off a function. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–13

Glossary 

discontinue 

A process that ends a program immediately. 

disk file 

DLME 

DLP 

A set of related records treated as a unit and stored on a disk. 

See Dual Line Matrix Endorser. 

See data link processor. 

document 

Any financial item, except coin or currency, that is encountered in a financial institution. 

document identification number (DIN) 

A unique number assigned to each item within a processing cycle. The DIN consists of a 

two-digit device number and a seven-digit sequence number. The DIN is used to track and 

retrieve an item. 

document processor 

A sorting device that can read, endorse, microfilm, capture images, and distribute items to 

pockets. 

document processor handler 

A program that contains the hardware-dependent logic to control a specific type of 

document processor. A document processor handler can run on the document processor 

or on the host processor. 

document processor port 

A program containing hardware-independent logic to process document data received 

from a document processor handler. See also input port. 

document processor terminal 

A terminal that facilitates interaction between the operator and the document processor. 

This terminal uses a display screen that is 40 characters by 12 lines. 

dollar cutoff amount 

A user-defined dollar amount that allows you to define different customer availability and 

pricing depending on the amount of the transit document. This amount is specified in the 

Availability and Pricing Module. 

double item 

A condition that occurs when two or more items are overlapping as they enter a document 

processor transport path; synonymous with piggyback. A double item is one example of a 

condition causing a feed check. 

download 

To transfer data from the memory of a host processor to the memory of a document 

processor. 

Glossary–14 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

DP 500 Item Entry System 

A Unisys product that provides prime pass and reject reentry of prime pass and repass on 

a DP 500 document processor. It is used with IPS to do reject reentry if terminal reject 

reentry is not used. 

draft 

drawee 

drawer 

A signed, written order by which one party (the drawer) instructs another (the drawee) to 

make payment to a third (the payee). In international banking, a draft is often called a bill 

of exchange. 

Any party or company upon whom a draft or check is drawn and from whom payment is 

expected. 

Any party or company who presents a draft or check on another party for the payment of 

funds. 

drop-and-align station 

A slot on the DP 500 document processor in which documents are manually inserted and 

aligned. 

Dual Line Matrix Endorser (DLME) 

A programmable endorser used on the DP 500 and DP 1000 document processors that 

prints two lines (up to 60 characters) of user-defined information on the back of a 

document. 

duplicate item 

(1) An item that has been processed through the same pass more than once. (2) In cycle 

sort, an item that has the same AUX number and amount as another item. The document 

processor will read these items as duplicates. 

duplicate major argument 

In Patterns, an argument that, when matched with an item value, leads to the same lowerlevel 

search as an adjacent duplicate major argument. 

E 

E-13B font 

The font type chosen by the ABA for the MICR code line. 

ECC 

ECP 

EWE 

See electronic check collection. 

See electronic check presentment. 

See electrical window error. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–15

Glossary 

edit criteria 

The tests that help to determine whether an item should be rejected. These tests evaluate 

aspects of the code line that must be true for the item to be valid. 

electronic check collection (ECC) 

Synonym for electronic check presentment (ECP). 

electronic check presentment (ECP) 

A form of check flow in which payment information is transmitted by electronic means to 

the payer, and the documents are delivered at a later time. 

electrical window error (EWE) 

An electrical document processor interface error caused by an error in the document 

tracking logic. All documents in track are rejected and the document flow is stopped. 

This is also called a Post-Read Document Error. 

enable 

encode 

To turn on a function. 

To place magnetic ink characters on the face of an item during processing through an 

encoding machine. Items are usually encoded with the amount. 

encoding mask 

A series of characters (symbols) arranged in a pattern, used to determine the 

specifications for encoding. On the DP 500 document processor, encoding masks are 

defined with the DP 500 Environment Generator (D5E) Program. 

end-of-job ticket 

A system control ticket that marks the end of a job. 

end-of-pass ticket 

In bulk filing, a control ticket that marks the end of a job. 

endorsement 

(1) The information endorsed on the back of an item as it is processed. It consists of 

endorsement text and tracer band information. There are three types of endorsements: 

multi-jet, nonimpact and stamp. IPS does not support stamp endorsers without custom 

modifications. (2) The text that is written, stamped, or sprayed on an item to identify the 

party previously having possession of the item. 

endorser band 

A horizontal area that serves as the location for nonimpact endorsement text. More than 

one endorsement band can be used, and bands can be located on both the front and back 

of an item. 

endpoint 

The financial institution that is the destination for a transit item. In IPS, the cash letter 

type of the shipments (such as machinable or nonmachinable) can result in the need to 

define different endpoints for the same destination. 

endpoint group 

A set of endpoints defined by the user to facilitate the printing of Cash Letter Recaps. 

Glossary–16 3981 6061–201

endpoint number 

A number assigned to an endpoint by the user. 

event 

A significant occurrence within a system. Queuing and task assignments are usually 

associated with events. 

event-driven system 

A system in which actions are initiated in response to events. 

exception item 

An item that differs from the norm and is noted or extracted for further processing. 

Glossary 

Exception List 

(1) A partial listing that includes only certain predefined exception items of the normal 

complete listing. (2) A complete listing of all exceptions of a certain type, usually used to 

look at out-of-balance control levels. 

exception routing and transit (RT) number 

An endpoint with an RT number that has been assigned special values for availability and 

pricing in the Availability and Pricing Module. 

Expected Keys Table 

A table of RT and account number elements used to sort items to pockets during fine 

sorting. 

export ID 

A number that identifies the parameters defined for image export in the IXPS job. For ISE, 

the export ID is the cycle number. For ICE, the export ID is the customer number. 

export type 

A number that identifies the type of image export job in IXPS. The export type is either 

ISE (export type 1) or ICE (export type 2). 

external table 

A host-based sort table that is external to the Sort Pattern File but linked to the sort 

pattern processing at run time. An external table is used for data that changes frequently 

(stop payment files, branch validation files, and so forth). The user builds it and can 

modify it without regenerating the sort pattern family that uses it. The external table can 

affect the distribution of items. 

extract ID 

In the base system, a six-digit identification number generated for the extraction, used for 

on-us extraction and common file extraction. 

extraction 

A process that pulls specified data elements from the IPS database to use them as input to 

another process on another host processor or on a PC. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–17

Glossary 

F 

fail statement 

A statement in an argument library that assigns a selector, instead of the reject pocket, to 

items that fail the search routine. 

family 

See sort pattern family. 

FED Code 

See Federal Reserve Code. 

FED Deposit Type 

See Federal Reserve Deposit Type. 

FED Item Type 

See Federal Reserve Item Type. 

Federal Reserve 

Synonym for the Federal Reserve Bank System. 

Federal Reserve Bank System 

An organization composed of 12 Federal Reserve Districts and their branches, plus the 

member banks, which are its legal owners. 

Federal Reserve Code 

A five-character code associated with each Federal Reserve Bank processing center. 

Federal Reserve Deposit Type 

The type of deposits sent in a cash letter to the Federal Reserve, either machinable, 

nonmachinable, package sort, or group sort. These classifications are useful when 

producing a rainbow sheet. See also rainbow sheet. 

Federal Reserve Item Type 

The type of items sent in a cash letter to the Federal Reserve. The type can be city, RCPC, 

country, or user-defined. These classifications are useful when producing a rainbow 

sheet. See also rainbow sheet. 

feed check 

A condition that occurs when items are not properly fed by the feeder mechanism of a 

document processor. A feed check can be caused by a double item, an overlength item, or 

an underspaced item. 

feeder 

field 

A device on a document processor that moves documents from the hopper into the track. 

A group of characters that define a unit of information. 

Glossary–18 3981 6061–201

filter 

Glossary 

(1) In the Sort Pattern Generator Module, the process by which a sort pattern is converted 

into its final format. Filtering is performed by the Sort Pattern Filter (SPF) Program on 

the host processor. This process can be performed automatically when a sort pattern is 

transferred from the PC to the host processor. (2) In the Statistics Module, the means of 

selecting statisical data for viewing by specific device number, site, shift, and so forth. 

filter program 

A program that modifies an existing file to produce a new file with the same data in a 

different format. 

final argument 

An argument with an assigned selector. 

final cut 

This term refers to the last job run in a job group. See also job group. 

financial institution 

An organization involved primarily in financial transactions, such as a commercial bank. 

fine sort 

finish 

The sorting of items into sequence by one or more MICR fields. An example is the fine 

sort used in a bulk filing system to sort the items of a cycle into routing and transit and 

account number order on the statement date of that cycle. 

A process that ends a program at the completion of the current task. 

first deadline 

An early deadline that is set to allow documents processed before this time to receive 

more favorable availability and pricing. This deadline applies to customer schedules. See 

also regular deadline, which applies to bank schedules. 

fixed disk 

On the DP 500 document processor or the PC, a permanent disk that stores captured data, 

system files, and application programs. 

float 

font 

The dollar amount of items (both check and noncheck) outstanding and in the process of 

collection. Contrast with collected balance. 

The shape and structure of a print character format that is used by automatic recognition 

equipment. An example is the E-13B font defined by the ABA. 

force balancing 

An option in ICPS Image Balancing that allows the operator to force a transaction to 

balance if the out-of-balance difference is within user-specified parameters. 

force out 

A process in the creation of a database string, where a partially full record is completed 

with filler entries and then written to the database. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–19

Glossary 

FRB number 

The first four digits of an eight-digit RT Field assigned by the Federal Reserve Bank 

System. 

free item 

G 

(1) In IPS, any item in a block in a given pass that was not in that block in the parent pass. 

(2) In bulk filing, an item appearing in the database produced by the Statement and Bulk 

Fine Sort Modules that is not on the DDA statement tape. (3) In IXPS, an item that was 

captured (found in the SCxtff File) but was not expected (not found in the CMxtxx File). 

GEMCOS 

See data communications software. 

general ledger account 

An account of final entry established for the posting of various transactions after journal 

posting has taken place. The term also applies to a group of accounts of a similar nature. 

See also journal. 

general ledger cutoff 

A daily posting deadline after which a new business day begins. This cutoff is used to 

determine the date for outgoing cash letters. 

Generalized Message Control System (GEMCOS) 


generate 

To convert a sort-pattern based on user-entered parameters into a file that can be used to 

sort documents. Sort patterns can be generated through the Patterns program or from an 

MS-DOS command line. 

good item 

An item that can be read and not rejected by the document processor. 

good quality work 

A group of items to be run on a document processor job from which few rejected items are 

expected. 

goto statement 

In Patterns, a statement in an argument library that tells the search routine to continue the 

search at another argument marked with a label statement. 

group sort cash letter 

A cash letter containing checks of a specific type (city, RCPC, or country) drawn on two 

or more depository institutions. Because the depositing institution has already done some 

sorting, this Federal Reserve service requires less handling of a group sort cash letter than 

of a regular deposit. Later cut-off hours are applicable to group-sort cash letters and 

credit is passed to depositing institutions on the same schedule as for city, RCPC, and 

country items. 

Glossary–20 3981 6061–201

H 

hexadecimal 

A numbering scheme that pertains to a base 16 numbering system. Hexadecimal 

characters are the digits 0 through 9 and letters A through F. 

high dollar reject items 

Readable items that are rejected because their amounts exceed a user-defined limit. 

Glossary 

high-speed document processor 

A document processor with a high throughput rate. An example is a DP 1800 document 

processor. 

high-speed item 

An item that can be processed on a high-speed document processor. 

holdover pocket 

A transit pocket containing items that missed the deadlines for the current business day. 

Holdover pocket totals are important in the settlement of check processing operations. 

holdovers 

Items that have missed all of the deadlines for the current business day and must be held 

until the next business day. 

holiday schedule 

A listing of the days on which an individual bank is closed, either because of holidays or 

closed days. 

hopper 

See primary hopper or secondary hopper. 

host processor 

A processor that accommodates the needs of a peripheral device, such as a document 

processor. 

I 

ICE 

ICM 

ICPS 

See Image Customer Export. 

See image count mark or independently compiled module. 

See Image Check Processing System. 

ICPS Interface 

The IPS function that allows IPS to work with ICPS. 

IES 

See DP 500 Item Entry System. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–21

Glossary 

IIPS 

image 

See Image Item Processing System. 

A digitized representation of an item. 

image count mark (ICM) 

A sequential mark that identifies the location of an item on a microfilm reel. Also known 

as a blip. 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) 

The application of IIPS that interacts with IPS to process both encoded and unencoded 

work using imaging technology. 

image code 

A one-digit code defined in Patterns that tells ICPS how to capture item images. 

Image Customer Export (ICE) 

A separately priced module and type of IXPS job that captures code-line data and 

document images for export to an image-enabled storage and retrieval application for use 

in applications such as account reconciliation, signature verification, and so forth. 

Image Export Processing System (IXPS) 

The application of IIPS that interacts with ICPS and IPS to capture MICR code-line data 

and document images to support image statement printing or other image-enabled 

applications in a financial institution. 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS) 

The Unisys platform that supports the imaging environment. 

Image Module 

The IIPS hardware added to a document processor that captures digitized images. 

image statement 

A customer's monthly DDA statement that includes printed check images, instead of 

physical checks. 

Image Statement Export (ISE) 

A separately priced module and type of IXPS job that captures code-line data and 

document images for export to the CBIS image statement printing application on the DDA 

host processor. The export to the DDA host processor can be done by magnetic tape or 

channel interface. 

Image Workstation 

The IIPS hardware used to view or update the images captured in an imaging environment. 

With ICPS there are both Image Balancing Workstations and Image Data Entry 

Workstations. 

imaging environment 

The IPS system with the hardware and software required to process checks using ICPS. 

impact endorsement 

See stamp endorsement. 

Glossary–22 3981 6061–201

import application 

Synonym for PC Cash Letter Control and Settlement Data Import Application. 

in proof 

Glossary 

A condition in which a proof amount is within an allowable range for out-of-balance 

conditions. This range is determined by the institution for the deposit, batch, and block 

level of balancing. For example, if the batch proof amount was set at $1.00, and a batch 

was out of balance by less than or equal to $1.00, then the items would be considered out 

of balance but still in proof. See also proof amount. 

inclearings 

The on-us items received from another institution. 

incoming cash letter credit document 

A credit item that generates a credit total. This document is used as a control level for 

corrections and for reconciling master lists. It is encoded with 4555-4555 in the RT Field, 

the incoming cash letter total in the Amount Field, and the depositing institution's RT 

number in the Account Field. It can be corrected, inserted, and deleted through the 

Corrections (COR) Program. 

independently compiled module (ICM) 

A subroutine that is compiled separately and then bound into the object code of a program 

or library. 

indexed sequential access method (ISAM) 

A method of indexing files that uses advanced key accessing for fast, online retrieval from 

large databases. 

inline report 

A report programmatically generated at specified intervals. An example is an inline Cash 

Letter Recap after the Detail List has been printed for the specified pocket. 

inquiry function 

A Sort Pattern Generator Module function that allows you to create standard operations 

reports and perform onetime inquiries on any generated sort pattern. This function is 

performed by the Inquiry Program, which is stand-alone. 

insert code lines 

A predefined MICR code line assigned to a debit or credit amount in an out-of-balance 

transaction during ICPS Image Balancing. Balancing continues after the amount is sent to 

an insert code line. 

institution 

Synonym for financial institution. 

institution ID 

A unique four-digit ID from 0001 to 1000 that defines a financial institution in the 

institution directory of the Sort Pattern Generator Module for purposes of institution 

maintenance. 

institution parameters 

A group of parameters that include the name and address of institutions whose work your 

financial institution processes using IPS. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–23

Glossary 

insufficient funds 

A condition in which the drawer's account balance is smaller than the amount of a check 

presented for payment. Usually abbreviated NSF (not sufficient funds). 

interactive program 

A program that requires the Manager (IPS) and Disk File Handler (DFH) programs to be in 

the mix. Most interactive programs are controlled by the IPS Program. 

interprogram communication (IPC) 

A transfer of data from one memory-resident program to another. 

IPS 

ISAM 

ISE 

item 

See Item Processing System. 

See indexed sequential access method. 

See Image Statement Export. 

(1) Any cashed or deposited check, deposit slip, control ticket, or other document. 

(2) Document information that is stored in the database. 

item charge 

A processing fee that your bank may charge for each document that it handles. 

item data 

Proof-of-deposit work and inclearings. 

Item Processing System (IPS) 

A Unisys product that performs document processing functions for financial institutions. 

These functions include document capture, distribution, reconcilement, and output of 

printed and electronic information. IPS is composed of a base product and a variety of 

optional, separately priced modules. 

item-level restart 

A procedure to resume normal processing after a processing failure. The work of the 

failed process is re-created up to the last item in the database, and normal processing 

resumes. 

IXPS 

J 

jam 

See Image Export Processing System. 

A condition that occurs when an item is unable to proceed along the transport path of a 

document processor. The transport stops whenever a jam occurs. 

Glossary–24 3981 6061–201

job 

Glossary 

(1) A basic unit of work consisting of a group of blocks. Within a processing cycle, each 

job is uniquely identified by its job number and key block number. (2) In the Sort Pattern 

Generator Module, a group of parameters that you define for prime pass, repass, reject 

reentry, and repass reject reentry. 

job group 

An option that allows the user to have automatic inline Cash Letter Recaps across a set of 

jobs. 

job number 

Synonym for sort pattern number. 

job-level restart 

Synonym for system-level restart. 

jog 

To align the edges of a stack of items by hitting or shaking them against a flat surface. 

joint photographic experts group (JPEG) 

(1) A standards group that formulated a compression scheme for digitized images. (2) A 

compression scheme for digitized images. The Image Item Processing System (IIPS) and 

the Image Export Processing System (IXPS) support the JPEG format. 

journal 

JPEG 

K 

key 

An accounting record of original entry in which transactions are listed and described in 

chronological order. 

See joint photographic experts group. 

See sort pattern key. 

key block 

The first block of a job. A unique key block number is assigned for each job. 

kill pocket 

A pocket that contains items that require no further distribution. A kill pocket is either an 

on-us or a transit kill pocket. 

L 

label statement 

In Patterns, a statement in an argument library that marks the line where the search 

routine continues after it reads a goto statement. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–25

Glossary 

LAN 

See Local Area Network. 

ledger balance 

The sum of the collected balance and the total float for a given account. 

line protocol 

A set of rules for controlling the sequence of transmissions on a data communications line. 

Local Area Network (LAN) 

A group of PCs connected by communications software, allowing each PC to share disks 

and printers. 

locator ticket 

In bulk filing, an optional control ticket that helps organize items so they can be located. 

Locator tickets are sent to each nonexception pocket during the cycle sort job. 

lockbox 

A post office box provided for a corporate customer by an institution to serve as a central 

point to which remittances can be sent by customers of the corporation. 

lockout condition 

An automatic condition caused by starting the All File Build (AFB) Program or the Disk 

File Handler (DFH) Program through the Manager (IPS) Program. During lockout, only 

bulk filing commands are allowed. When these programs complete, the lockout condition 

ends. 

log down 

log idle 

log off 

log on 

A method of computing and recording document processor downtime. The current time is 

recorded and the elapsed time is computed when document processor activity resumes. 

To record a document processor as idle during a period when it is not sorting checks. 

To end a document processing or terminal reject reentry session on the system. 

To begin a document processing or terminal reject reentry session. The operator 

identifies himself or herself to the system. 

logical station number (LSN) 

The number assigned to any terminal on a processor through data communications. Also 

referred to as station number (SN). 

low-speed document processor 

A document processor with a relatively low throughput rate. An example is a DP 500 

document processor. 

low-speed item 

An item that must be processed in some way other than on a high-speed document 

processor. 

Glossary–26 3981 6061–201

LSN 

M 

See logical station number. 

machinable item 

Synonym for high-speed item. 

Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) 

The common machine-readable medium for automated check handling. 

Glossary 

major argument 

In Patterns, an argument without a selector that is followed by an indented block of 

arguments. When matched with an item value, a major argument leads to a new search on 

a lower level of the argument library. 

market segment 

A group of similar customer accounts. Accounts may be grouped by type or by volume. 

Master Control Program (MCP) 

The Unisys program that controls the operations of a host processor. 

master list 

A detailed listing of the items, exception conditions, and control tickets with associated 

totals. 

master terminal 

A terminal through which control commands for the Manager (IPS) Program and all 

interactive programs can be entered. 

matched item 

(1) In the Cycle Sort Module, an item present in both the database created by the Cycle 

Sort Module and the DDA on-us tape. (2) In the Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules, 

an item present in both the statement cycle database and the DDA statement tape. (3) In 

IPS, an item that can be code-line matched to a parent item. 

MCP 

MDB 

See Master Control Program. 

See Microsoft Access database format. 

mechanical window error (MWE) 

A mechanical document processor interface error caused by document slippage. The 

documents in track are rejected and document flow is stopped. This is also called a Post- 

Read Document Error. 

MICR 

See Magnetic Ink Character Recognition. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–27

Glossary 

MICR key 

A sort pattern key that identifies positions on the MICR code line that are referred to in an 

argument library. 

MICR code line 

A line of characters encoded with magnetic ink that can be read electronically and used as 

the basis for check processing. These characters are divided into specific fields of 

information. See also Routing and Transit (RT) Number Field, Account Number Field, 

Amount Field, Auxiliary (AUX) On-Us Field, and Transaction Code (TC) Field. 

microfiche 

A sheet of microfilm containing rows of microimages of items. 

microfilm cassette 

The unit of microfilm that is loaded into the microfilm module of a document processor. 

Each cassette is filmed, developed, and then cut into reels for storage and retrieval. 

microfilm reel 

The basic unit of microfilm in film retrieval. 

Microfilm Retrieval Index (MRI) number 

A six-digit microfilm sequence number indicating an item's position within each reel of 

film. When selective microfilming is used, this number is sprayed on the document and 

replaces the DIN on the film. 

Microsoft Access database format 

A relational database format used by the Microsoft Access product. This format is used by 

the Statistics, Settlement and Cash Letter Control modules in IPS. 

military format time 

A 24-hour clock in which, for example, 4 pm is 1600 hours. 

missing item 

(1) In IPS, an item in a block during a previous pass that is not in the block in the next 

pass. (2) In bulk filing, an item present on the DDA on-us tape but not in the Statement 

and Bulk Fine Sort Modules database. (3) In IXPS, an item that was expected (found in 

the CMxtxx File) but not captured (not found in the SCxtff File). 

missort 

mix 

An item sorted to the wrong pocket. 

The set of programs currently executing on the host processor under the control of the 

operating system. 

mixed cash letter 

A type of cash letter for institutions depositing less than 5,000 items a day. Mixed cash 

letters may contain unsorted city items, RCPC items, items drawn on depository 

institutions in other Federal Reserve districts, and U.S. Treasury checks. Credit for mixed 

cash letters varies according to the collection experience of the Federal Reserve for each 

item classification. 

Glossary–28 3981 6061–201

MJE 

See multi-jet endorser. 

mnemonic 

A code, acronym, or abbreviation that represents a program or file name. 

module 

modulus 

Glossary 

A separately priced component of the IPS system. It can consist of one or more programs. 

(1) A user-defined number that is divided into the result of the check digit calculation to 

determine the check digit value. (2) In a CDV routine, the user-defined number used to 

divide the result of the check digit calculation. 

modulus fine sort 

A sorting technique in which the sort field is converted to a base number that equals the 

number of available pockets on the document processor. Sorting on the converted sort 

key takes fewer passes through the machine than sorting on the original sort key. 

MRI 

See Microfilm Retrieval Index number. 

multi-institution processing center 

A processing center that contracts with other institutions to perform some or all of their 

item processing. 

multibatch deposit 

A deposit that extends into two or more batches. 

Multi-Jet Endorser (MJE) 

An optional document processor module that prints up to eight lines of cancellation text 

and graphics on the front or back of a document. The MJE is an ink jet printing device. 

mutilated item 

An item damaged to the point where it cannot be processed by automated check 

processing equipment. 

MWE 

N 

NDL 

See mechanical window error. 


Network Definition Language (NDL) 


newkey statement 

In Patterns, a statement in an argument library that tells the search routine to switch to a 

different key without switching levels. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–29

Glossary 

NIE 

See nonimpact endorsement. 

nonimpact endorsement (NIE) 

A spray endorsement used by the DP 1800 document processors. It consists of four lines: 

three on the back and one on the front of the document. The front line contains the tracer 

band. 

nonmachinable item 

An item rejected by a document processor because it is mutilated and cannot be 

processed. Credit for cash letters containing these items generally is deferred one day 

beyond normal availability for the same type of item due to the additional manual handling 

required to process these exception items. 

nonstandard holiday 

Holidays that are not recognized nationwide, such as state or provincial holidays. This is 

used by the Availability and Pricing Module to determine bank and customer availability 

and pricing. Since not all banks are closed, the Availability and Pricing Module allows you 

to define these holidays individually for each endpoint and sendpoint. 

notice 

A single-line message maintained in the database used for operator notification. 

notification line 

The second line on a terminal screen. Notices are displayed on this line. 

NSF 

See insufficient funds. 

numeric keyboard 

A keyboard used for entering numbers, characters, and special program functions. 

O 

OCR font 

See Optical Character Recognition font. 

ODT 

offline 

See operator display terminal. 

A state in which terminals and document processors are not communicating with the host 

processor. 

offload document processor 

A document processor that controls the reading, formatting, endorsing, filming, and 

distributing of documents with its own internal processor. 

Glossary–30 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

on-us item 

An item processed by an institution and drawn against an account of that institution or, in 

the case of a multi-institution processing center, against an account of a customer 

institution. 

on-us pocket 

A pocket receiving on-us items that are not repassed. 

online 

A state in which terminals and document processors are communicating with and are 

under the control of the host system. 

operating system 

A set of procedures that enables a group of people to share a computer efficiently. An 

operating system receives requests from users and dictates the order in which their 

computations are carried out. It provides users with long-term storage of programs and 

data and protects them against unauthorized usage. It performs accounting of the cost of 

computation and assists management in measuring performance. 

operator display terminal (ODT) 

A terminal assigned to the operating system and used to control the operating system. 

This terminal can also be used to monitor stand-alone programs. Synonym for system 

console. 

operator ID 

A unique number associated with a given operator. It can be used to identify the functions 

that the operator is allowed to access or to report performance statistics for an operator. 

Optical Character Recognition (OCR) font 

A special font type that can be read by optical readers or wands. 

out-of-balance condition 

Synonym for out of proof. 

out of proof 

A condition in which a proof amount is outside an allowable range for out-of-balance 

conditions. This range is determined by the institution for the deposit, batch, and block 

level of balancing. For example, if the batch proof amount was set at $1.00 and a batch 

was out of balance by greater than $1.00, then the items would be considered out of 

balance and out of proof. See also proof amount. 

outsort 

To sort a group of items, defined by the user, to a specific pocket for special processing. 

For example, exception items or high-dollar items might be outsorted during a prime 

sorting pass. 

outsort pocket 

See power encode outsort pocket. 

over-the-counter work 

The items received and processed at a teller station. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–31

Glossary 

overdraft 

A check drawn for more than the balance on deposit. The institution can either return the 

check to the depositor who presented it for payment or pay the check. When the 

institution pays the check, it creates an overdraft in the depositor's account. Under a 

prearranged plan, some institutions automatically convert such overdrafts into loans. 

There usually is a service charge for overdrafts. 

overlength item 

An item that is longer than a predefined maximum for a particular document processor. 

An overlength item can cause a feed check. 

P 

package sort cash letter 

A cash letter that contains items drawn on only one institution and packaged for delivery 

to that institution. Federal Reserve handling is limited to presentment, settlement, 

adjustment, and return. Credit is passed according to the same availability as for city, 

RCPC, and country items. 

paperclipping 

A feature of the Corrections (COR) Program that allows the user to select individual items 

from an item display screen and have those items displayed immediately on the 

appropriate item maintenance screen, where the necessary changes can be made. 

parameter 

A variable used to define the processing environment for a system. 

parent pass 

The pass immediately preceding the current pass. If the current pass is the first repass, 

then the parent pass is the prime pass. If the current pass is the second repass, then the 

parent pass is the first repass. 

parent pocket 

The pocket from which items came on the previous pass. 

parity error 

A type of data communications error that occurs when data is gained or lost during 

transfer. 

pass 

password 

path 

A single run of documents through a document processor. 

A six-character word or string that an operator is required to enter as part of the sign-on 

procedure for certain processes requiring security access. 

In the Sort Pattern Generator Module, the route an item takes through the argument 

library to be sorted to a pocket or rejected. The route is determined by the search values 

associated with the item. 

Glossary–32 3981 6061–201

payee 

payer 

Glossary 

The person or legal entity named on an instrument as recipient of the funds to be paid. 

The person or legal entity that makes a payment. 

PC Cash Letter Control and Settlement Data Import Application 

A separately priced module of IPS that imports data extracted from the IPS database in 

ADF format into DBF style database tables on a PC. The DBFs created (or appended to) 

are used in the PC Cash Letter Control and PC Settlement Modules. The import 

application does not transfer the ADFs to a PC. This task must be done by a separate file 

transfer utility. 

PC testing 

The process that simulates the running of a sort pattern on a host processor using a 

sample item entered at a PC or a file containing sample items. 

pickup 

A process that enables work to be moved from one machine to another. 

piggyback 

Synonym for double item. 

pocket 

The part of a document processor to which items are sorted. 

pocket matrix 

A file that associates pockets with cycle numbers, exception codes, or safekeeping codes. 

This file serves as a cross-reference. 

pocket select 

To determine the pocket on the document processor to which an item will be sorted. 

pocket separator ticket 

A control ticket used to assign a unique block number to a set of items and to delimit the 

blocks of items. 

POD encoded work 

A group of previously encoded items that require proving. 

POD unencoded work 

A group of items that require both proving and encoding. 

POD work 

See proof-of-deposit work. 

poor quality work 

A group of items to be run on a document processor job from which many rejected items 

are expected. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–33

Glossary 

port program 

A program that resides on the host processor and downloads processing information to 

the document processor handler program. Port programs also accept data from the 

document processor handler program, which is formatted and placed into the database. 

post 

To update an account with transactions. 

Post-Read Document Error 

See electrical window error and mechanical window error. 

power encode outsort pocket 

The pocket on the power encoder that receives items marked for manual handling. The 

items can be marked either by the system or by Image Workstation operators when the 

information required to process them is not available. 

power encode pass 

The first repass for POD unencoded work performed on the power encoder. 

power encoder 

The document processor used with ICPS to run repass and encode items if necessary. 

preencoded item 

An item that has an encoded Amount Field at the time it is received at an institution. 

premium charge 

A processing fee assessed to a document that is processed after the regular deadline but 

before the premium deadline. This charge relates to bank schedules. 

premium deadline 

A deadline later than the regular deadline. It is set to allow documents processed before 

this time, but after the regular deadline, to receive less favorable availability and pricing. 

This deadline applies to bank schedules. See also second deadline, which applies to 

customer schedules. 

previous batch ticket key 

A key that indicates the positions on the code line of a batch ticket that are used in an 


pricing 

The fees charged to an institution or a customer for item processing services, expressed as 

a per-item charge. 

primary hopper 

The main bin on the document processor into which the checks and control tickets are 

placed for sorting. 

prime pass 

The first pass through the document processor. 

prime pocket 

The pocket from which items came on prime pass. 

Glossary–34 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

priority transit shipment 

The option that bypasses ICPS Image Balancing by allowing the Balancing operator to 

reenter amounts for an out-of-balance transaction with high priority. If the rekeying 

process causes the transaction to balance, the transaction can be shipped without further 

processing. 

processing center 

An institution that processes items. 

processing cycle 

An interval of time delimited by compaction or reinitialization of the database. 

programmable matrix endorsement 

The endorsement used by the DP 1000 document processor which provides the systemprovided 

tracer information (DIN and date). 

proof 

An operation used for determining the accuracy of a previous operation, such as relisting 

checks and adding their amounts to determine the accuracy of the total shown on a 

deposit slip. 

proof amount 

The amount by which a batch, block, or transaction can be out of balance but still be 

considered in proof. For example, if the batch proof amount was set at $1.00 and the 

batch was out of balance by less than or equal to $1.00, then the items would be 

considered out of balance but still in proof. See also transaction proof amount, batch 

proof amount, and block proof amount. On repass jobs, only block proof amount is used. 

proof-of-deposit (POD) work 

A type of work composed of deposits with offsetting credit and debit items. 

proof work 

Batches of items that can include both preencoded and unencoded items. 

protected field 

A field on a screen in which data cannot be entered. 

protocol 

A set of procedures used to govern the form and order of certain actions. 

protocol terminal 

The terminal through which an operator enters the commands to start, restart, and finish 

the interactive programs that run terminal-based functions. This terminal is generally 

defined to perform terminal reject reentry or corrections. 

Q 

qualified item 

An item with all pertinent fields encoded that is ready to be processed as a high-speed 

item. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–35

Glossary 

quality work 

See good quality work or poor quality work. 

queue 

queuing 

R 

A data structure used to store tasks that are to be processed by a program. 

The process of adding task entries to a queue. Queuing can be done either manually by an 

operator or automatically by the system in response to user-selected events. 

rainbow sheet 

A specialized format of a Cash Letter Recap containing a summary of an extraction. 

range argument 

In Patterns, an argument that provides a range of values to compare with the search value. 

RCPC 

See Regional Check Processing Center. 

real-time extraction 

A feature that enables the user to extract selected IPS database information at a specified 

point in the processing cycle. Each institution can write custom code to process the 

extracted data as needed. 

real-time extraction code 

In the Sort Pattern Generator Module, a two-digit code in the selector definition used to 

identify items for extraction by the Real-Time Extraction Service (REX) Program. 

receipt of deposit 

The time a deposit arrives at the check processing department. 

reconcilement 

A process that brings two different records into agreement by properly accounting for all 

outstanding differences. An example is the process of reconciling control level totals, 

which result from incoming bundle list totals, to their corresponding captured totals, 

which are accumulated during the capture process and reported on a master list. 

recover 

To restore a process to the state it was in before a processing failure occurred. 

recovery point 

(1) The point where a recovery begins. (2) A periodic checkpoint at which a system 

ensures that a recovery is possible. 

Regional Check Processing Center (RCPC) 

A processing center associated with the Federal Reserve System. 

Glossary–36 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

regular charge 

A processing fee assessed to a document processed before the regular deadline. This 

charge relates to bank schedules. 

regular deadline 

An early deadline that is set to allow documents processed before this time to receive 

more favorable availability and pricing. This deadline applies to bank schedules. See also 

first deadline, which applies to customer schedules. 

reject item 

An item sent to the reject pocket. 

reject penalty 

The penalty you may assess to cover the added cost of rehandling a document that was 

rejected during prime pass. The Availability and Pricing Module allows you to define the 

reject penalty as additional days of availability or increased item charge, or both. 

reject pocket 

A pocket to which all control tickets, items that fail the sort pattern, unreadable items, and 

items specifically selected to it by the sort pattern are sent. 

reject reentry 

A process that allows rejects to be corrected and reentered into a system. Reject reentry 

can be done after prime pass or repass. 

rekeying 

Reentering amounts and transaction codes on an Image Balancing Workstation. This is 

used in priority transit shipment. 

remainder 

In a CDV routine, the value with which the answer of the calculations is compared to see if 

a number has been encoded correctly. 


A separately priced IPS module that allows remote sites to be connected to a central 

document processing site via high-speed data communications. The remote sites do not 

require a host processor. Remote sites can perform high-speed sorting (with image 

capture, if enabled), terminal or DP IES reject reentry, corrections, and balancing. 

Reports are automatically routed to printers at the remote site. 

repass 

A pass that further sorts items that were processed during the previous pass. 

repass pocket 

A pocket required by the sort pattern for items that need further processing. 

repass reject reentry 

A feature that enables the operator to reenter high-speed repass rejects using the DP 500 

Item Entry System. 

restart point 

The point at which a process can be resumed after a recovery. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–37

Glossary 

return item 

An item that is sent back unpaid by a drawee institution to the presenting institution for 

various reasons. The endorsements and dates on the back of the item facilitate the return 

of the item to the institution of first deposit. 

REX code 

A Sort Pattern Generator Module parameter that allows you to identify items for 

extraction with the Real-Time Extraction Service (REX) Program. 

routing and transit (RT) number 

A nine-digit number appearing on items from an institution that identifies the institution 

and is used in processing. The ABA assigns the first four digits of the number that identify 

the bank on which the check was drawn. The Federal Reserve assigns the next four that 

identify the Federal Reserve Bank that serves the drawee bank. These may be optionally 

followed by a check digit. Synonym for transit number. 

Routing and Transit (RT) Number Field 

The field on the MICR code line that contains the RT and, if used, the check digit number. 

RT Field 

RT 

run 

S 

See Routing and Transit Number Field. 

See routing and transit number. 

The process of passing items through a document processor. 

S Series document processor 

A Unisys low-speed sorting machine. 

safekeeping 

A type of check truncation in which checks are posted and filed for a specific length of 

time. Statements are sent to customers, but not canceled checks. 

safekeeping item 

An item that is stored at an institution rather than returned to the customer. 

search routine 

A routine on the host processor that compares the data in the argument library statements 

to information associated with each item. 

search value 

The value used by the search routine to compare the data in an argument library statement 

with information associated with each item. For example, the search value might be a 

series of digits in the MICR code line of an item. 

Glossary–38 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

second deadline 

A deadline that is set to allow documents processed before this time, but after the first 

deadline, to receive less favorable availability and pricing. This deadline applies to 

customer schedules. See also premium deadline, which applies to bank schedules. 

secondary argument library 

In Patterns, an argument library that is copied into a base argument library. See also base 


secondary hopper 

A bin on the document processor into which bundle cut, locator, and tracer tickets are 

placed for sorting. 

selective microfilm 

An option to microfilm either all items for a job or all items for a designated pocket. 

selector 

In Patterns, a sort pattern parameter that controls the processing of an item by describing 

its characteristics. The selector specifies information such as check digit verification 

(CDV) routines to be performed and the pocket to which an item will be sorted. All items 

assigned to the same selector are sorted to the same pocket, although more than one 

selector can be assigned to the same pocket. 

sendpoint 

The endpoint from which a cash letter shipment originated. 

serial number 

Synonym for check number. 

settlement 

In check processing, the process of reconciling the results of the current day's processing 

by comparing various categories of totals such as debits vs credits, captured vs extracted, 

and pass-to-pass totals. 

shell batch 

Two batches that are read as one by the document processor. A shell batch is created 

when a batch ticket is not read on the document processor, and this misread batch ticket 

is appended to the previous batch. This causes the batch totals to appear to be out of 

balance. A shell batch can be corrected by dividing it into the two batches that were 

originally intended through the insertion of a batch ticket. 

shipment 

A set of bundles of items and Cash Letter Recaps sent from one institution to another. 

Shipment Summary 

A part of the Cash Letter Recap containing information about each cash letter sent to a 

specific endpoint or group of endpoints. 

shipment number 

A unique four-digit number assigned to each cash letter for a specified endpoint within a 

group. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–39

Glossary 

signoff 

sign-on 

A process that disconnects an operator ID from a program. 

A process that connects an operator ID with a program. 

single argument 

In Patterns, an argument that provides a single value to compare with the search value. 

site 

A logical concept that refers to an item processing database at a processing center. 

site number 

A unique number assigned to a site by the user. 

slew 

SN 

To advance microfilm or paper on a printer. 

See logical station number (LSN). 

soft reject 

A courtesy amount read (CAR) item where no separate cent-field could be detected. 

sort argument 

A value used in a sort pattern to select the pocket to which an item is sorted. 

sort pattern 

A user-defined data structure used by a document processor handler to determine pocket 

selection. 

sort pattern family 

In Patterns, a group of sort patterns and processing parameters for a prime pass and 

related repasses. Sort pattern families are divided into two types: IPS and IXPS families. 


A separately priced IPS module used to create, generate, test, and update sort patterns at a 

PC. Sort patterns are transferred to the host processor and then filtered into their final 

formats. The Sort Pattern Generator Module allows you to perform inquiries on generated 

sort patterns and to create reports. 

sort pattern ID 

A user-defined number that represents a family of sort patterns consisting of a prime pass 

sort pattern and, at most, two levels of repass sort patterns. The sort pattern ID is part of 

the sort pattern number of each of the sort patterns in the family. 

sort pattern key 

A sort pattern parameter that indicates where to look for a value. Sort pattern keys 

identify the search value, which is compared to arguments. See also MICR key, userdefined 

key, system key, previous batch ticket key, and tracer band endorsement key. 

sort pattern number 

A number when initiating a job that specifies the sort pattern to be used. 

Glossary–40 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

sort specification 

A file that contains fine sort parameters and other information describing how to pocket 

select items. 

SRM 

See Storage and Retrieval Module. 

stacked repass 

A repass that includes blocks from more than one previous pass job. The previous pass 

jobs must all have the same or compatible sort pattern numbers, and all of the items must 

have the same parent pass pocket number. 

staging 

The dividing of work into smaller sections by inserting control tickets at specified 

locations. Items are staged before being sorted on a document processor. Staging is 

sometimes referred to as setting up work. 

stalemate 

A processing condition in which a program cannot get access to a record or file that is 

being updated by another program. 

stamp endorsement 

An endorsement that may be used by the DP 1000 document processor only with custom 

modifications. This endorsement is used as a supplement to the DP 1000 programmable 

matrix endorsement, which contains only the system-provided tracer information (DIN 

and date). Contrast with nonimpact endorsement. 

stand-alone program 

A program that does not require the Manager (IPS) and Disk File Handler (DFH) programs 

to be in the mix. These programs run independently of the IPS Program. 

standard holiday 

Nationally recognized holidays, such as Thanksgiving, when all banks are closed, used by 

the Availability and Pricing Module to determine bank and customer availability and 

pricing. 

statement 

A record prepared by an institution for a depositor that shows all deposits made, checks 

drawn, and the new balance and interest paid (if any) after each posting. 

statement drop date 

A date on which a statement must be printed. 

statement rendering 

The process of verifying that all items are present for mailing with each statement. 

station 

A terminal that has been defined by the user as part of the data communications network. 

station name 

A unique name used to identify a terminal that has been defined by the user in the data 

communications network. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–41

Glossary 

station number 

Synonym for logical station number (LSN). 


A separately priced IPS module that records and reports statistics for high-speed 

document processors and DP 500 document processors controlled by the DP 500 Item 

Entry System. Statistics are collected for document processors, operators, work types, 

and sites and transferred to a PC. The user can select the statistics to be presented on the 

PC, and also design reports and graphs to present the statistics as needed. 

stop payment 

A refusal by an institution to make payment on a check at the drawer's request. The stop 

order can be by telephone, but a written request is generally required. 

stop-and-view station 

On the DP 500 document processor, a window located on the track to the right of the 

numeric keyboard that permits the operator to examine the document for errors without 

removing it. 

Storage and Retrieval Module (SRM) 

The IIPS hardware that stores the digitized images for retrieval by the Image 

Workstations. 

string 

subbatch 

A linked set of records in a database. 

A control level used for reconcilement. It is subordinate to the batch control level. 

subbatch ticket 

A control ticket used to delimit a subbatch. 

subfield 

A portion of a field used to relay certain information about an item. For example, the 

account subfield, a portion of the Account Number Field, identifies the cycle of the item. 

subjob ticket 

A control ticket programmatically generated during stacked repass, used to optionally 

recap the blocks processed during stacked repass. 

Switch Program 


system console 

A terminal assigned to the operating system and used to control the operating system. 

This terminal can also be used to monitor stand-alone programs. 

system file 

A Patterns file whose contents you never change. System files enable the Sort Pattern 

Generator Module programs to run. 

Glossary–42 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

system key 

A sort pattern key that contains information such as time, business date, beginning of 

block time, and the location of dashes in MICR fields. Many system keys are predefined, 

but you can add additional ones by modifying the code. 

system-level restart 

A procedure to resume normal processing after a process fails. All programs that were 

running at the time of the failure are started again. 

system-provided tracer information 

An area of the endorsement that consists of the DIN and date. This information is 

automatically endorsed during prime pass. 

T 


A separately priced IPS module that captures data in the IPS database from incoming cash 

letters that are on magnetic tape in Automated Clearinghouse (ACH) or CheckLink format 

for cash management and posting information. It also reconciles magnetic tape input to 

physical document input, and creates electronic cash letters in ACH or CheckLink format. 

TC 

TC Field 

teller 

See transaction code. 

See Transaction Code Field. 

An institution representative who transacts over-the-counter business with customers. 

terminal reject reentry 

A process that allows rejects to be corrected and reentered into a system, performed at a 

terminal, not at a DP 500 document processor. Terminal reject reentry can be done after 

prime pass. 

throughput 

The rate at which documents are sorted through a document processor, usually expressed 

as documents per minute or documents per hour. 

ticket 

TIFF 

An item that is used for special control purposes and can be distinguished from other 

items. See also control ticket. 

Acronym for Tagged Image File Format. 

time of cash letter 

The time that the cash letter was printed, or, if changed, the time that the cash letter was 

sent. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–43

Glossary 

tracer band 

A 32-character area on the front of a document for user-defined data. You define the 

tracer band using any non-MICR key. 

tracer band endorsement key 

In Patterns, a predefined sort pattern key that is released with the system. These keys 

include information such as block numbers, family IDs, and device numbers. Tracer band 

endorsement keys are not used in an argument library, but they specify information from a 

specific area of memory to be endorsed in the tracer band on each item as it is processed. 

tracer ticket 

A control ticket used with the Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules to identify and 

resolve sequence errors occurring when items are retrieved from the pocket in an 

incorrect order. 

track jam 

A condition that occurs when a document is stuck in the track of a document processor. 

transaction 

A group of items that results in an update of an account. Usually, each credit item of a 

deposit and its offsetting debit item represent a single transaction. 

transaction code (TC) 

A number that appears in the TC Field of an item immediately to the right of the Account 

Number Field. It is used to identify the item type. For example, the transaction code can 

identify whether the item is a debit or credit. 

Transaction Code (TC) Field 

The field of the MICR code line that contains the TC or the check number. On personal 

checks, the check number is always included in the transaction code. 

transaction proof amount 

The amount by which a transaction can be out of balance but still be considered in proof. 

See also proof amount. 

transfer 

The process in which you send a file from the PC to the host or from the host to the PC. 

transit department 

A department of an institution that is responsible for the preparation of outgoing transit 

work. This department produces cash letters and forwards these letters to Federal 

Reserve Banks, correspondent institutions, and other institutions for collection and 

payment. 

transit item 

An item drawn against an institution other than the one at which it is currently being 

processed. 

transit kill pocket 

A pocket receiving items that are to be sent to other institutions. 

transit number 

Synonym for routing and transit (RT) number. 

Glossary–44 3981 6061–201

Glossary 

transmit key 

The key that, when pressed, sends instructions entered on the screen to the computer for 

processing. 

transport 

The path a document takes through a document processor. 

travelers check 

A special check that is supplied by financial institutions and companies at a nominal cost 

and that is guaranteed by the institution upon which it is drawn. 

travelers check amount substitution table 

In Patterns, a table created by the user that is used to perform amount substitution of 

travelers checks that contain invalid or unreadable amounts encoded in the Amount Field. 

travelers check amount validation table 

In Patterns, a table created by the user that contains the user-defined whole dollar 

amounts that may appear in the Amount Field of any travelers check. 

travelers check validation 

A feature in Patterns in which a table is used to ensure that the amount encoded on the 

MICR code line of the travelers check is valid. 

truncation 

The termination of further physical handling of a set of items. Examples of truncation 

include selective item truncation at a teller window, truncation at the institution of first 

deposit, and account truncation with a guaranteed item photocopy sent to the customer 

upon request. 

U 

underspaced item 

A condition that occurs when the spacing between two items moving through the 

transport of a document processor is less than a predefined minimum value. An 

underspaced item causes a feed check. 

unqualified item 

An item that cannot be processed on a high-speed document processor. See also 

nonmachinable item. 

unreadable character 

A character on the MICR code line of a document that cannot be read by the document 

processor. 

unused pocket 

A pocket that is not specified in the sort pattern for that job. 

upload 

To transfer data from the memory of a document processor to the memory of a host 

processor. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–45

Glossary 

user-defined key 

A sort pattern key that specifies a specific area of user memory to be used as a search 

value. 

users 

The personnel who use the system. 

utility sort 

A modulus fine sort or directed fine sort. 

V 

VCS 


V Series Communication System (VCS) 


W 

waterfall pocket 

A user-defined range of pockets that is treated as one logical pocket. For example, when 

sorting in a waterfall pattern, the document processor fills the first pocket in the waterfall 

range first, then the second pocket, then the third pocket, and so forth, through the 

highest pocket in the range. The system records that all documents in the waterfall range 

sorted to the first pocket in the range. 

%Kill pockets, not repass pockets, can be designated as waterfall pockets. 

weight 

work 

A user-defined sequence of numbers used to multiply the numbers in a check digit 

verification routine. 

Items that have been presented for processing. 

work flow 

The movement of items through a processing center. 

work type 

In IPS, a two-digit sort pattern parameter that defines the type of work being produced. 

The types of work include encoded proof-of-deposit, unencoded proof-of-deposit, 

inclearings, cycle sort, bulk filing fine sort, and IXPS. IPS sort patterns include and 

exclude processing options based on the work type defined. The work type is also 

significant in the accumulation of statistics for IPS jobs. 

Glossary–46 3981 6061–201

Z 

zero kill 

Glossary 

To outsort an item because all significant, high-order digits on the document are zeros. 

zero kill pocket 

A pocket used during modulus fine sort to store items that have completed fine sort and 

are in final order. To outsort an item because all significant, high-order digits on the 

document are zeros. 

ZIP-executed 

Synonym for automatically started program. 

3981 6061–201 Glossary–47

Glossary 

Glossary–48 3981 6061–201

Bibliography 

AP 1327/AP 1329 Dot Matrix Printers Installation/Operations Guide (1220578). 

Unisys Corporation. 

AP 9515 Installation Planning Guide Site Preparation Data Sheet (3536 7705). 


AP 9515 Printer Operations Guide (3536 7655). Unisys Corporation. 

B 874/B 974 Data Communications Processor Message Control System Reference 

Manual (1168358). Unisys Corporation. 

B 2000/B 3000/B 4000/V Series GEMCOS Implementation and Programming Reference 

Manual (5026313). Unisys Corporation. 

B 9246-7 Printer Operations Guide (1205606). Unisys Corporation. 

B 9246-7 Printer Operations Quick-Reference Guide (1205614). Unisys Corporation. 

B 9246-31-6 Line Printer Operator Guide (1137221). Unisys Corporation. 

B 974 DCP Software Installation and Operator Guide (5022965). Unisys Corporation. 

CP 2000 Communications Processor Installation Planning Guide (1201290). 


CP 3680 Data Communications System Installation Management Manual (1137544). 


CP 3680 Data Communications System Language Manual (1137718). 


CP 3680 Data Communications System System Software Operating Guide (3D release) 

(1137551). Unisys Corporation. 

CP 368X Data Communications System Software Operation Guide (3.5 release) 

(1166766). Unisys Corporation. 

CP 368X Front End Processor Installation Management Manual (1166758). 


Customer Education Course Schedule (PE 0025 3). Unisys Corporation. 

Data Communications Processor Debugging Template (1122835). Unisys Corporation. 

3981 6061–200 Bibliography–1

Bibliography 

DP 500 Item Entry System Installation and Operations Guide (3981 5071). 


DP 1000 Capabilities Overview (1220155). Unisys Corporation. 

DP 1000 Document Processor Software Specification Sheet (2983 9172). 


DP 1000/DP 1800 Cinemode Microfilmer Operations Guide (2983 7606). 


DP 1000/DP 1800 Directed Fine Sort Installation and Operations Guide (1205341). 


DP 1000/DP 1800 Modulus Fine Sort Operations Guide (1174810). Unisys Corporation. 

DP 1000/DP 1825 Data Comm Installation Reference Manual (2983 8927). 


DP 1000/DP 1825 Operations Guide (2983 9198). Unisys Corporation. 

DP 1000/DP 1825 System Software Operations Guide (2983 9222). Unisys Corporation. 

DP 1800 Document Processor Capabilities Overview (2983 9180). Unisys Corporation. 

DP 1825 Document Processor Product Specification Sheet (2983 9149). 


DP 1800 Document Processor Site Preparation Data Sheet (2983 7770). 


DP 1825 Installation Guide (2983 8984). Unisys Corporation. 

GEMCOS Implementation and Programming Reference Manual (5026313). 


IC 1000/IC 1825 Imaging Module Installation and Servicing Guide (2983 7986). 


IC 1000/IC 1825 Imaging Module Operations Guide (2983 8679). Unisys Corporation. 

IC 1800 Imaging Module Installation Planning Guide (2983 8778). Unisys Corporation. 

IC 1800 Imaging Module Installation Planning Template (2983 9974). 


IC 1800 Imaging Module Installation Planning Template (Metric) (2983 9990). 


IC 1800 Imaging Module Site Preparation Data Sheet (2983 8752). Unisys Corporation. 

Bibliography–2 3981 6061–200

IC 1825 Imaging Module Installation and Servicing Guide (2983 7986). 


Online Error Reference Base Operations Guide (2983 9156). Unisys Corporation. 

Bibliography 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Amount Entry Operations Guide (2983 7754). 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Amount Entry Operations Reference Card 

(2983 7762). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Amount Entry Operations Training Videotape 

(UE2465-VHS). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Balancing Operations Guide (2983 7788). 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Balancing Operations Reference Card 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Color Brochure (1300554). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Customization Guide, Volume 1 (2983 7887). 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Data Correction Operations Guide (2983 7838). 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Data Correction Operations Training Videotape 

(UE2466-VHS). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Data Correction Reference Card (2983 7846). 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) DP 500 Power Encode Operations Guide 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) DP 500 Power Encode Operations Reference 

Card (2983 9248). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Graphical Work Flow Monitor Operations Guide 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Implementation Planning Guide (2983 9008). 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Installation, Administration, and Maintenance 

Guide (2983 7861). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Library Overview (2983 7879). 



Bibliography 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Program Product Specification Sheet (2983 

7713). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Reports Administration Reference Manual 


Image Check Processing System (ICPS) Work Flow Manager Operations Guide (2983 


Image Error Notification and Expert Resolution (IMENDER) Operations Guide (2496 


Image Export Processing System (IXPS) Channel Interface Site Preparation, 

Installation, and Administration Guide (2983 8968). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Export Processing System (IXPS) Customization Guide (2983 8521). 


Image Export Processing System (IXPS) Error Recovery Reference Manual (2983 8935). 


Image Export Processing System (IXPS) Installation, Administration, and Operations 

Guide (2983 8950). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Administration Guide (2983 7937). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Application Programming Guide (2983 9891). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Color Brochure (1300539). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Error Recovery Reference Manual (2496 1336). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Facility Planning Guide (2983 8745). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Functional Overview (2983 7978). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Functional Overview Maintenance Guide 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Imaging Module Operations Guide (2983 8679). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Installation Operations Guide (2983 8711). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Installation Project Management Guide (2983 



Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Installation Planning Guide (2983 8000). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Library Overview (2983 8695). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Product Specification Sheet (2983 8026). 


Bibliography 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Services Programming Reference Manual, Volume 

1: Host Services (2983 8042). Unisys Corporation. 


2: Workstation Services (3642 6195). Unisys Corporation. 


3: Communications Services (2983 9255). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Services Technical Overview (2983 8034). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Servicing Guide: Diagnostic Procedures 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Servicing Guide: Maintenance (2983 8091). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Site Preparation Data Sheet (2983 8059). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) System Configurator (1300538). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Technical Overview (2983 7960). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Utilities Operations Guide, Volume 1: System 

Operations (2983 8083). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Utilities Operations Guide, Volume 2: 

Workstation Utilities (3642 6203). Unisys Corporation. 


Directory Configuration (2983 8620). Unisys Corporation. 


Directory Configuration for Logical Units (2983 8307). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Workstation Installation Guide (3642 6179). 



Bibliography 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Workstation Operation and Maintenance Guide 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS) Workstation Technical Manual, Volume 1: 

Installation and Maintenance (3642 6187). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS/ICPS) Color Brochure (1300548). 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS/ICPS) Error Recovery Reference Manual 


Image Item Processing System (IIPS/ICPS) Imaging Error Notification and Expert 

Resolution (IMENDER) Operations Guide (2496 1476). Unisys Corporation. 

Image Item Processing System (IIPS/ICPS) Online Error Reference Base Operations 

Card (2983 9156). Unisys Corporation. 

InfoImage High-Speed Imaging Applications Capabilities Overview (3138 7871). 


IPS Reports Computer-Based Reference (4351 4272). Unisys Corporation. 

IR 9000 Series Storage and Retrieval Module Installation Planning Guide (2983 8786). 


IR 9000 Series Storage and Retrieval Module Installation Planning Template (2983 


IR 9000 Series Storage and Retrieval Module Installation Planning Template (Metric) 


IR 9000 Series Storage and Retrieval Module Site Preparation Data Sheet (2983 8760). 


IR 9000 Series Storage and Retrieval Module Servicing Guide: Installation and 

Maintenance Procedures (2983 8067). Unisys Corporation. 

IR 9000 Series Storage and Retrieval Module Servicing Guide: Parts Catalog 


IW 800 Installation Guide (UP 12976). Unisys Corporation. 

IW 800 Installation Planning Guide (3642 6179). Unisys Corporation. 

IW 800 Installation Planning Guide Site Preparation Data Sheet (3642 6161). 


IW 800 Product Specification Sheet (3642 6310). Unisys Corporation. 

Learning Patterns (VS 345-SPG). Unisys Corporation. 


Bibliography 

Management and Operations Reporting System Comprehensive User Guide (1147196). 


Patterns Computer-Based Reference (4351 3613). Unisys Corporation. 

PW 2 Item Processing System Sort Pattern Generator Module Installation Quick- 

Reference Guide (4351 3613). Unisys Corporation. 

T 27 Installation and Operations Guide (1196912). Unisys Corporation. 

T 27 Configuration Guide (1203601). Unisys Corporation. 

T 27 Programming Reference Manual (1196904). Unisys Corporation. 

Tag Image File Format Specifications, Revision 5.0 (Aldus/Microsoft Technical 

Memorandum 8/8/88). 

V Series BINDER Programming Reference Manual (5031487). Unisys Corporation. 

V Series CANDE Installation and Operations Reference Manual (4127 0109). 


V Series COBOL ANSI-74 Programming Reference Manual Vol 1: Basic Implementation 


V Series COBOL ANSI-74 Programming Reference Manual Vol 2: Product Interfaces 


V Series Communication System (VCS) Installation Reference Manual (5027758). 


V Series Communication System (VCS) Migration Guide (5027808). Unisys Corporation. 

V Series Communication System (VCS) Operations Reference Manual (5027766). 


V Series Communication System (VCS) Programming Reference Manual (5027790). 


V Series Item Processing System Base Operating Guide (3981 6632). Unisys Corporation. 

V Series Item Processing System Base Parameters Operating Guide (3981 6616). 


V Series Item Processing System CAR Location Parameters Reference Card (3981 6301). 


V Series Item Processing System Commands Reference Card (3981 6137). 


V Series Item Processing System Installation Guide (3981 6087). Unisys Corporation. 


Bibliography 

V Series Item Processing System IXPS Parameters Reference Card (3981 6434). 


V Series Item Processing System Library Overview and Master Index (3981 6079). 


V Series Item Processing System Message Reference Manual (3981 6103). 


V Series Item Processing System Modules Operating Guide (3981 6640). 


V Series Item Processing System Modules Parameters Operating Guide (3981 6624). 


V Series Item Processing System Reports Computer-Based Reference Installation 

Reference Card (4351 4272). Unisys Corporation. 

V Series Item Processing System Technical Overview (3981 6160). Unisys Corporation. 

V Series System Operations Guide Volume 1: Installation (4127 4804). 


V Series System Operations Guide Volume 2: System Commands (4127 4994). 


V Series System Operations Guide Volume 3: System Utilities (4127 0000). 


V Series System Operations Guide Volume 4: System Messages and Recovery (4127 


V Series VCS Implementation Reference Manual Vol 1: Entities and Screens (4127 0059). 


V Series VCS Implementation Reference Manual Vol 2: System Transactions (4127 0067). 


V Series VCS Installation and Migration Guide (4127 0075). Unisys Corporation. 

V Series VCS Operations and Utilities Reference Manual (4127 0042). 



Index 

A 

abbreviations 

file names, 4-2 

program names, 3-2 

account number subfields 

description, 5-6 

account separator tickets,description, 1-26; 

1-27 

ACG Program 


ACQt File 

programs accessing and updating, 4-7 

ACTt File 


ADTt File 


AFB Program 


Annt File 


relationship to Cnnt File, 5-18 

APB Program 


APG Program 


ARE Program 


ARG Program 


availability 

calculating, 5-2 

definition, 5-2 



account number subfields, description, 5-6 

availability and pricing, factors 

affecting, 5-10 

availability, definition, 5-2 

bank schedules 

BNKt File, description, 5-14 

calendar day indicator, 5-25 

charges, 5-32 

creating premium deadlines, 5-25 

creating regular deadlines, 5-25 

deadlines, description, 5-25 


determining, calendar day 

indicator, 5-25 

differences between customer 

schedules, 5-34 

interface with IPS, 5-14 

organization, 5-14 

premium charges, definition, 5-32 

premium charges, requirements for 

specifying, 5-32 

regular charges, definition, 5-32 

regular charges, requirements for 


used by banks, 5-10 

used by IPS, 5-10 

variables for each endpoint, 5-14 

closed days, information IPS uses, 5-8 

creating schedules 

market segments, 5-6 

premium deadlines, 5-25 

regular deadlines, 5-25 


Annt File, description, 5-18 

charges, 5-33 

Cnnt File, description, 5-18 

CnntPM File, multiple, 5-18 

deadlines, relationship to charges, 5-33 

differences between bank 


effect of variables, 5-18 



relationship to files, 5-18 



variables for each RT number, 5-18 

endpoints, description, 5-3 

entering 

closed days, impact on bank 


3981 6061–201 Index–1

Index 

closed days, impact on customer 


holidays, current year, 5-8 

holidays, future years, 5-8 

holidays, impact on bank schedules, 5-8 

holidays, impact on customer 


exception RT numbers 


impact on availability, 5-3 

functions, initialization, 2-8 

holidays 

closed days, 5-8 

information IPS uses, 5-8 

nonstandard, 5-8 

standard, 5-8 

market segments, description, 5-6 

required data, 5-10 

sendpoints, description, 5-3 

types of information 

availability, 5-10 

pricing, 5-10 

availability and pricing, factors affecting, 5-11 

˝B 

backing up 

data, 1-11 

balancing 


bank schedules 

BNKt File, description, 5-14 

calendar day indicator 

backward overlap when cutoff time is 

noon or after, 5-25 

deadline times and calendar days when 

cutoff is before noon, 5-25 

forward overlap when cutoff time is 

before noon, 5-25 

charges 

number per endpoint, 5-32 

premium charges, definition, 5-32 

premium charges, requirements for 


regular charges, definition, 5-32 

regular charges, requirements for 


creating 


regular deadlines, 5-25 

deadlines, 5-25 


determining, calendar day indicator, 5-25 

differences between customer 





relationship to BNKt File, 5-14 



variables for each endpoint, 5-14 

batch tickets 

description, 1-26; 1-28 

batches 


BICt File 

accessed and updated by, 4-7 


block tickets 


blocks 


BNKt File 


relationship to files, 5-14 

book repass pocket, functions, 1-36 

BTG Program 


bundle cut tickets, description, 1-26; 1-30 

BWP Program 


Index–2 3981 6061–201 

˝C 

calendar day indicator 

backward overlap when cutoff time is noon 

or after, 5-25 

deadline times and calendar days when 

cutoff is before noon, 5-25 


determining bank schedules, 5-25 

forward overlap when cutoff time is before 

noon, 5-25 

Cash Letter Control Module 

functions 

extraction, 2-9 

modifications, 2-9

STE Program, 2-9 

Index 

3981 6061–201 Index–3

Index 

CFB Program 


CFE Program 


changing 

MRI number 


charges 


dollar cutoff amount, 5-33 

format, 5-32 

number per endpoint, 5-32 

number per RT number, 5-33 

premium charges 


requirements for specifying, 5-32 

regular charges 


requirements for specifying, 5-32 

relationship to deadlines, 5-33 

CHC Program 


check processing, description, 1-2 

closed days 


entering 

impact on bank schedules, 5-8 

impact on customer schedules, 5-8 


CLS Program 


CMR Program 


CMxtxx File 



Cnnt File 


relationship to Annt, 5-18 

CnntPM File 

multiple, description, 5-18 

CNV Program 


COBOL74 libraries 

descriptions, 3-55 

used by programs, 3-42 

used by files, 4-13 

code-line matching,description, 1-40 

COM Program 


control levels, description, 1-25 

control tickets 

account separator ticket, 1-26; 1-27 

batch ticket, 1-26; 1-28 

block ticket, 1-26; 1-29 

bundle cut ticket, 1-26; 1-30 


encoding, 1-27 

end-of-job ticket, 1-26; 1-31 

end-of-pass ticket, 1-26; 1-31 

incoming cash letter credit 

document, 1-26; 1-32 

locator ticket, 1-26; 1-34 

pocket separator ticket, 1-26; 1-33 

subbatch ticket, 1-26; 1-35 

tracer ticket, 1-26; 1-35 

COR Program 


creating 

files 

ACTt File, 3-6 

BICt File, 3-16 

market segments, 5-6 


CSH Program 


CSP Program 


CSR Program 


CTG Program 



Annt File, description, 5-18 

charges 


dollar cutoff amount, 5-33 

format, 5-33 

number per RT number, 5-33 

relationship to deadlines, 5-33 

Cnnt File, description, 5-18 

CnntPM File, multiple, 5-18 

deadlines 

relationship to charges, 5-33 

differences between bank schedules, 5-34 




relationship to files 

Annt File, 5-18 

Cnnt File, 5-18 



variables for each RT number, 5-18 

Index–4 3981 6061–201


files, 4-23 

functions 


initialization, 2-10 

input, 2-10 

reporting, 2-10 

˝D 

data 

backing up, 1-11 

extracting, 1-10 

data selection process, 6-4 

DBC Program 


DBR Program 


DBU Program 


deadlines 

relationship to charges, 5-33 

DFH Program 


DIN 


displaying 

ICPS 

programs, 7-7 

DTP Program 


˝E 

EFG Program 


encoding control tickets, 1-27 

end-of-job ticket, description, 1-26; 1-31 

end-of-pass ticket,description, 1-26; 1-31 

endpoints 


entering 

closed days 



holidays 

Availability and Pricing Module, 5-8 



ENV Program 


EPG Program 


ETL Program 


exception pocket 

functions, 1-36 

exporting prime pass data, 1-22 

EXPt File 


extracting 

data, 1-10 

Index 

3981 6061–201 Index–5 

˝F 

FFB Program 


files 

accessed by IPS programs, 3-29 

functions 

Cycle Sort Module, 4-23 

Statement and Bulk Fine Sort 

Modules, 4-22 

mnemonics, 4-2 

names, 4-2 


Modules, programs that 

access, initialize, and update, 4-24 

temporary work files, external names, 3-33 

updated by ICPS programs, 7-7 

FSH Program 


FSP Program 


FSR Program 


FSS Program, description, 3-16 

functions 

corrections, 2-2; 2-6 

debug, 2-2; 2-7 

extraction 

Cash Letter Control Module, 2-9 


IPS, 2-2; 2-6 

Settlement Module, 2-12

Index 

˝G 

Statistics Module, 2-16 

ICPS, 2-2; 2-7 

initialization 

Availability and Pricing Module, 2-8 



Sort Pattern Generator 

Module, 2-5; 2-13 


Modules, 2-14 

input 



Sort Pattern Generator Module, 2-13 


Modules, 2-14 

Tape Input/Output Module, 2-17 

management 


Remote Site Module, 2-11 

Tape Input/Output Module, 2-17 

recovery 



reporting 



Remote Site Module, 2-11 



Modules, 2-14 

sort pattern, IPS, 2-2; 2-5 

terminal reject reentry, IPS, 2-2; 2-6 

general processing concepts, 1-2 

˝H 

holidays 

closed days, 5-8 

entering 

current year, 5-8 

future years, 5-8 




nonstandard, 5-8 

standard, 5-8 

HSD Program,description, 3-16 

HSH Program 


HSP Program 


HUL Program 


reports, description, 3-15 

Index–6 3981 6061–201 

˝I 

ICM 

names, 7-10 

ICPS 

accessing 

files, 7-7 

document processors, central site 

power encode outsort pocket, 1-36 

imaging 


repass jobs, 1-38 

imaging environment, work flow, 1-12 

IPS and ICPS 


system differences, 7-3 

overview, 7-2 

program names and mnemonics, 7-4 

IEG Program 

BICt File, 4-7 


files used, 3-29 

libraries, 3-42 

IGC Program 


fields used, 3-29 


imaging environment 

work flow, 1-12 

IMC Program 




incoming cash letter credit documents 

description, 1-26; 1-32

interactive programs 

classification, 3-2 

IOC Program 




IPC 

codes, 3-40 

names, 3-40 

subcodes, 3-40 

IPS 

COBOL74 libraries 


used by IPS programs, 3-42; 3-55 

conventional environment 


work flow, 1-5 

files 


names, 4-2 


Modules, 4-22 

updated by ICPS, 7-7 

functions 

corrections, 2-6 

debugging, 2-7 



input, 2-4 

management, 2-4 

recovery, 2-7 

reject reentry, 2-6 


sort pattern, 2-5 

IPC 

codes, 3-40 

names, 3-40 

subcodes, 3-40 

processing concepts, 1-5 

programs 

access each IPS file, 4-7 


names, 3-2 

temporary work files, 3-33 

structure, 2-2 

temporary work files, external file 

names, 3-33 

IPS Program 


programs that update each IPS file, 4-7 

IRC Program 




IRH Program 


IRP Program 


ISC Program 




IXPS 


Index 

3981 6061–201 Index–7 

˝J 

jobs 

description 

prime pass, 1-38 

repass, 1-38 

stacked repass, 1-38 

repass 

conventional, 1-38 

imaging, 1-38 

˝K 

kill pocket, functions, 1-36 

˝L 

libraries (See COBOL74 libraries) 

locator ticket, description, 1-26; 1-34 

LOE Program 

description, 3-20

Index 

M 

market segments 

creating, 5-6 


MDP Program 


MFxtxx File 



MICR code line 

ABA standard, 1-23 


format, 1-23 

general description, 1-2 

Missing and Free reports, 3-16; 7-2 

MPG Program (See the Patterns Computer- 

Based Reference for information 

about the PC-based MPG Program) 


MRI number 


˝N 

naming conventions 

programs, 3-2 

files, 4-2 

(See also abbreviations) 

nonexception pocket, functions, 1-36 

˝O 

ONE Program 


˝P 

PEI Program 


PEP Program 


PES Program 


PIC Program 


PMG Program 


pocket separator ticket, 


pockets 


functions 

book repass pocket, 1-36 

exception pocket, 1-36 

kill pocket, 1-36 

nonexception pocket, 1-36 

power encode outsort pocket, 1-36 

reject pocket, 1-37 

repass pocket, 1-37 

waterfall pocket, 1-37 

zero kill pocket, 1-37 

power encode outsort pocket 

functions, 1-36 

pricing information,description, 5-10 

prime pass data, exporting, 1-22 

processing tasks performed daily, 1-5 

programs 

classification 

automatically started, 3-2 

interactive, 3-2 

stand-alone, 3-2 

descriptions, 3-6 to 3-28 


names, 3-2 

naming conventions, 3-2 

temporary work files, external file 

names, 3-33 

that access each IPS file, 4-7 

that update each IPS file, 4-7 

proof and encoding,description, 1-5 

PTT Program 


Index–8 3981 6061–201 

˝R 

RAG Program 


RAJ Program 

description, 3-23

Rbbbbt File 



RCxtff File 



reentering rejects 


reject pocket, functions, 1-37 


functions 



REP Program 


repass pocket, functions, 1-37 

reports 

printing transit, 1-10 

REX Program 

data selection process, 6-4 


RMD Program 


RPM Program 


RPR Program 


RT numbers 

exception, description, 5-3 

exception, impact on availability, 5-3 

˝S 

S4G Program 


S4P Program 


S4S Program 


SCG Program 


SCxtff File 



sendpoints 


setting up 

terminals 


Settlement Module 

functions 


modifications, 2-12 

ONE Program, 2-12 


functions 


input, 2-13 

recovery, 2-13 


sorting items, 1-8 

SPF Program 


SPL Program 


SPM Program 


SPU Program 


SSE Program 


SSR Program 


Statement and Bulk Fine Sort Modules 

Cycle Sort Module requirements, 4-23 

end-of-pass ticket, 1-26 

files 

IPS files, 4-22 

functions 


input, 2-14 

IPS files, 4-22 



functions 


modifications, 2-16 

selection criteria, 2-16 

STE Program 


STX Program 


subbatch tickets 


Index 

3981 6061–201 Index–9

Index 

T 


functions 

input, 2-17 


TDP Program 


TIP Program 


TIR Program 


TMH Program 


TMP Program 


TPP Program 


TRP Program 


tracer ticket, description, 1-26; 1-35 

W 

waterfall pockets 


work flow environment 

conventional, 1-5 

imaging, 1-12 

work flow, description, 1-5 

Index–10 3981 6061–201

V Series IPS Technical Overview - Public Support Login - Unisys

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?